Home

RSA3408A User Manual

1. m Center 1 5 GHz deltaF Hz Ratio dBc 4 D RFID 18000 4 6 Spurious Search 1 525 4 728M 4 725M 7 925M 7 925M 11 125M 11 125Iv 14 325Nv 14 34 82 34 84 44 52 4458 4877 4 48 82 5138 4 51 41 53 17 53 Figure 3 53 Spurious measurement RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RSA3408A User Manual Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu of the spurious measurement is same as that of the S A mode Refer to page 3 16 Figure 3 53 on page 3 66 shows an example of the spurious measurement For the detected spurious signals the spurious marker is displayed on the waveform by assigning the numbers from 1 in the maximum order of amplitude Furthermore the frequency difference deltaF and amplitude ratio Ratio with the carrier is displayed in the table in the lower part of the screen Using Video Filter The spurious measurement in the RFID analysis has a video filter function for compatibility with measurement data from conventional swept spectrum analyzers Normally swept spectrum analyzers smooth the detected signal with a video filter having a bandwidth equal to the resolution bandwidth However you
2. 4 Signal Source Analysis Spurious Figure 3 76 Spurious measurement RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Real Time Phase Noise Measurement RSA3408A User Manual Measures the phase noise in real time The measurement results can be displayed in three dimensions like spectrogram called Noisogram the color axis shows the C N dBc Hz the horizontal axis shows the offset frequency Hz and the vertical axis shows the time frame number Jitter equivalent to the RMS value of the phase noise and the settling time of the phase noise and jitter are also calculated from the phase noise data Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for the Real Time Phase Noise measurement Analyze Performs measurement for acquisition data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings The next items are the same as for the phase noise measurement Refer to page 3 105 Carrier Threshold Level Carrier Bandwidth C N Sideband Rj Start Offset Frequency Rj Stop Offset Frequency Max Pj Threshold The following items are added for the real time measurement see
3. 000000000 Figure 1 12 Setting up the stand RSA3408A User Manual 1 13 Installation Functional Check The analyzer has a built in calibration signal source with a frequency of 100 MHz and an amplitude of approximately 20 dBm Using this source perform this quick functional check to verify that your instrument is operating correctly 1 Turn on the analyzer 2 Display the spectrum of the calibration signal a Press the S A key on the front panel and then press the Spectrum Analyzer side key Press the PRESET key on the front panel to reset the analyzer Press the INPUT key on the front panel Press the Signal Input Port side key to select Cal100M The spectrum of the calibration signal appears Check that INPUT CAL and FREE RUN are displayed in the status indicator at the upper right of the screen see Figure 1 13 Tektronix RSA 3408A 2004 12 07 14 08 00 Frequency 100 MHz rp m RBW 100 kHz Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dR Trace 2 Off marker 100 MHz 21 13 dBm 71 13 dBm dzz uU dim Marker readout Marker dB 100 dBm Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Center 100 MHz Sy NPUT Cancel Back Signal Input Port Status indicator c
4. U Ir CEY U L Vl 0000000040 0001010191020 U RF INPUT N type connector 8 5 Figure 2 26 Cable connection 2 Setthe signal generator as follows Center frequency 100 MHz Output level 10 dBm Modulation type AM Modulation source Internal 10 kHz Modulation depth 50 2 32 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Applying the Power 1 Apply power to the signal generator 2 Turn on the principal power switch PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 27 The orange LED on the front panel lights Principal power switch Figure 2 27 Principal power switch rear panel 3 Turn on the power switch ON STANDBY on the front panel as shown in Figure 2 28 Power switch LED Figure 2 28 Power switch ON STANDBY RSA3408A User Manual 2 33 Tutorial The initial screen shown in Figure 2 29 appears after Windows XP starts up the background color is in white in this manual to make figures mor
5. Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum 2 Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 400 ps Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Threshold Input Att 20 dB dB 100 4 4 dBm dBm dsj 10 dB B an _ 104 E Start 400 us Scale 40 Lis Center 100 MHz Span 10 MHz 225 deg d NAM i mds deg 400 Lis Scale 20 is Analog Demod PM Demod Main view Phase variation Figure 3 36 PM demod measurement You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing SYSTEM Instrument Setup Angular Units RSA3408A User Manual 3 41 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode IQ versus Time Measures I and Q level over time Figure 3 37 shows an example The Measurement main view shows the I Q voltage versus time graph I and Q are indicated in yellow and green respectively The IO level measurement has no Meas Setup menu items Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum LA ee Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 150 s Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Input Att 20 dB 0 0 dBm dBm 10 dB 10 dB pos Em 100 dBm Start 160 us Scale 15 jus Center 100 MHz Span 10 MHz 500 i mV q lt lt lt lt 100 mV 500 my Start 160 Lis Scale 8 sf Analog Demod IQ versus Time Main view 1 0 voltage versus Time and Q a
6. 3 127 Amplitude Menu me IER IO re e E CERO Ee E 3 127 Over Voltage Input E ee ee nn 3 131 Amplitude Correction o sev eee ER ele e ere wa Rh ERR 3 132 Setting Timing Parameters 3 141 Timing Menu i oa ye Dee de 9 r9 ex rae 3 141 Seamless Acquisition 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee n 3 145 TYG BO 5 m 3 147 Trigger Menu erred kath eu ph t dln RP cea eer eder EON I oat 3 148 Creating a Trigger Mask Option 02 Only 3 155 Trigger Point Indicator 20 baad ema ene eke Ser RR EI gi 3 161 Synchronous Operation with External Instruments 3 162 RSA3408A User Manual Table of Contents RSA3408A User Manual EFT and RBW siete rH 3 163 RBW PEP Meri ede Mies Ra ERR qe eat ia ae 3 164 PODIS meae toto erar Go ieee nes its Rea RH CU esc eue Headed nek 3 167 EET Window tu Ek Pel a RC tee NS a e Ee 3 168 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function 3 173 Trace Avg aote te toten ee ee e HR Re o s ere Gage ree 3 174 Displaying Trace 1 2 cece eee eee 3 176 Averaging the Waveform 3 177 Saving Loading Waveform Data 3 180 Trace Compression Fe eh oe ea eoe eto het oe led eoe ids 3 180 Setting Views cec e OPER IATER S RR 3 183 VIE
7. 8 301563 ms Figure 3 57 Power on down measurements 3 74 RSA3408A User Manual Standard Type Manual Link Modulation Type ASK Decoding Format NRZ Auto Bit Rate On Of Bit Rate Bit Sec 40k Go to page 2 2171875 LS of 2 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RSA3408A User Manual Changing the View The contents of the view can be changed in the following item by pressing the VIEW DEFINE key The following items are the same as the RF carrier measurement Refer to page 3 64 Show Views Overview Content Subview Content Edge t Selects an edge number index number of the measurement table for displaying a waveform on the main screen The edge number is assigned to the rising falling edge of each pulse Refer to page 3 72 Figure 3 56 Guidelines Selects whether to display the guideline red along with the waveform in the main view m On Default Displays the guideline m Off No guideline is displayed Scroll Table Scrolls the measurement table in the main view horizontally Changing the Vertical Unit The unit is W watts by default for the vertical axis of the graph displayed in the main view You can also select dBm and V volts using VIEW SCALE Unit NOTE The measurement table in the main view always displays the results for waveform data with the default unit of W Selecting the unit does not affect the tab
8. RSA3408A User Manual 3 211 Marker Operation and Peak Search Markers Menu The Markers menu controls the marker operation and peak search Figure 3 149 shows the menu structure MARKERS SELECT PEAK 2 MARKER v MARKER Select Marker 1 2 Marker X Position Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X S A mode Reference Cursor Off Center Freq Marker Freq Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X Demod and Time Transient modes All Markers Off E Assign Marker X to Trace 1 2 Analysis Time Marker Time S A mode only Figure 3 149 Markers menu structure 3 212 Peak Search Freq Threshold Demod and Time Transient modes only Peak Search Hor Threshold Reference Cursor to Trigger Reference Cursor to Trigger Output Time CCDF mode only Peak Search Hor Threshold RSA3408A User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search SELECT MARKER PEAK Marker Left lt q Right gt Marker Up A Down V RSA3408A User Manual Selects which marker is being controlled in the delta marker mode If markers are disabled pressing this key enables Marker 1 Sets instrument parameters based on the marker position s Center Freq Marker Freq Changes the center frequency to match the current marker position Analysis Time Marker Time Demod and Time modes only Sets t
9. Demod PM Demod IQ versus Time Span 20 kHz Start 54 ms Analog Demod AM Demod Figure 2 51 AM signal measurement Scale 6 4 ms Measurement Off RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Setting Analysis Range Set an analysis range which will be displayed with a green underline in the overview 1 Press the TIMING key on the front panel MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL STOP SPAN TRIG RBW AMPLITUDE FFT TIMING key TIMING TS Sets analysis range LL MEAS MEASURE SETUP Two vertical green lines appear indicating the analysis range shown in Figure 2 52 2 Press the Acquisition History side key to specify the number of the block to be analyzed Leave it at 0 the latest block its default value 3 Press the Analysis Length side key and specify the time length of the analysis range For example enter 32 ms using the numeric keypad 4 Press the Analysis Offset side key and specify the starting point of the range For example enter 24 ms using the numeric keypad RSA3408A User Manual 2 59 Tutorial Tektronix RSA 3408A Frequency 100 MHz Two green vertical lines represent Span 20 kHz n analysis ran Input Att 15 dB range 0 10 dB 100 dBm Start 64 ms e 6 4 ms Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz 100 96 20 P The main view shows the waveform an
10. The amplitude correction concept Amplitude correction example Amplitude correction data input Amplitude offset Frequency offset Amplitude correction setup display Timing menu structure Timing parameters Timing parameters in the zoom mode Frame cycle 452 2 e beer er rente ne ET ERA Figure 3 100 Seamless acquisition Figure 3 101 Trigger menu structure Figure 3 102 Trigger position Figure 3 103 Power trigger detection range Figure 3 104 Trigger level and slope Figure 3 105 Acquiring and displaying data by Trigger and Repeat modes Un ETE en bj ore ele eR Figure 3 106 Trigger mask 3 94 3 94 3 98 3 99 3 102 3 106 3 107 3 110 3 112 3 113 3 114 3 116 3 117 3 118 3 121 3 123 3 125 3 126 3 127 3 128 3 131 3 132 3 134 3 137 3 139 3 139 3 140 3 141 3 143 3 144 3 145 3 145 3 148 3 150 3 151 3 152 3 153 3 155 Table of Contents Figure 3 107 Figure 3 108 Figure 3 109 Figure 3 110 Figure 3 111 Figure 3 112 Figure 3 113 Figure 3 114 Figure 3 115 Figure 3 116 Figure 3 117 Figure 3 118 Figure 3 119 Figure 3 120
11. 44 866 1299657704 Main view Symbol table Figure 3 44 Symbol table analysis RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Eye Diagram Analysis RSA3408A User Manual Performs digital demodulation processing and displays an eye diagram in the main view Figure 3 45 shows an example For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 45 83 For setting views refer to page 3 1 Overview Power versus Time Tektronix RSA 3408A Subview Spectrum Frequency 800 MHz Acquisition Length 12 3 ms Span 100 kHz Input Att 20 dB 0 0 10 dB 10 dB 100 bm Timing e 00 Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 800 MHz Marker 1 693 75ms 0 698 15 Span 100 kHz 300 m 15 Os Digital Demod Eye Diagram Main view Figure 3 45 Eye diagram analysis Eye diagram 95 238095 Us MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Parameter Presets PDC Modulation Type Modulation Parameters Auto Carrier QPSK On Off Carrier Frequency Hz 44 954 1690423745 You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing SYSTEM Instrument Setup Angular Units 3 55 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 56 AM AM Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays an AM AM distortion graph for measuring
12. 3 Demod Standard PM Demod IQ versus Time Pulse Spectrum gt Constellation EVM IQ Frequency versus Time Power versus Time Symbol Table Eye Diagram CCDF PDF Figure 3 25 Demod menu structure There are three items in the Demod menu Analog Demod Performs analog modulation analysis Refer to page 3 37 for details m Digital Demod Option 21 Only Performs digital modulation analysis Refer to page 3 44 for details m Standard Performs modulation analysis according to a communication standard For details refer to the user manual included in each option as shown in Table 3 5 For RFID analysis refer to page 3 61 RSA3408A User Manual 3 27 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Table 3 5 Standard menu in the Demod mode Menu item Option Description W CDMA UL W CDMA uplink analysis 3GPP R5 DL 3GPP Release 5 downlink analysis 3GPP R5 UL 3GPP Release 5 uplink analysis 3GPP R6 DL 3GPP Release 6 downlink analysis 3GPP R6 UL 3GPP Release 6 uplink analysis TD SCDMA TD SCDMA analysis GSM EDGE GSM EDGE analysis cdma2000 Fwd cdma2000 forward link analysis cdma2000 Rev cdma2000 reverse link analysis 1xEV DO Fwd cdma2000 1xEV DO forward link analysis 1xEV DO Rev cdma2000 1xEV DO reverse link analysis IEEE802 11a b g WLAN 802 11a b g analysis RFID RFID analysis 3 28 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Measurement Screen
13. View Orientation Tal Wide Grid Style Off Fix Flex 10 dB 100 U dBm 100 0 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Menu Off with Spectrogram Measurement Off Figure 2 45 Tall display of spectrum and spectrogram c Press the View Orientation side key to select Wide 2 51 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial 5 Display spectrogram only a Press the VIEW SELECT key and then select the spectrogram on the display The selected view is framed in white on screen DISPLAY MODE VIEW p S A SELECT DEFINE DEMOD SCALE LINES VIEW SELECT key Selects a view to operate MARKERS The selected view is surrounded by a white frame TIME A CFI FAT b Press the VIEW DEFINE key and then press the Show Views side key to select Single Only the spectrogram is displayed see Figure 2 46 The new frame is displayed in order from the bottom Amplitude is represented in colort gt Default scale is from Red 0dBm to Blue 100dBm Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Frequency Figure 2 46 Spectrogram view Press the Show Views side key again to return to Multi 2 52 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Spectrum Analysis There are several measurement items in the spectrum analysis such as ACPR Adjacent Channel Leak Power Ratio C N Carrier vs Noise Power Ratio and OBW Occupied Band Width These items enable you to perfo
14. Up key Decreases the value Increases the value General purpose knob Rotate clockwise to increase the value and counterclockwise to decrease the value The up and down keys have the same functions as the general purpose knob except the step size the amount per click by which the general purpose knob changes a setting value or the amount per press for the up and down keys as follows For the general purpose knob the step size is determined internally You can not change the step size For the up and down keys the step size is set with the Step Size side key Refer to Changing the Step Size on page 2 22 for the detail The changed value is immediately reflected on the analyzer settings and displays 2 20 RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Entering a Value Using the Keypad You can enter values using the front panel keypad shown in Figure 2 17 1 Press the side key for setting a numeric value For example press FREQUENCY CHANNEL Center Freq to set a center frequency The menu item changes to the display shown in Figure 2 16 m Freq i Indicates that numeric values can be changed with the general purpose knob Numeric input field Figure 2 16 Changing value with the keypad 2 Press the keys required to enter the desired numeric value For example to enter the frequency 123 45 MHz press1 23 4 5 MHz To delete an entered number press the BKSP Backspace key
15. UserManual Marker UserManual Setting UserManual Marker UserManual Marker UserManual Using UserManual UserManual Setting UserManual Trigger Search previous results Match similar words Search titles only J Display Found 8 UserManu UserManu UserManu UserManu UserManu UserManu UserManu UserManu 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 OLHO245 01 00 Setting Frequency and Span This section describes frequency and span that are fundamental settings for observing spectrum These items are set with the general purpose knob and the numeric input keypad You can also use the MERSI and peak search function to set frequency To set those fundamental settings of frequency and Span use the blue keys on the left side of the front panel Topics Basic procedure Setting range Vector span g Figure 3 159 Word search using the keyboard RSA3408A User Manual Cancel Back View Front Panel Button Help View Online User Manual View Online Programmer Manual Selecting Input Source You can select from three input sources in the Input menu IQ and Cal UTILITY HELP PRESET Ss CAL SAVE Figure 3 160 Input menu tree Input Menu Signal Input Port Reference Source 4 RF IQ Cal100M Cal25M Int Ext The Input menu contains the following controls
16. Sweep start Fstop 1 Figure 1 2 Sweep of resolution filter 1 3 Product Overview Real Time Spectrum real time spectrum analyzer is conceptually equipped with a series of Analyzer bandpass filters as shown in Figure 1 3 Signals passing through those filters are concurrently observed and recorded continuously Signals A and B are concur rently acquired and displayed as shown in Figure 1 4 en Detector 1 filter 1 Resolution filter 2 Detector 2 F RF input gt Ioue Resolution filter 3 Detector 3 Resolution filter N Detector N Figure 1 3 Concept of the real time spectrum analyzer Concurrent acquisition Fstart Fstop Figure 1 4 Concurrent acquisition 1 4 RSA3408A User Manual Product Overview RSA3408A User Manual The method used to concurrently acquire signals in a certain frequency range is not bandpass filters but FFT Fast Fourier Transformation The RSA3408A first acquires a series of frames of data in the time domain as shown in Figure 1 5 and then performs the FFT process for each frame This method enables continuous analysis of spectra and ensures the capture of real time phenomenon such as burst signals in digital mobile communication The RSA3408A is equipped with a 102 4 MHz A D converter to analyze the spectrum by single scanning for spans up to 36 MHz
17. 3 215 Figure 3 151 Using the delta marker to take measurements 3 216 Figure 3 152 Measurement with the reference cursor 3 217 Figure 3 153 Changing the 3 218 Figure 3 154 Interlocked markers 3 219 Figure 3 155 Functions of the peak search keys 3 220 Figure 3 156 Setting the minimum frequency jump 3 221 Figure 3 157 Online help for the front panel key 3 224 Figure 3 158 Online user 1 3 225 Figure 3 159 Word search using the keyboard 3 226 Figure 3 160 Input menu 3 227 Figure 3 161 Load Save menu structure 3 230 Figure 3 162 Save to the preset file lower right of the screen 3 233 Figure 3 163 Selecting the folder 3 234 Figure 3 164 Save to File menu 3 235 Figure 3 165 Load from the preset file lower right of the screen 3 236 Figure 3 166 Load from File menu 3 237 Figure 3 167 Alphanumeric 3 238 Figure 3 168 Data file structure 3 241 Figure 3 169 Adding dummy frames 3 243 Figure 3 170 Data block 3 245 Figure 3 171 Trace file structure
18. Off On RBW FFT FFT FFT Points FFT Window Parzen Welch SineLobe Hanning SineCubed SineToThe4th Hamming Blackman Extended Res Rosenfield BlackmanHarris3A BlackmanHarris3B BlackmanHarris4A BlackmanHarris4B FlatTop Off On Select Trace 1 2 Trace Trace n Type On Freeze Off Number Of Averages Trace n Type Average Number Of Traces to Hold Trace n Type MaxHold or MinHold Reset Average Trace n Type Average Reset MaxHold Trace n Type MaxHold Reset MinHold Trace n Type MinHold Normal Average MaxHold MinHold Display Detection Max Min Max Min Load Trace n Save Trace n gt Load from File menu Refer to page A 13 Save to File menu Refer to page A 13 RSA3408A User Manual 3 Appendix A Menu Tree Measurement Menu 2 of 3 Real Time S A Demod and Time Modes FREQUENCY CHANNEL M Center Freq oe Channel Channel Table Center Freq Step Same As C F SPAN Center Freq Step Same As Span Step Size AMPLITUDE Ls Span Ref Level TIMING Auto Level Same as in the S A mode Refer to page A 2 RF Atten Mixer RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Auto RfAtt Mixer Corrections Real Time S A Acquisition Length Spectrum Offset Real Time S A with Zoom Acquisition Length Acquisiti
19. Step Size Figure 3 143 Lines menu structure other than Real Time S A Lines Menu The Lines menu in the S A mode other than the Real Time S A has the following controls Show Line Selects the display line to be controlled m Horizontal m Vertical Number Of Line Selects how many horizontal lines are displayed on the graph None 2 Line 1 Sets the position of the first line Line 2 Sets the position of the second line Delta Sets the difference between the first line and the second Value of Line 2 Value of Line 1 3 204 RSA3408A User Manual Display Line Horizontal Display Line 1 Press the LINES key on the front panel 2 Press the Show Line side key to select Horizontal NOTE In the following steps use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad to move the lines 3 Perform one of the following options m To display one horizontal line Press the Number Of Line side key to select 1 Press the Line 1 side key and move the line To display two horizontal lines Press the Number Of Line side key to select 2 Press the Line 1 side key and move line 1 Line 2 moves in parallel Press the Line 2 side key and move line 2 Press the Delta side key and move line 2 The delta value indicates the following value value of Delta value of line 2 value of line 1 m To turn off the horizontal line Press the Number Of Line side key to select None pe
20. amarker 99 999 MHz 21 85 dBm 44 86 dBm Hz2 u dBm Marker readout ie Marker 1 10 dB Center 100 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz Figure 2 39 Measurement with a single marker Measuring Difference with Delta Marker RSA3408A User Manual Span 20 kHz 99 999 MARKER SETUP Cancel Back Select Marker 1 Je Marker X Hz 2 Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor Off Selected Marker Step Size Marker X 20 Go to page 2 of 2 Marker X Position Sets the horizontal position of the marker using the general purpose knob or numeric input keypad Turn on Marker 1 and 2 to measure the difference in amplitude and frequency On the screen the symbol represents the active marker and lt gt represents the fixed marker You can operate only the active marker 1 2 Press the MARKER SETUP key on the front panel Press the Markers side key to select Delta The fixed marker appears at the active marker position Make sure that 1 Marker 1 is selected in the Select Marker menu item This means that Marker 1 is the active marker The Marker X Position menu item is selected Using the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad move the marker to a reference point see Figure 2 40 2 43 T
21. Locate Back Refresh Contents Search E Frequeney Channel B Span Key B Amplitude Key E Timing Key E Run Stop Key E Trigger Key E RBWJFFT Key E Trace AVG Key re Key E Measure Setup Key fi Display Functions EM Utility Functions E Help Key E Input Key E Calibrate Key E System Key E Preset Key E Load Key E Save Key Print Key E Macro Key B Macro Setup Key Figure 3 157 Online help for the front panel key PS Measurement Funcion ia Ael eri imaric 1625 m b View Front Panel Measure Key HELF Cancel Back standard specific Allows you to select a measurement from the list that is appropriate to the current measurement configuration The knob wil become unassigned when this key is pressed The Spectrum Measurements and Demodulaton Measurements allow you to select standard which may add more choices to the soft key menus or change the entre softkey menu to be View Online User Manual View Online Programmer Manual Top Back If you selected View Online User Manual or View Online Programmer Manual Using the front panel keys listed in Table 3 26 select the topic from the contents window on screen see Figure 3 158 The key functions are different in the contents left window than in the descrip tions right window 3 224 RSA3408A User Manual Using the Onl
22. Figure 3 125 Relationships between frame bin and pixel There are three types of compression methods Max Min and Max Min see Figure 3 126 on page 3 182 Max is the most commonly used compression method Max Min is used in the time domain waveform display in the DEMOD mode The compression method is always set to Max on the spectrogram view in three dimensional modes You can select the compression method using the following steps in S A mode 1 Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 3 Press the Display Detection side key and select Max Min or Max Min NOTE Display Detection determines how to deal with data between spectrum display points The analyzer performs RMS detection using the linear A D converter regardless of the Display Detection setting 3 181 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Max Acquired data points gt Acquires the maximum value of data points corresponding to each pixel Pixel data on screen Min Acquired data points Acquires the minimum value of data points corresponding to each pixel Pixel data on screen Max Min Acquired data points gt Acquires the minimum and maximum values of data points corresponding to each pixel Pixel data on screen gt Figure 3 126 Compression method for displaying the waveform 3 182 RSA3408A User Manual E Setting Views This se
23. Input waveform Correction value Display range 10 dB O 5 dB Linear interpolation 0dB 10 MHz 100 MHz 1GHz Frequency Correction range Figure 3 91 Amplitude correction example RSA3408A User Manual Setting Amplitude RSA3408A User Manual Linear or Logarithmic Log dB interpolation can be selected using the following menus AMPLITUDE gt Corrections Interpolation Freq Interpolation Lin Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the frequency axis using a linear scale Log Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the frequency axis using a logarithmic scale AMPLITUDE Corrections Interpolation Ampl Interpolation Lin Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the amplitude axis using a linear scale dB Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the amplitude axis using a logarithmic scale Rules for Creating an Amplitude Correction File Create the file as a text file and save it with the extension cor The maximum number of input lines is 3000 The order of correction data input is unimportant because the file is sorted when it loads However it may be easier to follow if you enter data in the order of ascending frequency Numeric values are described without the unit of frequency or amplitude Hz dB W etc For example 5 MHz frequency is express
24. LED Figure 1 9 Front panel power switch ON STANDBY switch When you turn on the analyzer Windows XP boots up After several minutes the analyzer application starts up The initial screen appears as shown in Figure 1 10 The displayed spectrum represents the noise floor of the analyzer RSA3408A User Manual 1 11 Installation Tektronix RSA 3408A Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 1 10 Initial screen MEASURE Cancel Back Channel Power ACPR Spurious Measurement Off If UNCAL is displayed on top of the screen run the gain calibration routine refer to Calibrating Gain on page 1 23 CAUTION Never apply signals with a combined amplitude greater than 30 dBm to the RF INPUT connector If you exceed this input rating you can permanently damage the analyzer The RF INPUT connector is shown in Figure 1 11 O 000 OOV E gt zO Figure 1 11 RF INPUT connector RF INPUT connector Max 30 dBm AC DC RSA3408A User Manual Installation Setting Up the Stand To set up the stand place the analyzer on a table Lift the front of the analyzer and pull out the stand until it is perpendicular to the analyzer
25. Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 997 Figure 3 151 Using the delta marker to take measurements 3 216 RSA3408A User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Measuring with the reference cursor is another way to measure relative amplitude or frequency Reference Cursor The reference cursor is positioned with the marker and fixed on the screen 1 Press the MAKER SETUP key on the front panel 2 Press the Makers side key to select Single or Delta 3 Press the Marker X Position side key and rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the marker to the reference point 4 Press the Reference Cursor to Marker X side key to display the cursor at the marker position Demod and Time modes only On the overview you can also place the reference cursor at a trigger output position with the Reference Cursor to Trigger side key 5 Press the Marker X Position side key and rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the marker to the measurement point Active marker readout relative 020 SOG Frequ to the reference cursor RBW 2 Reference cursor readout Cancel Back Span Trace 1 l Select Marker Input Trace 2 C Select Marker 2R 3 kHz Ref 99 995 MHz L gt Selects the active marker for which 25 415 cB 80 49 dBm 103 5 dBm Hz ds mf mite Marker
26. This section shows the pin assignment of the digital IO output connectors I OUTPUT and OUTPUT on the rear panel of the analyzer with Option 05 For details on the specifications refer to the RSA3408A Technical Reference l 50 26 Figure C 1 Digital IQ output connector pin assignment Table C 1 OUTPUT connector pin assignment Pin number Signal name Description 1 IQ ENABLE 10 output enable signal input Open IQ output disable Connect to GND IQ output enable 6 EXT I3 output data bit 3 LVDS 31 EXT 13 26 GND Ground 2 Ground z 3 output data bit 0 LVDS a 4 output data bit 1 LVDS a 5 output data bit 2 LVDS T EXT EXT s RSA3408A User Manual C 1 Appendix C Digital IO Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Table C 1 OUTPUT connector pin assignment Cont Pin number Signal name Description 7 GND Ground 32 GND 8 output data bit 4 LVDS T 9 output data bit 5 LVDS 10 output data bit 6 LVDS s 11 output data bit 7 LVDS gt 12 GND Ground 37 GND 13 output data bit 8 LVDS 14 output data bit 9 LVDS s 15 output data bit 10 LVDS n 16 output data bit 11 LVDS 17 GND Ground 42 GND 18 output data bit 12 LVDS T 1
27. 3 249 Figure 3 172 Trace file example 3 249 Figure 3 173 Data block cso cops cece cece reece eee ences 3 251 Figure 3 174 Print menu 5 3 253 Figure A 1 Menu A 1 Figure B 1 Symbol mapping GFSK BPSK QPSK 8PSK 160AM 32QAM and 64QAM B 1 Figure B 2 Symbol mapping 2560 B 2 Figure C 1 Digital IQ output connector pin assignment C 1 Figure C 2 Definition of the setup and hold time C 5 Figure D 1 Detaching the removable hard disk drive D 2 xi Table of Contents List of Tables xii Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 3 18 Table 3 19 Table 3 20 Table 3 21 Table 3 22 Table 3 23 Table 3 24 Table 3 25 Table 3 26 Table 3 27 Table 3 28 Span RBW 1 15 Key functions of the keyboard 2 8 Status display 45 eere eet reet rte e s 2 11 Setup display ee yerewR ER eee UE ee we ee 2 13 Menu key summary 2 16 Measurement modes 2 2
28. AOL Ju L Figure 1 5 Frame acquisition 1 5 Product Overview Architecture Figure 1 6 shows the block diagram of the signal processing system As SS 1 IF sampling Q input AJD converter Option input optional NW PF input 8 GHz IF sampling Digital Digital IQ output down converter A D converter down converter optional SS 4 FFT Extended trigger optional EI External trigger input Trigger detection Data memory Memory controller 64 MB standard 256 MB optional Local bus PCI bridge Men board PC Mass Storage Devices External interface Figure 1 6 Block diagram 1 6 RSA3408A User Manual Product Overview 8 GHz Down Converter IF Sampling A D Converter Digital Down Converter FFT Extended Trigger Optional RSA3408A User Manual Converts the RF signal applied through the front panel INPUT connector into a 76 MHz IF signal This converter processes signals up to 8 GHz by IF conver sions in three stages A 10 MHz oscillator provides a high accuracy reference for all stages of IF conversion The converter also adjusts signals for A D conversion using a low noise amplifier fine tuning attenuator and anti alias filter The output signal from the down converter is sent to the IF sampling A D converter The IF analog output from the down convert
29. Descriptions of the file header items follow Required means that the item is prerequisite for displaying waveform XNum Required Represents the number of data in the data block XRightLabel Represents the label displayed on the right of the horizontal axis Span span when XLeftLabel is Center center frequency or Stop stop frequency when XLeftLabel is Start start frequency XStart Required Represents the minimum left edge of the horizontal axis XScale Required Represents the scale of the horizontal axis XUnit Represents the unit of the horizontal axis fixed to Hz ZNum Required Internal use only fixed to 1 YStart Required Represents the minimum bottom edge of the vertical axis XLeftLabel Represents the label on the left of the horizontal axis Center center frequency when XLeftLabel is Span span or Start start frequency when XLeftLabel is Stop stop frequency UpdateAreas Internal use only YUnit Represents the unit of the vertical axis dBm dBuV V W NBW Specifies NBW Noise Bandwidth when setting FFT parameters or RBW Resolution Bandwidth when setting RBW parameters YMiddleUnit Represents the unit of the vertical axis scale Specify dB when YUnit is dBm For all other values of YUnit the YUnit value is used 3 250 RSA3408A User Manual File Format YScale Required Represents the scale of the vertical axis UpdatePosition Internal use only Data Block Pai
30. Marker 13u 1 027 2 983 gt Display Area 100 0 0 sym 00110110 01101010 10101010 10100110 01100110 10011001 10100101 01101001 10010101 01010101 10101010 00100101 01010101 10010101 01100101 10011010 01011010 10011001 01011001 01010110 10011010 50 u 10101010 01100110 01100110 01010101 10010101 10010101 01011010 01100110 01010101 01010110 0110 Constellation Eye diagram Symbol table Figure 3 60 Constellation eye diagram and symbol table main view RSA3408A User Manual 3 79 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode The constellation eye diagram and symbol table are based on the digital modulation analysis function Refer to Digital Modulation Analysis on page 3 44 Table 3 11 shows the definition of symbol values displayed in the symbol table Table 3 11 Symbol value definition Symbol value Definition 0 1 Don t care Preamble Frame Sync Null Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the constellation eye diagram and symbol table is the same as the power on down measurement Refer to page 3 69 Changing the View The view controls for the constellation eye diagram and symbol table are the same as the RF envelope measurement except for the Scroll Table side key Refer to page 3 78 The measurement result display items depend on the modulation type and de
31. Setting the Offset RSA3408A User Manual The amplitude correction function includes amplitude and frequency offset NOTE The amplitude offset is available in all the measurement modes of S A Demod and Time Amplitude Offset Subtracts the specified offset from the original amplitude see Figure 3 93 The offset value is set using the menu item AMPLITUDE Corrections Amplitude Offset The operation varies slightly between the measurement modes as follows m In the S A mode except real time mode The amplitude offset is effective whenever the amplitude correction is turned on AMPLITUDE gt Corrections Amplitude Table On even if the table is not set m In the other modes Real Time S A Demod and Time The amplitude offset is always effective The default value is zero If you set the offset to a non zero value a waveform shifts vertically as shown in Figure 3 93 Amplitude of a displayed waveform Amplitude of an acquired waveform Amplitude offset value Amplitude offset 1 Figure 3 93 Amplitude offset Frequency Offset Shifts the correction range by the specified offset with the same correction table see Figure 3 94 The offset value is set using the AMPLITUDE Corrections Frequency Offset menu item Correction range specified Correction range after the in the correction table frequency offset __ 1GHz 2 GHz Frequency offset
32. The setup display area in the upper part of the screen shows the analyzer hardware settings see Figure 2 10 The contents differ depending on the measurement mode spectrum analysis S A modulation analysis Demod or time analysis Time as shown in Table 2 3 Tektronix RSA 3408A Frequency 800 MHz Span 15 MHz Input Att 20 dB Setup apad RBW 80 kHz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off dem Figure 2 10 Setup display Table 2 3 Setup display Item Frequency Span Input Att RBW NBW Trace 1 and 2 Spectrum Length Spectrum Interval Acquisition Length RSA3408A User Manual Mode Indicates the center frequency All Description Indicates the span Indicates the attenuation of an input signal before it enters the internal mixer Indicates RBW Resolution Bandwidth for S A compatibility with swept spectrum analyzers Refer to FFT and RBW on page 3 163 Indicates NBW Noise Bandwidth instead of RBW when FFT processed data does not go through RBW process Indicates the Trace 1 and 2 trace type Indicates time length of a 1024 point FFT frame Real Time S A It is determined by the span Indicates time interval between FFT frames Refer to FFT Start Point on page 3 166 Demod and Time Indicates time to acquire a block of data It can be set in the Timing menu Interface Maps 2 14 RSA3408A User Manual REY VUE 22405 Functional Overview This s
33. Trace 1 Type Trace 1 or2 Type Average Selects the trace type Average here Number Of 4 Averages 7 Number of Averages z Sets how many traces are accumulated 10 Reset Average Reset Average Restart averaging Display Detection Max Load Trace 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 100 kHz Save Trace Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Number Of Averages 64 Figure 3 123 Displaying an averaged waveform 3 178 RSA3408A User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Compared Display Display Trace 1 as a normal spectrum and Trace 2 as the averaged waveform concurrently and compare them 1 Display the spectrum of the measurement signal 2 Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel 3 Display Trace 1 as a normal spectrum a Press the Select Trace side key to select 1 b Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select Normal 4 Display Trace 2 as the averaged waveform a Press the Select Trace side key to select 2 b Press the Trace 2 Type side key and select Average Max Hold or Min Hold The waveform currently being acquired trace 1 in yellow and the averaged waveform trace 2 in green are displayed together Figure 3 124 shows an example of the concurrent display of the ordinal spectrum and its Max Hold waveform 0 dBm Trace 2 averaged waveform This figure shows an example of Max Hold Trace 1 ordinary spectrum waveform This figure shows a
34. Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Trace 1 2 Type Selects the type of processing for the selected trace m Normal Displays normal waveform without averaging m Average Averages the selected trace m Max Hold Holds the maximum value at each data point on the waveform m Min Hold Holds the minimum value at each data point on the waveform Number Of Averages Specifies how many traces are accumulated to create the averaged value Setting range 1 to 100000 default 20 Averaging is controlled in two ways as shown in Table 3 24 Table 3 24 Averaging method Data acquisition Average type Number of Averages Free run Exponential Continues the average with an exponential Continuous mode only RMS weighting applied to old values using Number of Averages as the weighting factor Triggered and Averages traces accumulating up to Number of Single mode Averages then stops the acquisition until the next trigger event occurs Reset Average Causes trace accumulation to start over Display Detection The bin data is thinned out in the display because the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the screen is generally smaller than the number of bins in the FFT Display Detection selects the method to be used for decimating traces to fit the available space It is related only to the thinning of displayed data m Max Min Draws a line connecting the maximum and the minimum values of data corresponding
35. Trigger Slope Selects the trigger slope when the trigger mode is Triggered and the trigger source is External m Rise The trigger occurs at the rising edge of the trigger signal m Fall The trigger occurs at the falling edge of the trigger signal m Rise and Fall The trigger occurs at the rising edge of the trigger signal to acquire the first block and at the falling edge to acquire the next block The rising and falling edges alternate at each block acquisition m Fall and Rise The trigger occurs at the falling edge of the trigger signal to acquire the first block and at the rising edge to acquire the next block The rising and falling edges alternate at each block acquisition When using a trigger mask Option 02 only When the trigger source is set to Freq Mask for using a trigger mask the following selection items are available In The trigger occurs when an input signal exits the blue area of a trigger mask and enters the black area m Out The trigger occurs when an input signal exits the black area and enters the blue area of a trigger mask m Out The analyzer triggers with In to acquire the first block and Out to acquire the second In and Out alternate at each block acquisition Use the acquisition history control to view alternate In Out blocks m Outand In The analyzer triggers with Out to acquire the first block and In to acquire the second In and Out alternate at each block acquisition Use t
36. U or u key Alphanumeric input micro 10 6 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value N or n key Alphanumeric input nano 1079 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value RSA3408A User Manual Interface Maps Display Screen Figure 2 6 shows the elements of the display screen 3 4 gt si 2 a Frequency 800 MHz RBW 80 kHz 1 Span 15 MHz Trace 1 Norma Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off 0 dem 10 dB 100 Span 15 MHz 7 Figure 2 6 Display screen configuration RSA3408A User Manual dBm Center 20N MHF Spectrum Analyzer Measurement O gt Center Freq MHz 80 Uc NER REQ CHAN Cancel Back Center Freq 2 Hz EN Start Freq Hz 792 5M Stop Freq Hz 807 SIM Channel Channel Table None Center Freq Step Same As Center Freq Step Same As Span Step Size Center Freq 200k Interface Maps Elements of the Display Setup display area Displays the current hardware value Refer to Setup Display on page 2 13 Progress bar Indicates the progress of the acquisition cycle on the left bar and the measurement cycle on the right bar The progress fills up in blue from left to right Date Time display area Shows the current date and time Status display area Shows the trigger status Refer to Status Display on page 2 11 Side menu display area When you press a menu key on the front panel the menu associated with th
37. menu 3 148 mode 3 149 position 3 150 save on trigger 3 154 slope 3 152 source 3 150 synchronous operation 3 162 trigger output indicating 3 161 trigger point indicator 3 161 Triggered trigger mode 3 149 Troubleshooting 1 19 Tutorial 2 31 Index 6 U UNCAL 1 12 Unpacking 1 9 USB connectors side panel 2 7 USB memory stick using Option 06 D 1 V Vector mode span 3 126 Vector span 3 126 Version displaying 2 26 output connector side panel 2 7 Video filter RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 67 View menu 3 184 setting 3 183 W Windows XP using 2 28 Z Zoom function 3 24 setting a zoomed area 3 25 Timing menu 3 24 RSA3408A User Manual
38. side key The default setting is for the whole area to fill with blue on the graticule 3 157 Trigger 6 Press the Reset Mask to Default side key The default mask appears see Figure 3 109 l Point A Point B Figure 3 109 Default mask NOTE In the following steps use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad to move the points 7 Change the position of Point A a Press the Select Next Point side key until Point A is selected b Press the Set Selected Point X side key and set the horizontal position of Point A to two divisions from the left edge see Figure 3 110 Figure 3 110 Changing the position of Point A 3 158 RSA3408A User Manual Trigger 8 Change the position of Point B a Press the Select Next Point side key to select Point B b Press the Set Selected Point X side key and set the horizontal position of Point B to three divisions from the left edge see Figure 3 111 Figure 3 111 Changing the position of Point B 9 Add Point C a Press the Insert New Point side key with Point B active The new point appears halfway between Point B and the next point in the right side b Press the Set Selected Point X side key and set the horizontal position of P
39. 1 GHz in this example Figure 3 94 Frequency offset 3 139 Setting Amplitude Performing Amplitude Correction Erasing Correction Data 3 140 Load an amplitude correction file and acquire input signals Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel 2 Press the Corrections side key 3 Do either of these two steps W Press the Edit Table side key to create an amplitude correction file Refer to page 3 134 for creating the correction file W Press the Load Table side key to specify an amplitude correction file Refer to page 3 229 for file operation 4 Press the Amplitude Offset side key to set the amplitude offset if necessary 5 Press the Frequency Offset side key to set the frequency offset if necessary 6 Press the Interpolation side key to select scaling for the interpolation a Press the Freq Interpolation side key to select the scale for frequency interpolation Lin linear or Log logarithmic b Press the Ampl Interpolation side key to select the scale for amplitude interpolation Lin linear or dB logarithmic 7 Press the Amplitude Table side key to select On The amplitude correction is now applied to the waveform The amplitude correction is applied to the acquired data and the corrected waveform is shown When the amplitude correction is turned on Correc tion is displayed in the setup display area at the upper right of the screen as shown in Figure 3 95 Tektron
40. 3 182 View keys oe n lp Xe ER SURE RE 3 184 Setting the scale in spectrum view 3 186 Scale and format settings in spectrogram view 3 188 Setting the scale in time domain view 3 190 Setting the scale in CCDE view 3 191 Vector and constellation displays 3 192 Setting the scale in EVM view 3 193 EVM magnitude and phase error displays 3 194 Constellation view and error vectors in 1 4x QPSK 3 195 Symbol tabl rnm 3 196 Eye diagram view 3 197 Vector and dot displays for AM AM view 3 198 Vector and dot displays for AM PM view 3 199 Setting the scale in PDF view 3 200 Setting the scale in noisogram view 3 202 Display line 3 203 Lines menu structure other than Real Time S A 3 204 Two horizontal lines 3 205 Figure 3 144 RSA3408A User Manual Table of Contents RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 145 Two horizontal and two vertical lines 3 206 Figure 3 146 Multi display lines Real Time S A mode 3 207 Figure 3 147 Lines menu structure Real Time S A 3 208 Figure 3 148 Marker display 3 211 Figure 3 149 Markers menu amp 3 212 Figure 3 150 Measurement with a single marker
41. 6 4 ms Scale 640 Lis Center 100 MHz Span 1 MHz Measurement results From the top Positive peak AM value Negative peak AM value Total AM value peak peak AM value 2 RSA3408A User Manual 100 MM 553 96 AM 49 85 96 Total AM 52 57 Modulation factor variation Start 6 4 ms Scale 320 115 Analog Demod Demod Figure 3 34 AM demod measurement 3 39 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode FM Demod Measurement Demodulates and measures an FM signal Figure 3 35 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the frequency deviation versus time graph MEASURE Show Measurements is selected in Figure 3 35 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the FM demod measurement contains the following controls Auto Carrier Determines whether to detect the carrier automatically m On Default Automatically detects the carrier for every frame The error from the center frequency is shown on the Freq Error side key m Off Sets the carrier frequency using Frequency Offset described below Frequency Offset Sets the carrier frequency when Off is selected in Auto Carrier Enter the carrier offset from the center frequency Range 30 to 30 MHz Threshold Sets the threshold level above which the input signal is determined to be a burst in time domain The burst detected first is used for the analysis Range 100 0 to 0 0 dB
42. 86 Vector mode and scalar mode RSA3408A User Manual EEE Setting Amplitude Amplitude Menu FREQUENCY CHANNEL SPAN AMPLITUDE TIMING 2000 This section describes the fundamental amplitude settings for observing a spectrum You can add correction to the waveform display by considering frequency characteristics of external devices such as antennas or preamplifiers Press the AMPLITUDE key to set amplitude Figure 3 87 shows the Amplitude menu structure S A mode except Real Time S A Ref Level Off On Auto Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RfAtt Mixer RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Vertical Scale Vertical Units dBm dBmV V mV W Corrections Amplitude Offset Frequency Offset Amplitude Table Edit Table Interpolation Load Table Save Table Real Time S A Demod and Time modes Ref Level Auto Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RfAtt Mixer RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Corrections Amplitude Offset Figure 3 87 Amplitude menu structure RSA3408A User Manu al Select Point To Edit Frequency Amplitude Delete Point Add New Point Done Editing Table Clear Table Freq Interpolation Ampl Interpolation 3 127 Setting Amplitude 3 128 AMPLITUDE Ref Level Vertical Scale Sets the scale of the amplitude of the displayed wavef
43. A and then press the ENTER key Press the ABC number 8 key three times to select the letter and then press the ENTER key Press the DEF number 9 key twice to select the letter and then press the ENTER key Press the number 1 key five times to select the letter 1 and then press the ENTER key e After entering the file name press the Save File Now side key The data is saved to the specified file Tektronix RSA 3408A 8 2 37 29 PM PAUSE Save ToFile SSS Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 50kHz Gancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Filename E Input Att 20 dB Trace2 Off BE _ Filename 1 Enters a file name a TraceA TRC 57KB TRC File 03 08 20 12 50 a TraceB TRC 57KB TRC File 03 08 20 12 50 Save File Now Save File Now Bl iracsGinG 57KB TAG File 03 08 20 12 50 Stores the data to the specified file Folder C My Folder Documents Shows the selected directory Documents here Figure 3 164 Save to File menu RSA3408A User Manual 3 235 File Operations Loading a File Use the following steps to load settings or waveform from a file There are two ways to load data from a file selecting the preset file and selecting a file by name When you want to return to the previous menu press the Cancel Back side key at any time 1 Press the LOAD key on th
44. ABC DEF SE UNLOCK 7 8 9 GHz BKSP Deletes a character before the cursor GHI JKL ms 4 5 6 MHz PARS WXYZ ps 1 2 3 kHz amp l CAPSLOCK ns dBm NEXT 0 tZ Hz ENTER lt Accepts the input Numeric value keys The unit keys also function as the ENTER key Input is immediately accepted when one of those keys is pressed Figure 2 17 Numeric keypad 3 Confirm the input by pressing the unit key or ENTER key The confirmed value is immediately reflected to the analyzer settings and display Press the Cancel Back side key to cancel the change RSA3408A User Manual 2 21 Functional Overview Changing the Step Size When using the up and down AW keys to increase or decrease a setting value you can change the step size the amount per press by which the up or down key changes the setting value with the Step Size side key The step size cannot be changed for menu items that do not display Step Size In the example shown in Figure 2 18 the step size for the center frequency is set to 100 kHz the displayed frequency set value changes by 100 kHz step for each press of the up or down key Step Size Genter Freq 100k o Step size Figure 2 18 Step size for the center frequency Step Size for Center Frequency The step size is set with the Step Size side key The center frequency step size can be also set with two side keys in
45. C Program Files Tektronix wca200a Manuals Part number 071 1617 XX 077 0003 XX 077 0007 XX 161 0066 XX 119 6936 XX 119 B146 XX 103 0045 XX 200 A524 50 063 3832 XX PDF documents are stored in this directory on the internal hard disk Optional software includes the user manual listed in Table F 3 Table F 3 Accessories for optional software Accessory Option 23 W CDMA uplink analysis software user manual Option 24 GSM EDGE analysis software user manual Option 25 cdma2000 analysis software user manual Option 26 1xEV DO analysis software user manual Option 27 3GPP Release 5 downlink analysis software user manual Option 28 TD SCDMA analysis software user manual Option 29 WLAN 802 11a b g n analysis software user manual Option 40 3GPP Release 6 HSUPA analysis software user manual Part number 071 1673 XX 071 1675 XX 071 1677 XX 071 1679 XX 071 1681 XX 071 1683 XX 071 1648 XX 071 2060 XX F 3 Appendix F Options and Accessories Optional Accessories F 4 You can order the accessories listed in Table F 4 to use with your analyzer Table F 4 Optional accessories Accessory Japanese language user manual Japanese language programmer manual PDF English language service manual Accessory bag Preamplifier 20 dB gain to 3 GHz RTPA2A real time probe adapter P7000 series probes recommended Rack mount kit for field conversion RSA3408A User Manual Part number 071 1618 XX 077 0004 XX 071 1691 X
46. File save operation 3 232 Preset file names cee cece 3 233 RSA3408A User Manual Table of Contents RSA3408A User Manual Table 3 29 File load operation 3 236 Table 3 30 Combinations of validA P Q 3 246 Table B 1 1 4 shift DQOPSK B 3 Tabl B 2 REC I re R ER EE Eres B 3 Table C 1 I OUTPUT connector pin assignment C 1 Table C 2 Q OUTPUT connector pin assignment C 3 Table E 1 External inspection checklist E 1 Table F 1 Power cord identification F 2 Table F 2 Standard accessories F 3 Table F 3 Accessories for optional software F 3 Table F 4 Optional accessories F 4 xiii Table of Contents xiv RSA3408A User Manual a General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Symbols and Terms A RSA3408A User Manual Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Prop
47. Frequency Error Hz T 396 5957681689m Coefficient table t Index AM AM Coeff AM PM Coeff 2o ETVEESS deg Maximum 8 304 001 1 214e 001 Coefficients 3 249 001 2 692 002 8 11 00 2 125e 001 1 959e 002 deg 3 378e 002 3 225 003 Scroll Table 2 995e 003 2 552e 004 55 1 534e 004 1 245e 005 d leg 3 380e 007 5 00dB 11 dBm Md 2 Order in best fit curve polynomial AM AM AM PM AM PM distortion graph Refer to Maximum Coefficient on page 3 56 coefficient coefficient Red points Measurement points Yellow lines Measurement lines Blue line Reference line Pink line Best fit line 3 58 Figure 3 48 AM PM measurement RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode CCDF Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a CCDF graph Figure 3 49 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of power level versus the probability that the instantaneous power of the input is above that power level For the CCDF measurement refer to page 3 88 in the Time mode Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the CCDF measurement contains the following controls For information about the common controls for the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 45 Linear Signal Region Unit Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 56 Linear Signal Region Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to
48. Grid Style Off Fix Flex Real Time S A Show Views Single Multi View Orientation Tall Wide Real Time S A Spectrum view Amplitude Line Off On S A Mode except Real Time S A Amol d rom m Show Line Horizontal Vertical Amplitude Line Interval Number of Line None 1 2 Frequency Line Off Menu Off Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval oe of Line 1 View Lines Readout Off Spectrogram view Number of Line 2 Time Line Off On Line 1 Time Line Offset Line 2 Time Line Interval Delta Frequency Line Off On Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval View Lines Readout Off On Show Views Single Multi Overview Content Spectrogram Waveform Zoom RFID Measurements only Digital Demod Option 21 only Spectrum Constellation EVM IQ Freq vs Time Symbol Table Eye Diagram AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF The content depends on the setting of Meas Setup gt Modulation Type Subview Content RFID Measurements Option 21 only Spectrum Power vs Time Frequency vs Time Zoomed Spectrum RF Envelope Constellation Eye Diagram Symbol Table The content depends on the measurement item Modulation Type OQPSK Data Half Symbol Shift 0 RFID Measurements Option 21 only Burst No Envelope No Guidelines Off On Menu Off A 11 Appendix A Menu Tree Display View Men
49. Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis NOTE By default the horizontal axis is displayed in the range of 12 dB If the amplitude exceeds 12 dB the horizontal axis will be set automatically to fit the waveform to the screen Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Full Scale Sets the scale of the horizontal and vertical axes to each full scale value You can change the scale of the horizontal and vertical axes within these full scale values Marker 4 dB 286 907 m 5 oh Ref Data 500 0 96 Start 12 dB Stop 12 dB A i Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 140 Setting the scale in PDF view RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views Noisogram View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu RSA3408A User Manual The noisogram shows time varying phase noise three dimensionally It indicates frequency along the horizontal axis frame number along the vertical axis like a spectrogram and C N by using color This view is used as the subview in the signal source analysis refer to page 3 103 The Scale menu for the Noisogram contains the following controls see Figure 3 141 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the color axis automatically to fit the noisogram to the scree
50. Horizontal line Dual Los dBm Values at line positions 100 dem Center 800 MHz Span 36 MHz Figure 3 144 Two horizontal lines RSA3408A User Manual 3 205 Display Line Vertical Display Line 1 Press the LINES key on the front panel 2 Press the Show Line side key to select Vertical NOTE In the following steps use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad to move the lines 3 Perform one of the following options To display one vertical line Press the Number Of Line side key to select 1 Press the Line 1 side key and move the line m To display two vertical lines Press the Number Of Line side key to select 2 Press the Line 1 side key and move line 1 Line 2 moves in parallel Press the Line 2 side key and move line 2 Press the Delta side key and move line 2 The delta value indicates the following value value of Delta value of line 2 value of line 1 To turn off the vertical line Press the Number Of Line side key to select None m 795MHz 805MHz 20dBm 10 dB 80dBm 100 dem Center 800 MHz Span 36 MHz Figure 3 145 Two horizontal and two vertical lines 3 206 RSA3408A User Manual Display Line Multi Display Lines Real Time S A Only The Real Time S A mode has the multi display lines function that shows multiple horizontal and vertical lines as shown in Figure 3 146 The spectrum view uses
51. LAN Ethernet connector 10 100BASE T connector When you reboot the analyzer after connecting to LAN the analyzer recognizes the network speed automatically and sets it to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps You can share resources such as files or disks on the network NOTE The Windows XP default network settings are done when the instrument is shipped from the factory Contact your system administrator for information about setting network parameters in your LAN For using Windows XP on the analyzer refer to page 2 28 RSA3408A User Manual Interface Maps 4 VGA output connector 15 pin D sub connector female to send the display of this instrument to another monitor NOTE When you use an external monitor connect a VGA cable to the analyzer and to the monitor then turn on the monitor before you turn on the analyzer 5 USB connectors two ports Connect USB devices such as a mouse keyboard and printer You can connect the devices any time with no setup plug amp play to either or both ports You can also connect a mouse to a USB port on a keyboard see Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Connecting USB devices RSA3408A User Manual 2 7 Interface Maps Using a Mouse and Keyboard Click the menu to select the item You can directly input the value with the keyboard You can
52. Performs all possible calibration operations Calibrate Gain Calibrates the internal gain steps Refer to page 1 23 for the gain calibration Calibrate Center Offset This calibration cancels a center offset Refer to page 1 24 for the center offset calibration Calibrate DC Offset This calibration cancels DC offset in baseband Refer to page 1 25 for the DC offset calibration Calibrate IF Flatness Calibrates the IF intermediate frequency flatness Refer to page 1 25 for the IF flatness calibration Auto Calibration Determines whether to automatically perform all possible calibration operations The default setting is On Service This menu item is only to be used by qualified personnel for repair and calibration Refer to the RSA3408A Technical Reference and Service Manual optional accessory for details 1 22 RSA3408A User Manual Calibration Calibrating Gain RSA3408A User Manual If you want to perform all possible calibration operations together press the Calibrate All side key When Auto Calibration is set to Yes they will be performed automatically any time the analyzer is in an uncal state NOTE When you run the calibration during signal acquisition the calibration starts after the acquisition is completed The gain calibration calibrates the analyzer s amplifier gain using the internal signal generator Run this internal calibration routine as required when you boot the analyzer or when UNCAL
53. RSA3408A User Manual 2 3 Interface Maps of Jo Figure 2 2 Rear panel 2 4 RSA3408A User Manual Interface Maps Rear Panel Interface 1 REF IN OUT connector A 50 BNC connector for reference signal input output to synchronize the analyzer with other instrument 2 I I INPUT connector Option 03 only A 50 Q BNC connector for I signal differential input When using one connector as a single ended input terminate the other end in 50 3 Q Q INPUT connector Option 03 only A 50 Q BNC connector for O signal differential input When using one connector as a single ended input terminate the other end in 50 For the connectors 1 2 and 3 above refer to Selecting Input Source on page 3 227 to control the reference signal input output and I O input 4 TRIG IN OUT connector A 50 BNC connector for trigger signal input output Refer to page 3 147 for trigger 5 421 MHz IF OUT connector A 50 Q BNC connector for 421 MHz IF Intermediate Frequency output 6 GPIB connector Used to control the analyzer from an external controller Refer to the RSA3408A Programmer Manual for GPIB control 7 DIGITAL IQ OUT Option 05 only MDR 3M 50 pin connectors for generating I and Q data after A D conversion refer to Architecture on page 1 6 to store and analyze on an external PC For the pin assignme
54. RSA3408A User Manual 2 37 Tutorial The Span menu item is selected Span Indicates that the general purpose knob is available Hz Y XXX le Numeric value input field 4 Turn the general purpose knob to the left to select 20k The hardware is set with the selected value immediately The spectrum waveform is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 2 34 Tektronix RSA 3408A 03 08 4 13 43 SPAN Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Span 4 Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off 0 Start Freq dBm Hz 39 99M Stop Freq Hz 100 01M 10 dB Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Span kHz 20 Figure 2 34 Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 20 kHz 2 38 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Setting Up Amplitude In Figure 2 35 the vertical scale shows the spectrum view set up for 10 dB per division Ref level is the maximum value of the vertical axis and it is set to 0 dBm when the analyzer is powered on Observe the change in the waveform as you change this setting in the following procedure 0 dBm Ref Level setting 10 dB 100 dBm Figure 2 35 Setting amplitude 1 Press the Amplitude key on the front panel MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUNI CHANNEL STOP SPAN TRIG AMPLITU
55. Start 33 737188 ms Scale 9 921875 5 Digital Demod Power versus Time Main view Power versus Time Figure 3 43 Power variance measurement 3 53 3 54 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Symbol Table Analysis main view Figure 3 44 shows an example For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 45 For setting views refer to page 3 183 Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum Tektronix RSA 3408A 02 49 14 FREERUN MEAS SETUP LEUR Frequency 800 MHz Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a symbol table in the Cancel Back Parameter Presets Acquisition Length 12 ms Span 100 kHz Input Att 20 dB 0 0 em PRINTER 10 dB 10 dB 8 bm Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 5 Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz Marker 199sym 01 0 10001010 10010001 11000110 11010101 11000100 11000100 01000000 00100001 32 00011000 01001110 01010101 10000110 11110100 11011100 10001010 00010101 64 10100111 11101100 10010010 11011111 10010011 01010011 00110000 00011000 95 11001010 00110100 10111111 10100010 11000111 01011001 01100111 10001111 128 10111010 00001101 01101101 11011000 00101101 01111101 01010100 00001010 150 01010111 10010111 01110000 00111001 11010010 01111010 11101010 00100100 192 00110011 100001 Carrier Frequency Hz PDC Modulation Type l 4PI QPSK Modulation Parameters Auto Carrier On Off
56. There will be a discontinuity of the waveform between the beginning and end and a high frequency transient phenomenon occurs When this happens inaccurate frequency information is recorded in the frequency domain If a window function is applied to the waveform the start and end amplitudes will be closer and the discontinuity is reduced The frequency components that are calculated from the signal by FFT also become more accurate Choose the FFT window according to your objective accurate measurement of the frequency or accurate measurement of the amplitude of the frequency components Window Characteristics In FFT windows the frequency resolution is inversely proportional to the amplitude accuracy Select a proper window according to the measurement items and characteristics of the signal source Table 3 22 shows characteristics and usages of major windows Table 3 22 Characteristics and usage of FFT windows Rectangular m Suitable for frequency measurement but not m Transient phenomenon or burst signal levels suitable for amplitude measurement before and after the event are roughly same m Same result as measurement without a window Sinusoidal wave with little amplitude variation and stable frequency m Wide bandwidth irregular noise spectrum changes slowly Hamming Hanning m Suitable for frequency measurement m Sinusoidal wave m Inferior in accuracy of amplitude to the rectangu Repeating narrow bandwidth irregu
57. and timing control circuit Performing a 1024 point complex FFT at 10 times per second allows the trigger to operate in real time in spans up to 36 MHz Because the trigger comparator is continuously operating at the maximum rate no events will be missed The pre trigger and post trigger positions can be set as needed events before and after the trigger event can be measured 1 7 Product Overview 1 8 Data Memory Windows Board PC A high speed 64 MB standard SDRAM stores spectrum data It is expanded to 256 MB with Option 02 For each data point I and O data use 2 bytes This memory can store 16 000 frames for 1 waveform 1024 points of analysis and 64 000 frames for Option 02 For example W CDMA communication data can be captured for up to 2 5 seconds on standard and 10 seconds on Option 02 The memory is accessed from the system controller via the ISA PCI bridge The system controller board has an Intel Celeron 1 2 GHz CPU It runs on Windows XP and controls menu operation from the front panel keys It is equipped with a 10 GB hard disk and 3 5 inch disk drive to store data and settings Waveforms menus and measurement results are shown on the color display which uses an 8 4 inch XGA TFT LCD module The standard analyzer has the following external interfaces m USB for a mouse keyboard printer and so on m LAN Ethernet 10 100BASE T m GPIB VGA for an external monitor RSA3408A User Manual Installat
58. gt Channel Bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio The arrow indicates the Meas Setup menu corresponding to the measurement item ACPR gt Main Channel Bandwidth Adjacent Channel Bandwidth Chan Spacing Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio C N gt Offset Frequency Carrier Bandwidth Noise Bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio OBW gt Power Ratio Carrier Frequency gt Counter Resolution EBW gt Measurement Level Spurious gt Signal Threshold Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Scroll Table Measurement Off Demod Mode MEASURE E The arrow indicates the Meas Setup menu corresponding to the measurement item Analog Demod I AM Demod Carrier Amplitude Detection Average Median FM Demod Auto Carrier On Off Frequency Error Auto Carrier On Frequency Offset Auto Carrier Off Threshold PM Demod gt Threshold IQ versus Time Pulse Spectrum Measurement Off 6 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Demod Mode MEAS MEASURE f bol Digital Demod Option 21 only The arrow indicates the Meas Setup menu corresponding to th
59. is defined by the following structure struct extendedCorrectionData_st unsigned char a 1024 unsigned char p 1024 5 The dummy header contains the ASCII codes of 40000 with no line feed code RSA3408A User Manual File Format Trace File Format File Structure RSA3408A User Manual The trace file consists of two blocks in the text format Figure 3 171 shows the structure and Figure 3 172 shows and example of a trace file Trace file TRC File header text format Data block text format Figure 3 171 Trace file structure XNum 641 XRightLabel Span XStart 1 9995G XScale 1 0015625M XUnit Hz ZNum 1 YStart 100 XLeftLabel Center gt File header UpdateAreas 1 YUnit dBm NBW 3 13180146596413k YMiddleUnit dB YScale 100 UpdatePosition 640 100 875531204 111 253515034 101 342080442 96 7588947616 98 5946571418 101 68696219 97 8503895777 100 806522438 100 274828469 95 8906131833 97 9340093534 101 366985559 JN Figure 3 172 Trace file example gt Data block 3 249 File Format File Header following is an example of the file header XNum 641 XRightLabel Span XStart 1 9995G XScale 1 0015625M XUnit Hz ZNum 1 YStart 100 XLeftLabel Center UpdateAreas 1 YUnit dBm NBW 3 13180146596413k YMiddleUnit dB YScale 100 UpdatePosition 640
60. side key and select a destination printer 5 Press the Print now side key to start printing If the printer driver displays a message during printing follow the instructions RSA3408A User Manual Screen Copy Creating a File RSA3408A User Manual You can save a screen image to a file as bitmap data and read the data into a word processor to create a report for example To save the file to a floppy disk insert it to the floppy disk drive 1 Press the PRINT key on the front panel and select Black or White of the background color with the Background color side key 2 Display the measurement to be copied and stop data acquisition 3 Press the PRINT key again The screen image data is captured on the internal memory with the background color set in step 1 4 Press the Save screen to file side key The file selection screen appears 5 Do one of the following to output the screen image to a specified file W Using a preset file name Press the Save to BitmapA Save to Bit mapB or Save to BitmapC side key The image data is stored to the file BitmapA bmp BitmapB bmp or BitmapC bmp in the C My Documents folder respectively m Entering a new file name Enter a file name with the Filename side key referring to Entering a File Name on page 3 238 The file extension BMP is automatically assigned When you have finished entering the name press the Save File Now side key to store the copy in the file After the sc
61. trigger does not occur press the RUN STOP key again Repeat Selects whether to acquire data continuously or singly Continuous Repeatedly acquires and displays the waveform Acquisition data will be overwritten while waiting for a new trigger event Use the Single setting if you will need to examine or reanalyze the measurement results m Single Acquires and displays one waveform After the first waveform display you must press RUN STOP to acquire and display each waveform Table 3 20 shows the acquisition method with the trigger and repeat modes The concept is illustrated in Figure 3 105 on page 3 153 Table 3 20 How to acquire a waveform Trigger mode Repeat mode TRIG Mode TRIG Repeat Description Free run Continuous Press RUN STOP to acquire data repeatedly Press this key again to stop acquisition Press RUN STOP to acquire one waveform Triggered Continuous Press RUN STOP to acquire data every trigger event Single Press RUN STOP to acquire one waveform every trigger event RSA3408A User Manual 3 149 Trigger 3 150 Stop and Show Results Stops data acquisition and shows measurement results Instead of the RUN STOP key you can stop data acquisition by pressing the Stop and Show Results side key when the measurement mode is Real Time S A Demod or Time However there is the following difference in function Pressing the RUN STOP key to stop data acquisition The block data acquired at the mom
62. 1 12 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 2 2 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 11 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 16 2 18 Table of Contents Figure 2 13 Menu item types 2 19 Figure 2 14 Numeric setting menu 2 19 Figure 2 15 Changing value with the knob 2 20 Figure 2 16 Changing value with the keypad 2 21 Figure 2 17 Numeric keypad 2 21 Figure 2 18 Step size for the center frequency 2 22 Figure 2 19 Changing the step size to the predetermined values 2 22 Figure 2 20 Selecting the measurement mode 2 23 Figure 2 21 Starting Stopping data acquisition 2 24 Figure 2 22 Restoring default settings 2 24 Figure 2 23 System menu 2 25 Figure 2 24 Displaying versions and options 2 26 Figure 2 25 Displaying the Windows XP accessory menu 2 29 Figure 2 26 Cable connection 2 32 Figure 2 27 Principal power switch rear panel 2 33 Figure 2 28 Power switch ON STANDBY 2 33 Figure 2 29 Initial screen 2 34 Figure 2 30 Frequency span and amplitude settings 2 35 Figure 2 31 Menu items for numeric value input 2 36 Figure 2 32 Numeric
63. 3 155 How to delete directories 3 240 files 3 240 How to display averaged waveforms 3 178 data by trigger and repeat modes 3 153 horizontal display line 3 205 multiple views 3 185 online help 3 223 options 2 26 spectrogram 2 50 spectrum 2 35 trace 1 and 2 3 176 trigger point 3 161 versions 2 26 vertical display line 3 206 Windows desktop 2 28 How to enter file name 3 238 numeric data 2 19 How to install keyboard 2 7 mouse 2 7 RSA3408A User Manual Index printer driver 3 254 USB printer connection 3 254 How to load files 3 232 menu settings 3 232 trace 3 180 How to save amplitude correction table 3 132 3 229 data to a PC via a network 1 20 2 6 files 3 232 menu settings 3 232 preset files 3 233 screen copy to a disk 3 255 trace 3 180 How to set zoomed area 3 25 IF flatness calibration 1 25 Input menu 3 227 over voltage 3 131 source 3 227 Inspection E 1 Installation 1 9 Integrated phase noise description 3 107 Interface maps 2 1 IO digital IO output Option 05 2 5 input note 3 227 IQ versus Time measurement 3 42 3 85 1Q Frequency versus Time measurement 3 52 K Key lock 2 12 Keyboard operation 2 8 Keypad 2 3 entering a file name 3 238 using 2 21 L LAN Ethernet connector side panel 2 6 Lines menu 3 204 menu Real Time S A 3 208 Load menu 3 230 RSA3408A User Manual Main view modulation analysis screen 3 29 Manuals list x
64. 3 221 Mode selecting 2 23 Modulation analysis Demod mode 3 27 Mouse operation 2 8 Mult display lines Real Time S A only 3 207 NBW setup display 2 13 Noisogram Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 111 view setting 3 201 Numeric input 2 19 0 OBW measurement 3 11 Online help using 3 223 Option displaying 2 26 Option key 2 27 Optional accessories F 4 Options F 1 OOQPSK shifting data 3 47 Overflow A D 3 131 Overlap FFT 3 166 Overview changing 3 34 modulation analysis screen 3 29 Index 4 Over voltage input 3 131 P P25 C4FM 3 45 PDF measurement 3 60 view setting 3 200 PDF manuals xviii PEAK 3 213 Peak search 3 211 operation 3 220 setting minimum jump 3 221 Phase noise measurement Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 105 Pin assignment digital IQ output connectors Option 05 C 1 Pixel relation between frame bin and pixel 3 180 PM signal measurement 3 41 Power AC requirements 1 10 applying 1 10 connecting the cord 1 10 powering off 1 18 principal power switch 1 11 switch 1 11 Power on down measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 69 Power versus Time measurement 3 86 Demod mode 3 53 PRESET 2 24 Principal power switch 1 11 Print menu 3 253 screen copy 3 253 Product description 1 1 Programmer Manual related documents xviii Pulse measurements 3 93 Pulse spectrum 3 43 Q Q Data Half Symbol Shift 3 47 R Random jitte
65. 39 dBm 85 41 z a mi z Marker X Positie Hz Marker 1 Peak difference Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor Off 10 dB Marker 2 Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X pee Go to page 2 of 2 Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 997 Figure 2 41 Searching for the peak 4 Press the Markers side key to select Off Both markers disappear 2 46 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Using Averaging and Comparison Displays Averaging RSA3408A User Manual This section describes how to use the averaging function which displays the waveform with reduced noise The averaged waveform can be displayed with the original waveform There are several averaging methods select RMS Root Mean Square in this example 1 Press the TRACE AVG key SrAN AMPLITUDE RBW FFT TIMING TRACE AVG MEASURE P MEAS SETUP TRACE AVG key 2 Press the Trace Type side key to select Average Press the Number of Averages side key to specify how many traces are accumulated to create the averaged waveform In this example enter 64 with the numeric keypad Press 6 4 ENTER in order 4 Press the RUN STOP key on the front panel to acquire waveform 2 47 Tutorial The averaged wa
66. 4 MHz 4 5 6 The unit keys also function as enter keys PQRS TUV WXYZ us When you press any of these keys the numeric value ou enter will be set immediately 1 2 3 kHz d amp CAPSLOCK ns dBm NEXT 0 pa Hz ENTER lt Accepts the inputs Numeric keys Figure 2 32 Numeric value entry keypad 2 36 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial The spectrum waveform is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 2 33 The current setting is displayed on the bottom of the screen Center Freq MHz 100 in this example Tektranix RSA 3408A 2 0 FREQ CHAN Frequency 100 MHz RBW 100 kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Center Freq 4 Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Hz E 0 Start Freq dBm Hz 82M Stop Freq Hz 118M Channel 10 Channel Table 4 None Center Freq Step Same As C F Center Freq Step T Same As Span The current setting is displayed in this field o Step Size Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Genter Freq Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Center Freq MHz 100 sok Figure 2 33 Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 36 MHz The next step is to set the span It is currently set to 36 MHz as the default value Change the setting to 20 kHz 3 Press the SPAN key on the front panel 4 MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY CHANNEL STOP SPAN key gt SPAN TRIG 4 A RBW AMPLITUDE Eh
67. 40 000 W CDMA UL Present Python 2 0 8 Oct 16 2000 17 27 58 MSC 32 bit Intel on win32 Copyright c 2000 BeOpen com All Rights Reserved Figure 2 24 Displaying versions and options The following information is shown on the screen m Version m Main System Basic application software version m Sub System Firmware version Option The table shows version and name of the option installed The Option Key field tells you the following information Present Indicates that you can use the option Not Present Indicates that you cannot use the option For information about how to remove the protection and use the option refer to Enabling the Option 3 To exit the version display press any front panel key 2 26 RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Enabling the Option 1 Contact your local Tektronix office to order the option You will receive an option key alphanumeric code 2 Press the Option Key side key see Figure 2 24 and enter the option key using the alphanumeric keypad on the front panel NOTE To input hyphen press the period key 3 Press the Change Option Key side key to accept the input Now you can use the option on the analyzer RSA3408A User Manual 2 27 Functional Overview Using Windows XP 2 28 Displaying the Windows Desktop Starting Windows XP Applications Setting Date and Time This analyzer operates under Windo
68. 800 MHz Span 100 kHz RealTime 5 Measurement Off Spectrum Offset frame 48 Figure 3 21 Real time mode 3 22 RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode RSA3408A User Manual 5 When you have acquired the measurement data stop the data acquisition If the analyzer is in the continuous acquisition mode press RUN STOP Press the Spectrum Offset side key and set the number of the frame to measure and display in the spectrum view upper view by turning the general purpose knob or using the numeric keypad Serial numbers are given to each frame regardless of the block size with Zero representing the latest frame The selected frame is indicated by the marker on the spectrogram see Figure 3 21 Alternatively the frame number can be set as follows a Press the VIEW SELECT key to select the spectrogram view b Press the MARKER SETUP key Press the Go to page 2 Marker X Vertical side key d Setthe frame number by turning the general purpose knob or using the numeric keypad To take a spectrum measurement press the MEASURE key on the front panel The measurement items and procedures are the same as in the normal spectrum analysis Refer to Spectrum Analysis on page 3 4 To change the display format press the DEFINE key on the front panel The setting procedure is the same as in the normal spectrum analysis Refer to Spectrogram Display on page 3 18 NOTE In real time mode you cannot turn on
69. 99 999 997 MHz gt i Measurement Off result measured accurately with m E counter function pectrum nalvzer Carrier Frequency Figure 2 49 Carrier frequency measurement 2 56 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Modulation Analysis This section describes how to analyze a modulated signal Settings are the same as those in the previous section center frequency of 100 MHz span of 20 kHz and amplitude of 0 dBm Selecting Analysis Mode analyzer functions are classified into three functional groups selected using the Mode keys see Figure 2 50 m Spectrum analysis MODE S A Performs general spectrum analysis All operations in the tutorial up to this point have been performed in this mode m Modulation analysis MODE DEMOD Performs analog and digital optional modulation analyses m Time analysis MODE TIME Performs time characteristic analysis including CCDF measurement MODE keys Select the analysis mode MEASUREMENT DISPLAY MODE VIEW FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL STOP S A SELECT DEFINE SPAN TRIG DEMOD SCALE LINES MARKERS AMPLITUDE REWI TIME SELECT Figure 2 50 MODE keys The measurement procedures for modulation analysis and the time analysis are similar Select the analog modulation analysis as follows 1 Press the DEMOD key on the front panel 2 Press the Analog Demod side key RSA3408A User Manual 2 57 Tutorial Selec
70. DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT TJ FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT TJ HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND MS HAS RELIED UPON TJ TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON MS NOTE ON JAVA SUPPORT The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the o
71. Demod 20 100 96 Figure 2 55 Single view display 2 62 Show Views Select Single to show only the selected view with the size enlarged RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial 4 Change the scale a Press the SCALE key in the VIEW area b Press the Horizontal Scale side key and change the scale of the horizontal axis see Figure 2 56 Try several settings by turning the general purpose knob observe the changes in the display Press the Vertical Scale side key and change the vertical axis scale Try several settings by turning the knob observe the changes in the display Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 23 03 28 AM PAUSE VIEW SCALE 3 Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 255 ms Cancel Back 5 20 pan Auto Scale I t Att 15 dB lik Amplitude 100 Horizontal 96 s E Horizontal Start s 232m Vertical 5cale 9 0 200 Vertical Offset 9 0 0 Vertical Scale a Full Scale default scaling Start 232 ms Scale 800 Lis Analog Demod AM Demod Horizontal Scale ms 8 Horizontal Scale Figure 2 56 Scale settings Completing the Complete the measurement with the follow
72. Example 20050721 140120 0000154761 IOT m Directory C Documents and Settings lt username gt My Documents Save on Trigger Use the following Trigger menu items to control the Save on Trigger function Save On Trigger Enables and disables the Save on Trigger function On Enables the Save on Trigger function m Off Default Disables the Save on Trigger function Save Count Selects whether or not to set a limit on the number of times that data is saved m On Default When the number of data save operations reaches the Save Count Limit indicated below data saving is halted Off No limit on data save operations is set In this case data saving is halted using the RUN STOP key on the front panel or the GPIB command NOTE When the internal hard disk becomes full data saving is halted and the Media full error message appears For deleting a file refer to page 3 240 Save Count Limit Sets a limit on the number of times that data is saved This setting is enabled when the above mentioned Save Count is On Setting range 1 to 16383 default 100 3 154 RSA3408A User Manual Trigger Creating a Trigger Mask Option 02 Only NOTE The trigger mask function is available for Option 02 in the measurement mode Mode of the real time spectrum analysis Real Time S A the modulation analysis Demod and the time analysis Time Trigger masks are limited to 60 dBfs The trigger mask shown in Figure
73. Full Scale Measurement Content EVM Mag Error Phase Error Symbol Table Radix Rotate Hex Oct Bin Eye Diagram Measurement Content Q Trellis Eye Length r Auto Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Vertical Scale Vertical Size Vertical Scale Vertical Stop Vertical Start Vertical Stop Full Scale Color Scale Color Stop Full Scale Full Scale CCDF view AM AM views Auto Scale r Measurement Content Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Vertical Start Vertical Stop Vertical Start AM PM view Full Scale I Measurement Content Sub Grid Off On Time mode only Horizontal Start Vertical Scale PDF view Auto Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Vertical Scale Vertical Stop Full Scale Noisogram view Auto Scale Horizontal Stop Horizontal Start Vertical Size Vertical Start Color Scale Color Stop Full Scale Vertical Offset for zero centered vertical axis Vector Dot Vector Dot Option 21 only RSA3408A User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Display View Menu 2 of 3 S A Mode DEFINE LINES Demod Mode LINES RSA3408A User Manual of Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram Grid Style Off Fix Flex Spectrogram Off On Show Views Single Multi View Orientation Tall Wide
74. Jitter Maximum periodic jitter RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 75 shows an example of the phase noise measurement The Integrated Phase Noise in the measurement results indicates a phase noise value obtained by integrating C N in the random jitter measurement range illustrated in Figure 3 74 The Random Jitter in the measurement results indicates a jitter value equivalent to the integrated phase noise Tektronix RSA 3408A MEAS SETUP Frequency 2 GHz RBW Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Smoothed Carrier Threshold Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Max Min Level dBm 30 Carrier dem Bandwidth Hz 100k 10 dB C N Sideband Ben Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz 50 dBc Hz ly 10 dB 150 dBc Hz Start 10Hz Current trace green End 100MHz Lower Upper Minimum Offset Frequency 10Hz Maximum Offset Frequency LO0MIHz Rj Start Offset Frequency Hz 256 Carrier Frequency 2 000 000 003 GHz Rj Stop Offset Channel Power 11 366 dem Frequency Hz Integrated Phase Noise 0 15 deg RMS Averaged trace by the 9M Random Jitter 0 203 ps RMS Median filter yellow Max Pj Threshold Max Periodic Jitter 1 402 ps dB 5 Figure 3 75 Phase noise measurement Selecting Trace 2 In the C N versus Offset frequency graph Trace 1 yellow represents a trace averaged by the Median filter and Trace 2 green
75. Layout The following three views are displayed on screen by default in the Demod mode see Figure 3 26 Overview Displays all data in one acquisition block The Timing field at the bottom of the overview indicates the contents of the main view and the subview as well as the trigger point For information about the trigger point refer to Trigger Point Indicator on page 3 161 m Main view Displays the measurement results and waveform for the range specified by the green horizontal line in the overview Some measurements show the results and waveform separately on the right and left sides of the main view m Subview Displays the spectrum default The FFT processing range is indicated by the pink horizontal line shown in the overview Overview Subview 0 dem 10 dB ddiw 100 Bm arto 10 The subview displays the spectrum for the range indicated by the pink horizontal line Timing indicator gt Timing Start 51 2 Mis indicates a trigger point 500 m Start 32 3 ms gium TW dBm ms div Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz The main view displays the measurement result and waveform for the range indicated by the green horizontal line Scale 643 75 pus div Main view Figure 3 26 Demod mode screen RSA3408A User Manual 3 29 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Setting the Analysis analysis is performed for the range specified
76. Length 32 ms so the data is displayed in the overview for 256 32 8 frames 8192 points The green underline indicating the analysis range gets narrower than the previous setting one block 2 frames RSA3408A User Manual 2 61 Tutorial Displaying Single View Although three views are normally displayed in the Demod mode you can select and Changing Scale view to display full screen This section describes how to display one view and change the vertical and horizontal scales using the VIEW keys l Press the RUN STOP key to stop data acquision and observe the waveform 2 Press the VIEW SELECT key to select the main view The selected view is surrounded with a white frame ppc DISPLAY Jg keys MODE VIEW S A SELECT DEFINE zd d DEMOD SCALE LINES 4 gt MARKERS lt 4 a OH tme QEFI FAT 3 Press the DEFINE key and then the Show Views side key shown in Figure 2 55 to select Single Only the main view is displayed with the size enlarged on the screen Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 145455 Ne PAUSE DEFINE Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 256 ms Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Show Views Input Att 15 dB Single Mutt 100 Overview 96 Content Waveform ARIA Start 232 ms Scale 3 2 ms Menu Off Analog Demod AM
77. Line Offset Time Line Interval Frequency Line Off On Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval View Lines Readout Off On Figure 3 147 Lines menu structure Real Time S A RSA3408A User Manual Display Line Spectrum View Amplitude Line Determines whether to turn on or off the amplitude display lines The default is Off Amplitude Line Offset Sets the offset of the amplitude reference line Range 100 to 0 dBm the default is 0 dBm Amplitude Line Interval Sets the interval of the amplitude display lines Range 0 to 100 dB the default is 0 dB Frequency Line Determines whether to turn on or off the frequency display lines The default is Off Frequency Line Offset Sets the offset of the frequency reference line Range Center frequency Span 2 Hz The default value is the center frequency the reference line is at center screen Frequency Line Interval Sets the interval of the frequency display lines Range 0 to full span the default is 0 Hz View Lines Readout Determines whether to turn on or off the display lines readout The default is On Spectrogram View Time Line Determines whether to turn on or off the time display lines The default is Off Time Line Offset Sets the offset of the time reference line Range 0 second maximum Zero represents the latest frame The minimum value depends on acquired data quantity Time Line Interval Sets the interval
78. Results For described below zero represents the most current pulse while larger negative numbers represent subsequent pulses NOTE The main view shows the measurement results for up to 1000 pulses the pulse number of 999 to 0 RSA3408A User Manual 3 97 Time Analysis Time Mode View Results For Selects how to display the measurement results in the subview see Figure 3 71 m A Single Pulse Displays the measurement results for one pulse specified with Select Pulse m All Pulses Displays the measurement results for all pulses in the analysis range The horizontal axis represents the pulse number and the vertical axis represents the measurement results Subview 100 py 10 pw 0 W 12 056405 ms 12 049609 ms Pulse 309 Pulse 0 A Single Pulse All Pulses Shows the measurement result and Shows the measurement results for waveform for a specified pulse all pulses with the horizontal axis representing the pulse number Figure 3 71 Setting for View Results For Displayed Measurement Determines whether to show the measurement result in the main view for each measurement item Select On to show the result For the measurement items refer to page 3 93 NOTE You must select at least one measurement item in Displayed Measurement If you turn all items off an error message One or more measurement items must be selected will appear on the bottom of the scree
79. Screen Layout 3 2 Spectrum Analysis 0 0 eee nn 3 4 Spectrogram Display cee ee n 3 18 Reale Time Analysis sig ode a thts o Eb uu ERES 3 20 ZOOM Functio ed red tu dt ud SE 3 24 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 27 Measurement Screen Layout 3 29 Analog Modulation Analysis 3 37 Digital Modulation Analysis Option 21 3 44 RFID Analysis Option 21 3 61 Time Analysis Time Mode 3 83 Measurement Screen Layout 3 83 Time Variation Measurement 3 84 Measurement deo ede e e RERO E ape ER e qd 3 88 Puls Measuremerits eee puri eed d a e ARR ANA 3 93 Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only 3 103 Setting Frequency and 3 119 Frequency and Span Setting 3 120 Using the Channel Table 3 122 Using the Marker and Peak Search 3 123 Frequency Setting Range 3 124 Vector Span sos teat pe ios ae s edes 3 126 Setting Amplitude
80. Select Trace side key to select the trace 1 or 2 to be controlled For example to control Trace 2 select 2 3 Press the Trace 1 or 2 side key to select the display method On Freeze or OFF 4 Press the Trace 1 or 2 Type side key to select the trace type Normal Average MaxHold or MinHold refer to Trace 1 2 Type on page 3 175 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for Trace 1 and 2 RSA3408A User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Averaging the Waveform The averaging technique is generally used to average and reduce the noise of the waveform The average function includes the peak hold which maintains the maximum and minimum values as well as the averaging process Average Type There are four averaging types as follows where these variables are used Display data for the nt frame X p Active data for the n frame P Frame point N Value of Number of Averages RMS Root mean square Used when acquiring data in single mode N frames average then the acquisition stops X P n X P n for n 1 20 ee for 2 Sn S X P n for n gt N Exponential RMS Exponential root mean square Used when acquiring data in continuous mode Continuous averaging weights older sweeps so that they have a progressively smaller effect on the average X P n X P n for n 1 i eee for 2 n S MED e ain on Max Hold Displays only the maximum value at each data poi
81. The input signals are scanned in frame units one frame 1024 points There are two frames a physical frame to store scanned data and a logical frame to store display data as illustrated in Figure 3 86 In the baseband one logical frame is acquired at one scan regardless of the span setting You can acquire one logical frame with one scan of a span setting below 36 MHz in the RF band In larger spans one logical frame is built up by acquiring data with multiple physical frames For example when the span is 40 MHz one logical frame is composed from two 40 MHz 20 MHz scans When the span is below 36 MHz in the baseband and RF band one physical frame corresponds to one logical frame this is referred to as Vector mode and the span in vector mode is called the Vector span In the other cases one logical frame is composed of multiple physical frames and this is called Scalar mode Span lt 36 MHz Vector mode Physical frame Scan data Logical frame Display data Frame 0 C Framed Frame 1 gt Frame 2 gt Frame 2 gt FrameN gt 36 MHz Scalar mode Physical frame Scan data Logical frame Display data Frame 0 gt Frame 1 Frame 2 gt C gt Frame0 Frame Frame 0 N Frame 1 Frame 2 gt gt Framei Frame Figure 3
82. are stored in this directory on the analyzer hard disk C Program Files VTektronixwca200a Manuals Use the USB or LAN interface to copy the files onto your PC referring to the following sections Side Panel Interface on page 2 6 Using Windows XP on page 2 28 Optional Software When using the optional software refer to the following manuals User Manuals m RSA3408A Option 23 W CDMA Uplink Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the W CDMA uplink analysis m RSA3408A Option 24 GSM EDGE Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the GSM EDGE analysis m RSA3408A Option 25 cdma2000 Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the cdma2000 forward and reverse link analysis RSA3408A Option 26 cdma2000 IxEV DO Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the cdma2000 1xEV DO forward and reverse link analysis m RSA3408A Option 27 3GPP Release 5 Downlink HSDPA Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the 3GPP Release 5 downlink analysis xviii RSA3408A User Manual Preface m RSA3408A Option 28 TD SCDMA Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the TD SCDMA analysis m RSA3408A Option 29 WLAN 802 11a b g Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the WLAN analysis m RSA3408A Option 40 3GPP Release 6 HSUPA Analysis Software User Manual provides operating basics for the 3GPP Release 6
83. as Hamming Hanning or Blackman Harris Use the last window that still passes the frequency component to be separated Suitable frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy are obtained by using the window immediately before the one from which the frequency component cannot be separated Consider the following characteristics when selecting a window for your purpose m Frequency resolution is improved by reducing the width of the main lobe window Accuracy of the amplitude levels of frequency components is improved by reducing side lobe level relative to the main lobe The analyzer supports a total of 15 windows including the major windows mentioned previously refer to Table 3 23 Table 3 23 FFT window and bandpass filter Window Bandpass filter 39 08 bandwidth Maximum sidelobe bandwidth Equivalent noise Blackman Harris 3 sample A type Blackman Harris 3 sample B type 1 622 71 dB 1 708538 Blackman Harris 4 sample A type 1 698 76 dB 1 793948 Blackman Harris 4 sample B type Default 1 898 92 dB 2 004353 3 170 RSA3408A User Manual FFT and RBW Table 3 23 FFT window and bandpass filter Cont Equivalent noise Window Bandpass filter 59 0D bandalagi Maximum side lobe bandwidth Blackman 1 642 58
84. conditions remain constant Expressed in hertz per second Frequency Modulation FM The process or result of a process in which the frequency of an electrical signal the carrier is varied in accordance with some characteristic of a second electrical signal the modulating signal or modulation Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Frequency Range The range of frequencies over which the performance of the instrument is specified Frequency Span Dispersion The magnitude of the frequency band displayed expressed in hertz or hertz per division FSK Acronym for Frequency Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the frequency of the carrier is varied in accordance with the state of a digital input signal GPIB Acronym for General Purpose Interface Bus the common name for the communications interface system defined in IEEE Std 488 Graticule The calibrated grid overlaying the display screen of spectrum analyzers oscilloscopes and other test instruments Grayed Out An on screen control is grayed out if it is not adjustable Import Bring data into the application from a file of some format other than application native Input Impedance The impedance at the desired input terminal Usually expressed in terms of VSWR return loss or other related terms for low impedance devices and resistance capacitance parameters for high impedance devices Intermediate Frequency IF In a heterodyne process th
85. content is Green line Recovered reference line AM AM or AM PM Blue line Gaussian line Figure 3 49 CCDF measurement RSA3408A User Manual 3 59 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode PDF Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a PDF Probability Distribution Function graph Figure 3 50 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of power level versus occurrence probability The horizontal axis represents power level relative to the mean value at the center Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the PDF measurement contains the following controls On the common controls for the digital modulation analysis refer to Meas Setup Menu page 3 45 Linear Signal Region Unit Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 56 Linear Signal Region Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 56 Horizontal Division Sets the horizontal interval between display points Range 0 01 to 1 dB the default is 0 1 dB Tektronix RSA 3408A PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 40 Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets Marker 3 180078125 ms Off 5 15 dBm Overview Power versus Time Modulation dem Type 15QAM Subview AM AM ms p Dr Use VIEW DEFINE Subview Content dB bi du to select the d
86. correction table of Frequency Amplitude pairs used for adjusting amplitude values Save Menu Saves waveform data or instrument settings to a file Save State Saves the instrument settings Save Data Real Time S A only Saves waveform IO data in the time domain Save Data Demod and Time modes only Saves waveform data IO data in the time domain specified with the following submenu m All Blocks Saves all the blocks Current Block Saves the block currently displayed W Current Area Saves the data displayed in the main view NOTE The menu items below Save Trace 1 Save Trace 2 and Correction are available in the S A spectrum analysis mode except Real Time S A Save Trace 1 Saves data for Trace 1 of a graph Save Trace 2 Saves data for Trace 2 of a graph Save Correction Saves a correction table of Frequency Amplitude pairs used for adjusting amplitude values RSA3408A User Manual 3 231 File Operations Saving and Loading Files The following procedures show how to save and load files Using a Disk You can use a 2HD 1 44 M bytes or 2DD 720 bytes 3 5 inch disk formatted for MS DOS The disk drive is on the side panel See Figure 2 3 on page 2 6 Saving a File Use the following steps to save settings or waveforms to a file There are two ways to save data to a file using the preset file name and entering a new file name To return to the previous menu press the Cancel Back side key at a
87. dB 1 726757 Hamming 1 302 43 dB 1 362826 Hanning 1 438 32 dB 1 5 Parzen 1 27 27 dB 1 330747 Rosenfield 48 dB 1 90989 Welch 21 dB 1 197677 Sine Lobe 23 dB 1 233702 RSA3408A User Manual 3 171 FFT and RBW Table 3 23 FFT window and bandpass filter Cont Equivalent noise Window Bandpass filter SOB bandwidth Maximum sidelobe bandwidth Sine Cubed 39 dB 1 734891 Sine to the 4 1 85 47 dB 1 944444 Flat Top 51 dB 3 196927 Rectangular 13 dB 1 3 172 RSA3408A User Manual OI Trace Comparison Display and Average Function In the spectrum analysis S A mode you can display two traces concurrently on screen Trace 1 is displayed in yellow and Trace 2 in green see Figure 3 121 The trace can be averaged for noise reduction You can save waveform data in files and load them as Trace 1 or 2 NOTE Trace comparison display and average function are available in the spectrum analysis S A mode except Real Time S A Marker 799 95MHz 93 084dBm 120 074dBm Hz a dBm Center GOOMH Trace 1 yellow Waveform currently being acquired Trace 2 green Averaged waveform Span 100kHz Figure 3 121 Comparison display of Trace 1 and 2 RSA3408A User Manual The main topics in this section are Trace Avg menu Displaying Trace 1 and 2 Averaging waveform Saving Loading waveform data
88. external trigger input and output connectors on the rear panel see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 to synchronize the operation of the analyzer with an external instrument By synchronizing two or more analyzers you can acquire multiple signals in different span keeping the time correlation Figure 3 114 shows an example of two RSA3408A analyzers performing IMT2000 signal analysis One analyzer is used as a master to acquire an uplink or forward link signal and the other is used as a slave to acquire a downlink or reverse link signal The master trigger output is connected to the slave trigger input If you trigger the master with a preamble in the first PRACH signal sent from the mobile terminal then the slave starts data acquisition You can seamlessly acquire the uplink and downlink communication data in the time correlated manner for 10 seconds with 5 MHz span to analyze them TRIG OUT TRIG IN A T 4 E ze xa Master Slave for analyzing uplink signal for analyzing downlink signal Figure 3 114 Synchronous operation of two RSA3408A analyzers RSA3408A User Manual ae FFT and RBW An input signal is converted to the frequency domain data by FFT Fast Fourier Transform processing RBW Resolution Bandwidth processing is then applied for compatibility with measu
89. front panel to set the span c Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel to set the amplitude 4 Setthe analysis range by pressing the TIMING key on the front panel Refer to page 3 30 for details about setting the analysis range NOTE The CCDF measurement does not have Analysis Length and Analysis Off set controls in the Timing menu 5 Setthe measurement parameters described just below by pressing the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel Single Acquisition In single acquisition mode you can set the total number of accumulated data points with TRACE AVG gt Maximum Points ranging from 2048 to 1055 RSA3408A User Manual 3 89 Time Analysis Time Mode Meas Setup Menu Meas Setup menu for the CCDF measurement contains the following controls Display Gaussian Line Determines whether to display Gaussian line on screen Display Reference Line Determines whether to display the most recently stored reference line on screen Store Reference Line Stores the current CCDF curve as a new reference line Automatically enables the reference line display Reset Measurement Performs the CCDF calculation again from the beginning The calculation is performed accumulatively until this side key is pressed CCDF Auto Scaling Selects whether to fix the scale of the horizontal axis amplitude of CCDF graph display m Off Default The scale of the horizontal axis is set to a fixed value using CCDF Scale On Disp
90. in the overview see Range Figure 3 27 and then the measurement result and waveform are displayed in the main view Set the analysis range after data acquisition with the following procedure using the Timing menu The range is indicated by green lines 1 Press the TIMING key on the front panel 2 Setthe time length to acquire one block by pressing the Acquisition Length side key Suppose that one block contains N frames the acquisition length is calculated with this equation One block acquisition length 2 N X One frame acquisition length One frame acquisition length is determined by span and indicated on the Spectrum Length side key 3 For data acquired in the continuous mode Specify the number of the block to be analyzed by pressing the Acquisition History side key 0 zero represents the latest block 4 Specify the time length of analysis range by pressing the Analysis Length side key 5 Specify the start point of the analysis range by pressing the Analysis Offset side key Analysis Offset Acquisition History Analysis Length Overview Stat 51 2 ms Scale 5 12 ms div Acquisition Length Figure 3 27 Analysis range setting in the overview 3 30 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Specifying Origin of Analysis Range Using the Marker You can also use the marker in place of the Analysis Offset side key to specify the origi
91. key by repeatedly pressing BKSP the backspace key until the incorrect character disappears and then typing the correct value If you want to restart from the beginning press the Cancel Back top side key You can also move the insertion cursor using the general purpose knob or up down keys 3 239 File Operations Deleting a File You can delete a file using Windows but not using the analyzer menu Refer to page 2 28 for information about using Windows on the analyzer Refer to Windows documentation for additional information about operating Windows Making Deleting a Directory You can make or delete a directory using Windows but not using the analyzer menu Refer to page 2 28 for information about using Windows on the analyzer Refer to Windows documentation for additional information about operating Windows 3 240 RSA3408A User Manual File Format Data File Format File Structure RSA3408A User Manual This section describes the structure of the data file IOT and the trace file TRC The data file normally consists of five blocks The date and time may be added to the end for data logging see Figure 3 168 Data file IQT File header text format Data block binary format Correction data block binary format Dummy header text format Extended correction data block binary format Date and time text format Figure 3 168 Data file structure The file is normally c
92. keys can be displayed down the right side of the screen see Figure 2 12 Cancel Back is always displayed at the top and the other eight keys select menu items AMPLITUDE Cancel Back Ref Level i dBm 5 Cancel Back always displayed Returns to the last displayed menu or cancels a partial numeric entry from the keypad Auto Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RFAtt Mixer RF Att dB 20 Mixer Level dBm Nominal 25 gt Opens a menu Vertical Scale dB div 10 Vertical Units dBm dBuiv v Corrections Figure 2 12 Example menu item display NOTE When the setting is prohibited or is not available the item is displayed in gray 2 18 RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Menu ltem Types The different types of menu items are shown in Figure 2 13 Ref Level Numeric entry dBm E The current value of parameter is displayed To change the value press the associated side key and use the P general purpose knob up down keys or the keypad Toggle RF Atten Mixer M You can switch selection items by pressing the associated side key Auto Mixer Function execution The function indicated on the label is executed by pressing the associated side key In this example the Channel Power measurement is performed Channel Power Move to sub menu amp If th
93. length 3 142 offset 3 142 Analysis range setting 3 30 Angular units System menu 2 25 Architecture 1 6 Arrow keys Markers menu 3 213 ASK Modulation Type 3 45 note for measurements 3 49 Auto level 3 128 Average 3 173 Demod mode 3 176 menu 3 174 Time mode 3 176 type 3 177 Backing up user files 1 20 Bin relation between frame bin and pixel 3 180 Block diagram 1 6 Bluetooth 3 45 Brightness RSA3408A User Manual adjusting 1 26 uneven 1 19 C C N measurement 3 9 C4FM 3 45 Cal menu 1 22 Calibration 1 21 Carrier frequency measurement 3 13 Carrier measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 64 Carrier tracking Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 109 Caution RF INPUT 1 12 CCDF Demod mode 3 59 Time mode 3 88 view setting 3 191 Center offset calibration 1 24 Changing overview 3 34 subview 3 34 Channel power measurement 3 5 Channel table using 3 122 Cleaning E 1 Compression trace data 3 180 Constellation measurement 3 50 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 79 view setting 3 192 Continuous trigger 3 149 Conventions xix Copy screen 3 253 Correction amplitude description 3 132 menu 3 133 D DC offset calibration 1 25 Decoding format RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 71 Default settings restoring 2 24 Demod mode 3 27 Digital IO output Option 05 pin assignment C 1 rear panel connectors 2 5 Index 1 Index turning on or off 2 2
94. marker Demod menu structure Demod modescreen Analysis range setting in the overview MARKERS keys Specifying the range with the marker and the reference Figure 3 30 Specifying the analysis range using the mouse Figure 3 31 FFT processing range setting on the overview 2 58 2 60 2 60 2 61 2 62 2 63 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 19 3 20 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 3 34 vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 parameters Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Changing the overview and subview One view display AM demod measurement FM demod measurement PM demod measurement IQ versus time measurement Pulse spectrum measurement Process flow for digitally modulated signals Constellation analysis EVM measurement IQ Frequency
95. mask See Figure 3 107 Set All Points to Maximum Set All Points to Minimum 60 dB Reset Mask to Default 1 7 60 dB Figure 3 107 Filling operation for creating a mask RSA3408A User Manual Trigger Conditions for Creating a Mask Example of Mask Creation RSA3408A User Manual The required conditions for creating a trigger mask are as follows m Measurement mode Mode Real Time S A Demod or Time Trigger mode TRIG Mode Triggered Trigger source TRIG Source Freq Mask The procedure shows you how to create the example mask shown in Figure 3 108 Figure 3 108 Example mask 1 Before you start creating a trigger mask make sure that the requirements listed in Conditions for Creating a Mask above are satisfied 2 Stop data acquisition using the RUN STOP key 3 The trigger mask is created in the spectrum view To display only the spectrum view on the screen follow these steps a Press the VIEW SELECT key on the front panel to select the spectrum view b Press the VIEW DEFINE key on the front panel c Press the Show Views side key and select Single 4 Press the TRIG key on the front panel 5 Press the Define Mask
96. measurement only Specifies the power ratio of the carrier and span regions for calculating OBW Range 80 to 99 9 default 99 as defined in T 53 or IS 95 standard EBW Meas Level For the EBW measurement only Specifies how far down from the peak level the bandwidth is measured Range 100 to 1 dB default 30 dB Counter Resolution For the Frequency Deviation measurement only Sets the frequency counter resolution It is the same as in the Carrier Frequency measurement in the S A mode refer to page 3 13 Range 1 mHz to 1 MHz in a tenfold sequence default 1 Hz P P Phase Time Offset For the Pulse Pulse Phase measurement only Sets the time offset for the measurement point The default value is 0 zero second the measurement point is at the beginning of the pulse on time Measurement Filter Selects the measurement filter applied to time domain I O data for each pulse None no filter m Gaussian Filter Bandwidth Sets the bandwidth for the Gaussian measurement filter Range Span 10 to full span default 3 6 MHz Filter Parameter Sets the o BT value for the Gaussian measurement filter Range 0 0001 to 1 0 default 0 35 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Measurement Screen RSA3408A User Manual Frequency Recovery For the Pulse Pulse Phase and the Frequency Deviation measurements only Selects the frequency correction method Ist Sets the correction value automatically using
97. memory stick m Plug the USB memory stick to the USB connector on the analyzer side panel before turning on the analyzer Do not unplug the memory stick while operating the analyzer NOTE If you use a USB memory stick that includes a different serial number the error message UNCAL will be displayed in red on the screen For repair or calibration ship your instrument with the USB memory stick to us After repair or calibration run the Backup exe program stored in the USB memory to back up the USB memory contents onto the analyzer s internal hard disk on the Windows desktop of the analyzer display the contents of the USB memory and then double click Backup exe D 1 Appendix D Using the Removable Hard Disk Drive Option 06 lt 1 Loosen the screws to open the door sl 2 Unplug the connector 4 3 the hard disk cartridge QOOOO 2000 2020000 2000 20000 Qoo 00000 O9 20000 20000 UU Figure D 1 Detaching the removable hard disk drive D 2 RSA3408A User Manual ENEMIES a EEE Appendix E Inspection and Cleaning A Inspecting the Exterior RSA3408A User Manual Inspect and clean the exterior of the instrument as often as operating conditions require Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipation Regular cleaning may prevent instrument malfunction and enhance reliability WARNING To avoid
98. method to determine whether a signal peak is higher or lower than a specified level or whether it falls within a specified range Use the LINES menu to control the display lines The Display Line feature displays horizontal and or vertical line s at the position you specify There are two types of lines horizontal line and vertical line as shown in Figure 3 142 In the S A mode other than Real Time S A you can display one or two of each line You can display the horizontal and vertical lines concurrently The Real Time S A mode has multi display lines function that shows multiple horizontal and vertical lines NOTE The display line is available only in the S A spectrum analysis mode dBm 800MHz 30dBm Vertical line 10 Horizontal line dB 100 dBm Center 800 MHz Span 36 MHz Figure 3 142 Display line This section provides these two topics Display Line Operation Other than Real Time S A wm Multi Display Lines Real Time S A Only RSA3408A User Manual 3 203 Display Line Display Line Operation Other than Real Time S A Controls the display line See Figure 3 143 for the Lines menu structure DISPLAY MODE VIEW S A SELECT DEFINE DEMOD SCALE LINES Show Line Horizontal Vertical MARKERS Number Of Line None 1 2 TIME Number Of Line 1 I Line 1 Number Of Line 2 I Line 1 Line 2 Delta
99. ms Channel power O Channel Power dBm Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz Frequency deviation 17 047266 ms 17 042891 ms RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only The signal source analysis function allows you to measure phase noise jitter and settling time in a signal source such as a PLL Phase Locked Loop system Measurement tems The following items are measured in the signal source analysis Select the items using the MEASURE key Table 3 13 Signal source measurement items Measure menu Measurement items Phase Noise m Carrier frequency m Channel power m Phase noise Real Time Phase Noise m Random jitter m Periodic jitter Spurious Spurious Real Time Spurious Frequency versus Time Frequency settling time For the Real Time concept refer to Real Time Analysis page 1 3 Features of the Real Time Mode page 3 20 RSA3408A User Manual 3 103 Time Analysis Time Mode Basic Procedure Use the following procedure to perform the signal source analysis NOTE If you use a signal input INPUT Signal Input Port other than RF the measurements are not guaranteed 1 Press the TIME key on the front panel 2 Select Signal Source Analysis using the side keys 3 Select a measurement item by pressing the side key For example press the Phase Noise side key to perform the phase noise measureme
100. non linearity characteristics of a DUT device under test such as an RF amplifier Figure 3 47 on page 3 57 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of recovered reference amplitude versus measured signal amplitude and the table of AM AM coefficients extracted from curve fitting Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the AM AM measurement contains the following controls For information about the common controls for the digital modulation analysis refer to Meas Setup Menu on page 3 45 Linear Signal Region Unit Selects the unit to set the Linear Signal Region m dB Default Specifies the Linear Signal Region with a value relative to the maximum power measured in the analysis range m dBm Specifies the Linear Signal Region with an absolute power Linear Signal Region Sets a region that should have an ideal AM AM characteristic Generally signal distortion increases with amplitude Linear Signal Region sets the region where the trend is assumed to be linear see Figure 3 46 The analysis is performed with this assumption The region is indicated by blue oblique lines in the main view Range 100 to 50 dB the default is 10 dB Measured power Linear Signal Region setting gt Linear Signal Region Reference power Figure 3 46 Setting Linear Signal Region Maximum Coefficient Sets the maximum order of the best fit curve polyno mial The polynomial is expressed as follows n Max 15 n f
101. of the time display lines Range 0 second minimum The maximum value depends on acquired data quantity The other menu items Frequency Line Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval and View Lines Readout are the same as the spectrum view RSA3408A User Manual 3 209 Display Line 3 210 RSA3408A User Manual i SUN Marker Operation and Peak Search The marker moves on a waveform to measure amplitude or frequency One or two markers can be displayed on the screen You can also use the reference cursor together with the marker The marker is also used for peak search For information on the band power marker used in the spectrum analysis refer to Spectrum Analysis S A mode on page 3 1 One or two markers active and fixed and or a reference cursor can be displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 3 148 Delta 2 50625 MHz Ref 97 5 MHz 70 316 dB 78 509 dB 127 54 dBm Hz 0 de lt Active marker Reference cursor E Li dB 100 Fixed marker dem Center 100 MHz Span 15 MHz Figure 3 148 Marker display m Single marker mode One marker called Marker 1 indicated by O moves on a waveform It is used to measure absolute values W Delta marker mode Two markers called Marker 1 and 2 indicated by O and move on a waveform O and represent an active and a fixed marker respectively They are used to measure relative values
102. operate the analyzer using the standard accessory mouse and keyboard instead of the side keys and the front panel keypad The mouse and keyboard operations are as follows Click the menu item instead of pressing the side keys m Ifthe menu item has arrow buttons click them to select the value Span Click th buttons to adjust the val Hz ick the arrow buttons to adjust the value XXX Figure 2 5 Operation with mouse and keyboard Table 2 1 Key functions of the keyboard Key Purpose Function Numeric keys Numeric input Enter a numeric value in a numeric input field Left Right Caret move Moves the caret in an alpha or numeric input field arrow keys Home Caret move Moves the caret to the beginning of an input field End Caret move Moves the caret to the end of an input field Backspace Alphanumeric input Deletes the character before the caret Delete Alphanumeric input Deletes the character after the caret ESC Alphanumeric input Aborts a numeric entry and restores the original value ENTER Alphanumeric input Accepts a value in the input field K or k key Alphanumeric input Kilo 103 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value M key Alphanumeric input Mega 108 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value G or g key Alphanumeric input Giga 109 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value m key Alphanumeric input milli 1073 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value
103. or off the spectrogram in the View Define menu 3 23 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Zoom Function When you select S A Real Time S A with Zoom the real time analysis area can be specified on the spectrogram Even though frequency hopping occurs measurement can only be made by clipping the optional burst see Figure 3 22 Spectrogram with the zoom function me Center 1 GHz Span 500 kHz 10 Specrumin e the zoomed area 111 Center 1 00008 GHz Span 80 625 kHz Figure 3 22 Zoom function Timing Menu In the spectrogram with the zoom function display the zoomed area is set by the following Timing menu see Figure 3 23 The area is the analysis range Acquisition Length Sets the capture time of one block Acquisition History A block number that analyzes displays data is specified The latest block number is 0 Older blocks have larger negative numbers Analysis Length Sets the time length of the zoomed area in the block set in the Acquisition History Analysis Offset Sets the starting point of the zoomed area by considering the trigger output point as the reference Frequency Center Sets the frequency of the center of zoomed area Frequency Width Sets the frequency width of the zoomed area Refer to Setting Timing Parameters on page 3 141 3 24 RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Setting a Zoomed Area Using the Marker RSA3408A User Ma
104. page 3 161 For procedures to set these parameters refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 30 and Setting FFT Processing Range for the Subview on page 3 34 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Timing Parameters typically 1024 data points One frame ee EEEN NT TE Time gt M frames 1 block ln d Frame number M 1 M 2 2 1 0 ene Acquisition Length Block number N 1 N 2 M Spectrum Offset e Spectrum Length gt Acquisition History FFT start point Demod and Time modes only Subview display 2 Trigger output Figure 3 97 Timing parameters Timing Parameters in Real Time S A Mode RSA3408A User Manual 1 Analysis Offset Analysis Length SS Analysis start point The Timing menu in the Real Time S A real time spectrum analysis mode contains the following items Acquisition Length Same as in the Demod and Time modes Spectrum Offset Specifies the number of the frame in the spectrogram to display the spectrum The latest frame is number zero Older frames have larger negative numbers 3 143 Setting Timing Parameters Timing Parameters The Timing menu in the Real Time S A with Zoom mode contains the following Real Time S A with Zoom items see Figure 3 98 Mode Acquisition Length Same as i
105. page 3 56 Horizontal Division Sets the horizontal interval between display points Range 0 01 to 1 dB the default is 0 1 dB Display Gaussian Line Determines whether to display the Gaussian line Tektronix RSA 3408A 2004 12 01 11 36 22 PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 1 5 GHz Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets Marker 3 180078125 ms Off 5 15 dBm Overview Power versus Time gt 1 Modulation dem Type 16QAM Subview AM AM mra Ir TEL Use VIEW DEFINE Subview Content dB Mediation to select the display Auto Carrier P 44 E on o m Peak amu Start 10 ms Scale 1 ms 5 0dBm 6 Average amplitude Ref rror m Crest factor Peak 1 97 dBm Ciela em R Average 3 80 dBm 49 23 36 Data 77 2724213991 Crest Factor 5 77 dB Inno mcm emere Measurement data pata Ref Deer Fonal 4 Gaussian 1 it m Peak amplitude Peak M79 ssa Region Uni Average 4 75 dBm 53 85 36 m Average amplitude m Crest factor Ref Data ee eae 10 96 3 00dB 2304B Region B 1 440dB 320dB gt CCDF measurement results dE m oim SOR os eee Start 0 dB Scale 2dB Stop 12dB Coe 2 Digital Demod CCDF CCDF graph NOTE The reference line is displayed in the Yellow line Measurement line CCDF graph when the subview
106. personal injury unplug the power cord from line voltage before cleaning the instrument To avoid getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the applicator Inspect the outside of the instrument for damage wear and missing parts using Table E 1 as a guide Instruments that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and perfor mance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument Table E 1 External inspection check list Cabinet front panel Cracks scratches deformations damaged and cover hardware or gaskets Front panel knobs Missing damaged or loose knobs Connectors Broken shells cracked insulation and Contact your local deformed contacts Dirt in connectors Tektronix distributor or Carrying handle Correct operation PRONUS Accessories Missing items or parts of items bent pins broken or frayed cables and damaged connectors E 1 Appendix E Inspection and Cleaning A Cleaning the Exterior A Lubrication Cleaning the Interior E 2 CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument Organic solvents such as benzene and acetone must never be used Remove the power cord before cleaning the instrument Clean the exterior surfaces of the instrument with a dry lint fre
107. ratio when Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter is selected Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 Integration Bandwidth al Figure 3 4 Channel power measurement band power markers RSA3408A User Manual 3 5 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 6 An example of the channel power measurement is shown in Figure 3 5 Tektronix RSA 3408A MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Cancel Back Channel Bandwidth Hz dBm 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Measurement Filter Shape Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Span 20 kHz Channel Power 9 82 dBm Density 45 84 dBm Hz Channel Bandwidth Spectrum Analyzer Channel Power Channel Bandwidth kHz Figure 3 5 Channel power measurement 4 kHz RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode ACPR Measurement power ratio of the carrier signal to the signal appearing in its adjacent frequency band leak signal is measured in the ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio measurement Frequency ranges are set using three band power markers Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the ACPR measurement contains the following controls see Figure 3 6 Main Channel Bandwidth Sets frequency range of main channel Adjacent Channel Bandwidth Sets frequency range of adjacent channel Chan Spacing Sets a frequency interval between two adj
108. shows the Load Save menu structure mode except Real Time PRESET mode except Real Time LOAD Load State Load FromFile Load Trace 1 1 Select File Load Trace2 Load File Now SAVE Load Correction Folder Load from XXXA Real Time S A Demod and Time modes Load from XXXB Load State Load from XXXC PRINT Load Data Save State gt Save To File Menu Save Trace 1 4 Filename Save 2 Save File Now Save Correction Folder Save to XXXA Real Time S A Save to XXXB Save State Save to XXXC Save Data 3 Where XXX Demod and Time modes State for a state file Save State IQData for an IQ data file Save Data All Blocks Current Block Current Area Trace for a trace file Figure 3 161 Load Save menu structure 3 230 Corr for a correction file Bitmap for a bitmap file RSA3408A User Manual File Operations Load Menu Loads waveform data or instrument settings from a file Load State Loads the instrument settings Load Data Real Time S A Demod and Time modes only Loads waveform data IO data in the time domain NOTE The menu items below Load Trace 1 Load Trace 2 and Correction are available in the S A mode except Real Time S A Load Trace 1 Loads data for Trace 1 of a graph Load Trace 2 Loads data for Trace 2 of a graph Load Correction Loads a
109. than 32 ms m When the modulation type is OQPSK set the span so that the sampling rate is more than three times as fast as the symbol rate The sampling rate varies according to span setting For the detail refer to the Acquisition table described in the Specifications section of the Technical Reference refer to Related Documents on page xviii Modulation Parameters Sets the following modulation parameters Symbol Rate Enters the symbol rate for demodulating digitally modulated signals Symbol rate and bit rate are related as follows Symbol rate Bit rate Number of bits per symbol For example the number of bits per symbol is 3 for 8PSK Measurement Filter Selects a filter for demodulating a digitally modulated signal None no filter m Root Raised Cosine Reference Filter Selects a filter for creating a reference signal None no filter m Raised Cosine m Gaussian m Half Sine Refer to Process Flow for Digitally Modulated Signals on page 3 48 for the measurement and reference filters Filter Parameter Enters an a BT value for the Measurement Filter and Reference Filter Range 0 0001 to 1 Auto Modulation Depth Valid when the modulation type refer to page 3 45 is ASK Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the modulation depth used to distinguish between the two states of an ASK signal On Default Automatically calculates the modulation depth for the analysis range an
110. the Online 1 3 223 Displaying the Online Help eee keset eh 3 223 Using a Mouse and Keyboard 3 226 Selecting Input 3 227 Input een ote E ee ON ES S Ee ef 3 227 Op rations sss cc el Rr nt IE eI RR RUE wb wee Ey 3 229 Eie Type eue pert tee e al D be te D e e age Sane ue 3 229 Lboad Save Menu is cec er ec Wigs o aoe SEHR SII ch 3 230 Saving and Loading 3 232 Entering a File Name ee te eee eens 3 238 Deleting oae ose e e cr Ho em nca 3 240 Making Deleting a Directory 3 240 File RE p CEN ee a ERE SR 3 241 Data Fil be e aote grace t RE ed 3 241 Trace Fil eee Ree eR t ce be e qoe RIA 3 249 iil Table of Contents Appendices Glossary Index Screen Copy ies esI edet ede ante ee nere or 3 253 Print Menit i o donee eter get ep ate ae on ERI dca Miata nate 3 253 Printing Screen Copy aeai issues gus ehe t RR REOR P RR OR 3 254 Creating a File kA Mies Ret RD o OE ES 3 255 Appendix A Menu Tree A 1 Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping B 1 Appendix C Digit
111. the analyzer screen to an attached printer Save screen to file Opens the Save menu to save a bitmap file For file operations refer to page 3 229 Background color Selects the background color for printing m Black Prints the background of screen in black m White Reverses the background of screen to white Printer Selects a destination printer 3 253 Screen Copy Printing a Screen Copy Connecting a Printer Installing Printer Driver 3 254 Print You must connect the USB printer to the analyzer and install the printer driver before you can print Connect the USB cable of the printer to the USB port on the side panel of the analyzer You can use either of two ports Refer to Side Panel Interface on page 2 6 for connecting the USB devices If the analyzer is connected to a network through a LAN interface you can also use a network printer Install the printer driver using the Windows XP printer wizard Refer to the printer manual for the installation method Refer to page 2 28 for using Windows XP To print a copy of the analyzer screen follow these steps 1 Press the PRINT key on the front panel and select Black or White as the background color with the Background color side key 2 Display the measurement to be printed and stop data acquisition 3 Press the PRINT key again The screen image data is captured on the internal memory with the background color set in step 1 4 Press the Printer
112. the first pulse in the analysis range The value is displayed in the Frequency Offset side key User Sets the correction value using the Frequency Offset side key described below m Off Default Disables the frequency correction Frequency Offset Sets the frequency correction value when you select User in Frequency Recovery described above The measurement waveform is displayed in the subview with the yellow lines bold lines in Figure 3 73 on page 3 102 indicating the measurement points Also the pulse detection threshold MEAS SETUP Detection Threshold is shown with the green arrow These guidelines can be turned on or off by VIEW DEFINE Guidelines 3 101 Time Analysis Time Mode detection threshold MEAS SETUP Detection Threshold On Off ratio 1 On Off Ratio mW 100 Jw 19 400234 ms 19 377578 ms Duty cycle 17 025625 ms 17 048281 ms OBW 0 dBm Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz 100 uw Pulse width 19 393594 ms 19 400234 ms Pulse ripple 1 mW 100 zo 0 dBm 19 400234 ms 19 393594 ms Pulse pulse phase Pulse Pulse Phase 17 048281 ms EBW Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz Figure 3 73 Waveform display in the subview 3 102 Peak power 19 400234 ms 19 393594 ms Repetition interval 1 Repetition Interval mW 17 048281
113. the maximum value red in the default state Color Stop Sets the maximum value top of the color axis Full Scale Sets the maximum value of the color axis to the reference level and the height to 100 dB The following menu items appear when the overview is a spectrogram in the Demod modulation analysis and the Time time analysis modes Step to Spectrum Window Vertical Start is automatically set so that the frame displayed as a spectrum in the subview appears on the spectrogram Step to Analysis Window Vertical Start is automatically set so that the frame analyzed and displayed in the main view appears on the spectrogram Step to Trigger Vertical Start is automatically set so that the frame at the trigger position appears on the spectrogram 3 187 Setting Views A 207 Color Stop Vertical Size Color Scale 100 dem 0 Vertical Start Center 800 MHz Y Span 10 kHz i Horizontal Start Figure 3 129 Scale and format settings in spectrogram view 3 188 Horizontal Scale gt RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views Time Domain View Setting View Scale Menu RSA3408A User Manual The time domain view includes the following displays shown on the overview or the main view in the Demod and the Time modes W Power versus Time AM demodulation display modulation factor versus time m FM demodulation display frequency deviation versus tim
114. the measurement waveform NOTE You should set appropriate frequency and span It is important to set frequency and span as close to the measurement signal band as possible and finely adjust them The modulated signal will not be recognized unless frequency and span are set appropriately For details on setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 a Setthe frequency by pressing the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel b Setthe span by pressing the SPAN key on the front panel Set the amplitude by pressing the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel 4 Setthe analysis range by pressing the TIMING key on the front panel Refer to page 3 30 for details about setting analysis range The following pages show the examples for each measurement item Refer to page 3 183 for information about setting scale and formatting each view Refer to page 3 34 for information about changing the overview RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode IQ versus Time Observes I and signal level over time Figure 3 63 shows an example The Measurement main view displays I O voltage versus time I and are indicated in yellow and green respectively Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum aS Se Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 64 rhs Cancel Back Span 200 kHz Input Att 20 dB IQ versus Time MNO Powe
115. the rear panels For the connector specifications refer to the RSA3408A Technical Reference NK Figure 2 1 Front panel 2 2 RSA3408A User Manual Interface Maps Front PanelInterface 1 Display LCD Liquid Crystal Display Size 21 3 cm 8 4 inch Resolution 800 x 600 dots Color 256 colors maximum 2 Side Keys Select menu items associated with menu keys 3 Menu keys Select menus Refer to page 2 15 for details Refer to page 2 18 for menu operations 4 Keypad Enters alphanumeric characters Refer to page 2 19 for entering a numeric value and page 3 238 for entering a file name 5 RF input connector Connects an input signal Type N type connector Input impedance 50 Maximum capacity of non breakdown input 30 dBm CAUTION Do not apply a signal of more than 30dBm to do so may damage the instrument 6 Preamplifier power source Provides power source for a preamplifier optional accessory Refer to the RSA3408A Technical Reference for specifications 7 General purpose knob Changes a setting 8 Up Down keys Increases or decreases a value Refer to page 2 20 for changing a setting using the general purpose knob or the up down keys 9 Power switch ON STANDBY Refer to page 1 10 for applying power 10 LED Green on operating orange on standby
116. to complete the process 1 25 Calibration Adjusting Display Brightness Adjust the brightness of the display according to your environment 1 Press the SYSTEM key on the front panel see Figure 1 21 SYSTEM menu SYSTEM Cancel Back Display Brightness Display Brightness gt 100 Reset All to Factory Defaults Remote Setup Versions and Installed Options or SYSTEM gt Figure 1 21 System menu UTILITY 2 Press the Display Brightness side key 3 Turn the general purpose knob to adjust the brightness The setting range is 0 to 100 Confirming Performance The electrical characteristics described in the RSA3408A Technical Reference can be checked only by our service personnel If you need any service contact your local Tektronix representative 1 26 RSA3408A User Manual Operating Basics REE GENUINE Interface Maps This section describes the controls connectors and display Controls and connectors m Front panel m Rear panel m Side panel W Using a mouse and keyboard m Display screen m Elements of the display Status display m Front panel key lock Setup display For using the removable hard disk drive Option 06 refer to Appendix D RSA3408A User Manual 2 1 Interface Maps Controls and Connectors Figures 2 1 through 2 3 on the following pages show the controls and connec tors on the front the side and
117. to each pixel m Max Displays the maximum value of data corresponding to each pixel Min Displays the minimum value of data corresponding to each pixel The analyzer performs RMS detection using the linear A D converter regardless of the Display Detection setting Refer to page 3 180 for details on compression of waveform display data RSA3408A User Manual 3 175 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Demod and Time Modes Load Trace Loads trace data from a file Save Trace Saves trace data to a file Refer to File Operations on page 3 229 for details on saving loading data to from a file The Trace Avg menu has the following controls in the Demod and Time modes Average Determines whether to perform averaging m Turn averaging on Off Turn averaging off NOTE For Demod and Time modes data is always acquired without averaging Average Count Specifies the number of measurements to combine Setting range 1 to 10000 default 20 Average Term Control Specifies the action when more than Average Count measurement results are generated m Expo Continues the average with an exponential weighting applied to old values m Repeat Clears average data and counter and restarts the average process Displaying Trace 1 and 2 3 176 Only Trace 1 yellow is displayed by default Use the following steps to select Trace 1 and 2 1 Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel 2 Press the
118. to put the marker on it 3 25 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 26 7 Press the MARKER key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The zoomed area is enclosed in a green frame 8 When you shift the zoomed area to the left or right on the frequency axis perform these steps a Select MARKER SETUP Marker X Position and set the new frequency center to put the marker on it Mouse Move the mouse pointer to the new frequency center and then left click to put the marker on it b Select MARKER Center Zoom Marker Freq The zoomed area shifts to the specified frequency Zoomed area shifted by Reference cursor Zoomed area Center Zoom Marker Freq Marker Marker on frequency center Figure 3 24 Zoomed area settings using the marker NOTE The zoomed spectrum is calculated based on time domain data acquired with a higher sampling rate than for obtaining a normal spectrum So a large zoom ratio may cause the skirt shape of the spectrum to differ from that of the spectrum without zoom However it does not affect carrier power measurement results RSA3408A User Manual ae Modulation Analysis Demod Mode This section describes how to perform measurements in the modulation analysis Demod mode MODE _ e SA DEMOD Analog Demod AM Demod Le Digital Demod
119. uncalibrated is displayed during operation Allow the analyzer to warm up for 20 minutes before you begin the calibration The warm up period allows electrical performance of the analyzer to stabilize During normal operation when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C from the temperature at the last calibration UNCAL is displayed in the yellow box at the top of the screen see Figure 1 18 If this happens run the gain calibration When UNCAL is displayed run the gain calibration UNCAL FREE RUN Frequency pan Input Att Figure 1 18 UNCAL display To run the gain calibration do the following 1 Press the CAL key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate Gain side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process 1 23 Calibration Calibrating Center Offset When you display a spectrum and no input signal is present a spurious emission at the center frequency may appear regardless of frequency settings The center offset calibration cancels those spurious emissions If the spurious emission is too obvious when you narrow the span run the calibration NOTE Option 03 only When you input I and Q signals from the rear panel connectors set the IQ input signal level to zero externally When the spurious emission appears at the center of the screen with no input signal run the center offset calibratio
120. uses 1024 FFT sample points by default for the upper and lower side bands to obtain a C N versus offset frequency graph You can change the number of FFT sample points in RBW FFT FFT Points for C N FFT Points for C N Sets the number of FFT sample points for the C N versus offset frequency measurement Setting range 64 to 65536 21 default 1024 The more points the higher the resolution The fewer points the faster the measurement Figure 3 78 shows an example of the real time phase noise measurement The subview displays the noisogram Color axis C N in dBc Hz Horizontal axis Frequency in Hz Vertical axis Time in frame number selected in VIEW DEFINE Subview Content The main view is the same as in the phase noise measurement see Figure 3 75 on page 3 107 except that this main view is real time RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Overview Power versus Time _ Subview Noisogram Use VIEW DEFINE Subview Content to select the display Tekironix RSA 3408A Carrier Threshold Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 400 us Span 10 MHz Input Att 10 dB Marker 3 716582031 ms Marker 100kHz 9 631 dBm 55 816 dBc Hz r1 3 716582031 ms 38 dBm 40 10 dB qus 0 Timing Start 9 992617 ms Scale 1 ms Start 100kHz End 18MHz A2 R Oz 144 184 dB 10 Bo fe C N versus Offset frequency Measurement results Carrier frequ
121. value entry keypad 2 36 Figure 2 33 Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 36 MHz 2 37 Figure 2 34 Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 20 kHz 2 38 Figure 2 35 Setting amplitude 2 39 Figure 2 36 Menu items for numeric value input 2 40 Figure 2 37 Reference level of 10 dBm 2 40 Figure 2 38 Status indicator 2 41 Figure 2 39 Measurement with a single marker 2 43 Figure 2 40 Measurement with the delta marker 2 44 Figure 2 41 Searching for the peak 2 46 Figure 2 42 Averaging a waveform 2 48 Figure 2 43 Comparison display with averaged waveform 2 49 Figure 2 44 Concurrent display of spectrum and spectrogram 2 50 Figure 2 45 Tall display of spectrum and spectrogram 2 51 Figure 2 46 Spectrogram view 2 52 Figure 2 47 Channel power measurement 2 54 Figure 2 48 Channel power measurement Channel Bandwidth SAO KH cosas QUI M ERE APER AS P EON Cc PCIe RERO 2 55 Figure 2 49 Carrier frequency measurement 2 56 Figure 2 50 MODE keys 2 57 vi RSA3408A User Manual Table of Contents RSA3408A User Manual Figure 2 51 AM signal measurement Figure 2 52 Analysis range setting
122. 3 Standard menu in the S A mode 3 1 Measurement items in the S A mode 3 4 Features of the real time mode 3 21 Span setting range 3 21 Standard menu in the Demod mode 3 28 Communication standard and parameters 3 45 Modulation type and available measurement item 3 45 Measurement items for RFID analysis 3 62 Standard settings 3 69 Details of the RF envelope measurement table 3 76 Symbol value definition 3 80 Measurement result display items 3 80 Signal source measurement items 3 103 Phase noise measurement frequency band 3 108 Bin width for each decade 3 108 The number of waveform points 3 109 Frequency and span setting range 3 124 Reference level setting range 3 128 Vertical scale setting range 3 130 How to acquire a waveform 3 149 Trigger level setting range 3 151 Characteristics and usage of FFT windows 3 168 FFT window and bandpass filter 3 170 Averaging method 3 175 Number of bins ccc cece cee c ence eee eeee 3 180 Front panel keys for online help 3 225
123. 3 106 is an area created on the graticule of the spectrum view subview in the Demod and Time modes The trigger occurs when the input signal exits or enters the area Real Time S A mode NER co ee Trigger mask Eum Eel Center 1 5 GHz Span 10 MHz Marker 1 5 GHz 33 369 dBm 400 us 5 frame Center 1 5 GHz Demod and Time modes upper screen 0 dem dem E B 1 dB Trigger mask 100 E 100 Timing T dem Start 1 04 ms Scale 104 us Center 1 5 GHz Span 10 Figure 3 106 Trigger mask RSA3408A User Manual 3 155 Trigger Mask Creation Menu 3 156 Use the TRIG Define Mask menu and the marker to create the mask Select Next Point Selects the marker to control The active marker is displayed in red Set Selected Point X Sets the horizontal position of the active marker Set Selected Point Y Sets the vertical position of the active marker Delete Selected Point Deletes the point at the active marker position Insert New Point Inserts the new point halfway between the active marker and the next marker on the right side Set Points to Maximum Fills the area below the maximum line the reference level See Figure 3 107 Set Points to Minimum Fills the area below the minimum line the level lower than the reference level by 60 dB See Figure 3 107 Reset Mask to Default Displays the default
124. 5 Digital modulation analysis 3 44 basic procedure 3 49 symbol mapping B 1 Display dead pixel 1 19 Display line 3 203 multi display lines Real Time S A only 3 207 operation 3 204 Documentation list xviii PDF xviii E EBW measurement 3 14 Ethernet connector side panel 2 6 EVM measurement 3 51 view setting 3 193 Extended Res 3 165 Eye diagram analysis 3 55 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 79 setting 3 196 F Features 1 1 FFT description 3 163 Extended Res 3 165 menu 3 164 overlap 3 166 points 3 167 window 3 168 File data file format 3 241 entering a name 3 238 format 3 241 loading 3 232 operation 3 229 saving 3 232 trace file format 3 249 type 3 229 Floppy disk drive side panel 2 6 using 3 232 FM signal measurement 3 40 Frame relation between frame bin and pixel 3 180 Free Run trigger mode 3 149 Frequency menu 3 120 setting 3 119 Index 2 Frequency versus Time measurement 3 87 Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 117 FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3 120 FSK Modulation Type 3 45 note for measurements 3 49 Functional check 1 14 G Gain calibration 1 23 General purpose knob 2 3 GPIB rear panel connector 2 5 H Hard copy screen 3 253 Help menu 3 223 How to adjust center offset 1 24 DC offset 1 25 display brightness 1 26 gain 1 23 IF flatness 1 25 How to create amplitude correction files 3 135 directory 3 240 files 3 255 trigger mask
125. 59 Table 3 10 Details of the RF envelope measurement table Item Index On width Off width Period Duty On ripple Off ripple Slope 1 2 and 3 Description Envelope Select by VIEW DEFINE Envelope Pulse width for pulse on or off Period On width Off width Duty cycle On width Period Ripple of on time or off time Rise Fall time of slope 1 2 and 3 Slope 3 is Slope 1 of the envelope on the right RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RF envelope of the selected burst Slope number 1 2 3 Burst number Envelope 0 selected by VIEW DEFINE Burst 12 3 A 4 Envelope 1 M A WW Overview Envelope 2 The envelope selected by VIEW DEFINE Envelope is displayed in the main view Voltage On ripple 100 Higher Threshold 5 99 9e 22 Dace mese seme memes ss One Sa mes On width Off width 5096 3 Period Lower Threshold Q 0 Off ripple On time gt Off time gt Time Slope 1 Slope 2 Slope 3 rise time fall time rise time Duty cycle On width Period Figure 3 59 RF envelope measurement parameters You can save the measurement table to a file csv by SAVE Save Table For file operations refer to
126. 8 9 25 dB 0 001 96 9 72 dB 0 0001 96 9 74 cB D Start 0 dB Scale 2dB Stop 13dB CCDF CCDF Main view CCDF Figure 3 68 CCDF multi view 3 92 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Pulse Measurements Measurement Items RSA3408A User Manual This section describes how to perform the pulse measurements Select TIME Pulse Measurements Pulse Characteristics to measure various pulse characteristics The following lists shows the measurement items Measure menu for pulse characteristics and their definitions see Figure 3 69 m Pulse Width Measures the time from rising edge to falling edge at the level of 3 dB 5096 of the mean power for the pulse on m Peak Power Measures the maximum power during the pulse on m On Off Ratio Measures the ratio of the mean power during the pulse on to that during the pulse off time Pulse Ripple Measures the difference between the maximum and the minimum power during the pulse on m Repetition Interval Measures the time from a pulse rising edge to the next pulse rising edge m Duty Cycle Measures the ratio of the pulse width to the repetition interval m Pulse Pulse Phase Measures the phase difference between the first pulse and the selected pulse in the analysis window Channel Power Measures the channel power for the pulse on spectrum OBW Measures the OBW Occupied Bandwidth for the pulse on spectrum m EBW Measures the EBW Emissi
127. 9 m Vector Displays yellow lines between the dots default m Dot Displays the calculated result as a series of red dots By default the measurement results are displayed with the horizontal and vertical axes scaled automatically to fit the graph to the screen Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis to expand the graph horizontally Range The initial minimum value left edge to the maximum value right edge Vertical Scale Sets the vertical full scale value to expand the graph vertically Range The initial maximum value x 0 05 to the maximum value Vector display Dot display 150 150 deg deg 150 150 deg deg 25 dBm 5 dBm 55 dBm 5 dBm Horizontal Start Figure 3 139 Vector and dot displays for AM PM view 3 199 Setting Views PDF View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu Vertical Stop Vertical Scale S 3 200 This view is displayed in the PDF Probability Distribution Function measure ment in the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 60 The horizontal axis represents power level relative to the mean value at the center and the vertical axis represents occurrence probability The Scale menu for the PDF view contains the following controls see Figure 3 140 Auto Scale Sets the starting value and the scale of the vertical axis automatical ly to fit the waveform to the screen
128. 9 output data bit 13 LVDS 20 output data bit 14 LVDS T 21 output data bit 15 LVDS T C 2 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix C Digital IO Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 RSA3408A User Manual Table C 1 OUTPUT connector pin assignment Cont Pin number Signal name Description 22 GND Ground 47 GND 23 GND 48 GND 24 EXT IQ DAV Not used 49 EXT IQ DAV 25 EXT IQ CLK IQ output clock LVDS 50 EXT IQ CLK Table C 2 Q OUTPUT connector pin assignment Pin number Signal name Description 1 IQ ENABLE 10 output enable signal input Open IQ output disable Connect to GND IQ output enable 26 GND Ground 2 GND Ground 27 GND 3 Q output data bit 0 LVDS a 4 Q output data bit 1 LVDS 5 Q output data bit 2 LVDS T 6 Q output data bit 3 LVDS I 7 GND Ground 2 8 Q output data bit 4 LVDS 5 9 Q output data bit 5 LVDS C 3 Appendix C Digital IO Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Table C 2 Q OUTPUT connector pin assignment Cont Pin number Signal name Description 10 EXT Q6 Q output data bit 6 LVDS s 11 Q output data bit 7 LVDS 12 GND Ground 37 GND 13 Q output data bit 8 LVDS 14 Q output data bit 9 LVDS 15 Q output data bit 10 LVDS 16 Q output data bit 11 LVDS 17 Ground 18 Q output data bit 12 LVDS 19 Q output data bit 13 LVDS 20 Q output data bit 14
129. A3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Changing Display Style RSA3408A User Manual You can change display style as required 1 Press the VIEW DEFINE key 2 Press the View Orientation side key to select the view style Wide or Tall Wide display Tall display Displays spectrum and spectrogram Display spectrum and spectrogram in line split display side by side Figure 3 18 View orientation 3 When you display either spectrum or spectrogram only on full screen press the VIEW SELECT key to select the view The selected view is surrounded by a light blue frame 4 Press the Show Views side key and select Single as shown in Figure 3 19 Single display Displays the selected view on one screen Vieni Figure 3 19 Single display Refer to Setting Views on page 3 183 for details Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Real Time Analysis When you select S A Real Time S A or Real Time S A with Zoom the analyzer performs the real time analysis displaying the spectrogram Refer to Spectrogram Display on page 3 18 for the display Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 24 for the zoom NOTE The TRACE AVG menu is not available in the real time mode The Real Time S A mode has FFT overlap capability Refer to FFT and RBW on page 3 163 for detail Features of the Real Time input waveform is acquired in blocks where a block is defined as a number Mode of fra
130. A3408A User Manual The definition of next can be set in the Marker Setup menu using the following parameters Peak Search Freq Threshold S A mode only Sets the minimum frequency jump that will be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down Peak Search Hor Threshold Demod and Time modes only Sets the minimum horizontal jump that will be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down For example when Peak Search Freq Threshold is set to 1 kHz the next peak is recognized only if it is 1 kHz or more distant from the first peak see Figure 3 156 Example Peak Search Freq Threshold 1 kHz The marker moves higher in ere to the next signal Not recognized as a peak 1kHz Figure 3 156 Setting the minimum frequency jump Use the following steps to set the minimum jump 1 Press the MAKER SETUP key on the front panel 2 Press the Go to page 2 of 2 bottom side key to show the next menu page 3 Press either of the following side keys depending on the measurement mode and then set the minimum jump W Peak Search Freq Threshold in the S A mode Peak Search Hor Threshold in the Demod and Time modes 3 221 Marker Operation and Peak Search 3 222 RSA3408A User Manual DESEE Using the Online Help This section describes the analyzer help system and how to access it The online help system is integrated as part of the analyzer user interfac
131. ACPR Main Channel Bandwidth Counter Resolution Adjacent Channel Bandwidth Power Ratio for the OBW dB Chan Spacing Power Ratio for the OBW Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Amplitude Offset Rolloff Ratio Root Nyquist Bandwidth Ch Power Scroll Table Spurious gt Same as Spurious in the S A mode Power On Down 7 gt Analyze RF Envelope Standard Type 18000 4 1 18000 6 18000 6 B 18000 6 C 14443 2 A 14443 2 B Constellation Link F 13 56MHz C0G1 C1G1 Manual Eye Diagram Modulation Symbol Table Decoding Format Interrogator Tag Measurement Off Auto Bit Rate Bit Rate ASK DSB ASK SSB ASK PR ASK OOK Subcarrier OOK Subcarrier BPSK Tari Settling Error Width Manchester Miller Miller M 2 M 4 or M 8 Modified Miller Lower Threshold PIE Type A or C NRZ NRZ L 2 4 or 8 periods PWM Bit Cell Higher Threshold Interpolation Points Off RSA3408A User Manual 7 Appendix A Menu Tree Time Mode MEAS MEASURE d Transient IQ versus Time Power versus Time Frequency versus Time Measurement Off CCDF CCDF gt Display Gaussian Line Off On Display Reference Line Off O
132. ACPR measurement RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode C N Measurement RSA3408A User Manual Measures Carrier to Noise ratio C N Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the C N measurement contains the following controls see Figure 3 8 Offset Frequency Sets the offset frequency from carrier to noise Range Span 2 to Span 2 Noise Bandwidth Sets the noise bandwidth Carrier Bandwidth Sets the carrier bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Selects a filter shape from these types m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Enters rolloff ratio when Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter is selected Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 Carrier Bandwidth Noise Bandwidth Figure 3 8 C N measurement band power markers 3 9 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Figure 3 9 shows an example of the C N measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 0 5 MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Offset Input Att 20 cB Trace 2 Off Hz E m 0 dBm Bandwidth Hz 2k Noise Bandwidth Hz 2k Measurement Filter Shape 40 Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 0 5 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz C N 74 25 dB Offset Frequency 6 kHz Noise Bandwidth 2 kHz C No 107 26 dB Hz Carrier Bandwidth 2 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Carrier to Noise Rat
133. B C gt 8 m CAPS LOCK key toggles a character between uppercase and lowercase BKSP backspace key deletes the character just before the cursor ENTER NEXT key accepts the input character Alphanumeric keys Select a character ABC DEF S UNLOCK 7 8 9 GHz Backspace key Deletes a character just before the cursor GHI JKL MNO ms 4 5 6 MHz PQRS TUV WXYZ ps lt These keys not available for entering a file name 1 2 3 kHz amp CAPSLOCK ns dBm NEXT 0 pat Hz ENEP Enter Next key Accepts the input character CAPS LOCK key and are not available Figure 3 167 Alphanumeric keypad 3 238 RSA3408A User Manual File Operations Procedure RSA3408A User Manual To enter a new name SAMPLE1 use the following steps 1 Press the Filename side key The cursor appears on the left end in the text box Filename Press PQRS key on the keypad four times to enter S Filename S Press the ABC key on the keypad once to enter Filename SAI Press the MNO key on the keypad once to enter Filename SAMI Enter the remaining characters in the same way Filename SAMPLE1 If you make a mistake you can correct it any time before pressing the Enter side
134. CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 FL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 RL CDMA2000 IMT2000 FL CDMA2000 IMT2000 RL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND FL 2000 JTACS BAND RL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS FL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS RL CDMA2000 N A 700MHz Cellular FL CDMA2000 N A 700MHz Cellular RL CDMA2000 N A Cellular FL CDMA2000 N A Cellular RL CDMA2000 N A PCS FL CDMA2000 PCS RL CDMA2000 NMT450 20k FL CDMA2000 NMT450 20k RL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k FL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k RL CDMA2000 SMR800 FL CDMA2000 SMR800 RL CDMA2000 TACS BAND FL CDMA2000 TACS BAND RL DCS1800 DL DCS1800 UL GSM850 DL GSM850 UL GSM900 DL GSM900 UL IEEE802 11a IEEE802 11b g NMT450 DL NMT450 UL PCS1900 DL PCS1900 UL TD SCDMA W CDMA DL W CDMA UL Auto RfAtt Mixer dBm dBuV V uV W Amplitude Offset Frequency Offset Amplitude Table Off On Edit Table 34 Interpolation Select Point To Edit Load Table Frequency Save Table Amplitude Delete Point Add New Point Done Editing Table Clear Table Freq Interpolation Ampl Interpolation RSA3408A User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree RUN STOP TRIG Repeat Continuous Single REW RBW FFT Auto Man FFT p RBW FFT Man TRACEI RBW _ AVG RBW Filter Shape Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist EE Extended Res 34
135. DE key AMPLITUDE REW TRACE TIMING js MEAS MEASURE The Amplitude menu is displayed on the right side of the screen Notice that the Ref Level item is available for entering amplitude see Figure 2 36 RSA3408A User Manual 2 39 Tutorial 0 dBm reference line 2 40 A Ref Level lt Indicates that the general purpose knob is available dBm v XXX Numeric value input field Figure 2 36 Menu items for numeric value input Observe the changes in the waveform as you turn the general purpose knob As you turn the knob to the right the amplitude increases and the waveform shifts to a relatively lower position As you turn the knob to the left the amplitude decreases and the waveform shifts to a relatively higher position In Figure 2 37 the amplitude is set to 10 dBm When the amplitude is set to 0 dBm or higher a blue standard line is displayed indicating 0 dBm 3 Setthe Ref Level back to 0 dBm after confirming the amplitude operation Tektronix RSA 3408A AMPLITUDE Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level E Input Att 25 dB Trace 2 Off dBm E 10 10 dBm Auto Level gt RF Atten Mixer Auto RFAtt Mixer RF Att dB 30 10 Mixer Level dB dBm Nominal 25 Vertical Scale dB div A n Center 100 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off R
136. EES FE Vo e xvii About This Manual 0 0 eee eect ee een tenes xvii Related Documents neea hen erben e ute eet e os a t e eer fet xviii CONVENTIONS edi ien Rath ed Cer e len dune ed e eb erg xix Getting Started Product Overview a eh Rede i wat RR a i 1 1 dci CET 1 1 Application 212 xe e ead UR ate qot GEAR BE OUR t Bo 1 2 Real Time Analysis RH D etd ee ce s 1 3 Architecture a eU rex ue Log eho Bs rer Wale OR RO RR UR ERR Bae RR a 1 6 Installati n iius ep er te TOR ICE DRY No Edda 1 9 Unpacking to Check Contents 1 9 Applying Power os bbs sone esd eee m ere eroe ie m bean eda 1 10 Setting Up the Stand n 1 13 Functional Check eme eee men 1 14 Powering Off the 1 18 Restarting the Analyzer 1 19 Backing Up User Files einek nen eens 1 20 Installing Other Applications 1 20 Calibration MR 1 21 Gal Ment eon oes i Soho fad aet Rott da D aei a cule ea lE EA REL ES 1 22 Calibrating iuo ze ULES Ri te ne aed Bada ee Ta els 1 23 Calibrating Center Offset aka RE RR eds 1 24 Calibrating DC RE elt Bad e 1 25 Calibrating IP Flatness 225 epic eR RR RR RE ed
137. ENT FREQUENCY Sets frequency or channel Setting Frequency and Span CHANNEL page 3 119 SPAN AMPLITUDE Sets amplitude Setting Amplitude page 3 127 TIMING Sets timing parameters Setting Timing Parameters page 3 141 RUN STOP Start or stop data acquisition Starting Stopping Data Acquisition page 2 24 TRIG Controls trigger Trigger page 3 147 RBW FFT Sets RBW and FFT parameters FFT and RBW page 3 163 TRACE AVG Controls trace display and average function Trace Comparison Display and Average Function page 3 173 2 16 RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Table 2 4 Menu key summary Cont MEASUREMENT Spectrum Analysis S A Mode page 3 1 DISPLAY MODE uu e Time Analysis Time Mode DISPLAY VIEW Setting Views page 3 183 Display Line page 3 209 DISPLAY MARKERS AY4 erias 1 UTILITY Using Online Help page 3 223 Selecting Input Source page 3 227 on Caaeseamper Calbraton page 1 21 SYSTEM Controls system parameters Setting System Parameters page 2 25 PRESET Returns settings to the factory defaults Restoring Default Settings page 2 24 File Operations Screen Copy page 3 253 For installing macros contact your local Tektronix sales office RSA3408A User Manual 2 17 Functional Overview Menu Operations This section describes basic operations of the analyzer menus and how to select menu items and input numeric values Menu Item Information to nine soft
138. Error Magnitude 0 274 96 Carrier Frequency Offset 21 12 Hz Deviation 1 308 kHz Length 1227 symbols 5 966 5 966 Figure 3 40 Constellation analysis RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode EVM Measurement Main view x Measurement results left EVM right RSA3408A User Manual Measures EVM Error Vector Magnitude Figure 3 41 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the EVM versus time graph For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 45 For setting views refer to page 3 183 Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum Cancel Back _ Frequency 800 MHz Acquisition Length 12 3 ms Span 100 kHz Input Att 20 dB 0 0 WETTER DSTI 10 dB di ke bm Timing 00 Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz EVM 05 RMS 1 32 96 Peak sym 155 100 Mag Err 0 22 9eRIVIS 96 0 57 96 Peak sym 10 PhaseErr 0 26 deg 0 74 Peak sym 165 10 Rho 0 9999 Length 201 symbols FreqErr 45 446 Hz Origin Offset 46 dB 96 Start 11 12195 me Scale O63 125 1 ied Digital Del hod Evm S OE EVM Measurement results from the top EVM RMS Peak Magnitude error RMS Peak Phase error RMS Peak Waveform quality Symbol length Frequency error Origin offset Figure 3 41 EVM measurement Parame
139. FFT frame by the number of samples from the previous frame see Figure 3 118 Range 1 to 1024 samples in increments of 2 FFT Overlap Displays the amount of overlap between frames used to calculate consecutive FFTs see Figure 3 118 Not settable The sum of FFT Overlap and FFT Start Point is always 1024 FFT Window Selects the FFT window window function For the window type refer to Table 3 23 on page 3 170 The default is Blackman Harris 4B Time domain data Time Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 e e e Ps FFT FFT Start Point Overlap lt 1024 points Figure 3 118 FFT overlap RSA3408A User Manual FFT and RBW FFT Points Limit on the FFT Points RSA3408A User Manual The number of FFT points is normally set automatically by the RBW setting The value is basically 1024 It can be set in powers of 2 from 64 to 8192 This value is the number of points in one physical frame in the time and frequency domains If the number of points is reduced the frame period is shortened and more spectrum variations can be observed in the spectrogram view If the number of the points is increased S N ratio and frequency resolution are improved NOTE Setting the number of FFT points greater than the limit 8192 causes the noise floor to go down and occasionally causes spurious signals to appear see Figure 3 119 It cannot be determined whet
140. Figure 3 121 Figure 3 122 Figure 3 123 Figure 3 124 Figure 3 125 Figure 3 126 Figure 3 127 Figure 3 128 Figure 3 129 Figure 3 130 Figure 3 131 Figure 3 132 Figure 3 133 Figure 3 134 Figure 3 135 Figure 3 136 Figure 3 137 Figure 3 138 Figure 3 139 Figure 3 140 Figure 3 141 Figure 3 142 Figure 3 143 Filling operation for creating a mask 3 156 Example mask 3 157 Default mask eeeeeeeeee nnn 3 158 Changing the position of Point A 3 158 Changing the position of Point B 3 159 Adding Point 3 159 Trigger point 3 161 Synchronous operation of two RSA3408A analyzers 3 162 FFT and RBW process 3 163 RBW FFT menu 3 164 Process flow when RBW FFT FFT 3 165 EFT Overlap ur I y nere 3 166 Generating spurious signals by increasing the number of FFT 3 167 Windowing process of time domain data 3 169 Comparison display of Trace 1 and 2 3 173 RBW FFT menu structure 3 174 Displaying an averaged waveform 3 178 Compared display 3 179 Relationships between frame bin and pixel 3 181 Compression method for displaying the waveform
141. Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Definition of pulse characteristics Definition of pulse on off Setting for View Results For Setting the View Define menu Waveform display in the subview Phase noise measurement parameters Phase noise measurement Spurious measurement Real time phase noise measurement parameters Real time phase noise measurement Settling time displayed in the subview Real time spurious measurement Frequency versus Time measurement parameters Frequency versus Time measurement Setting frequency and span Setting the center frequency using MARKER Relationship between the frequency and span settings Vector mode and scalar mode Amplitude menu structure Setting the amplitude A D overflow indicator
142. Figure 3 77 They depend on the subview content refer to Selecting the Subview Content on page 3 113 Rj Settling Threshold Enabled when Random jitter versus Time is displayed in the subview Sets the threshold value for obtaining the random jitter settling time Setting range 0 to 1 s default 0 s C N Offset Frequency Enabled when C N versus Time is displayed in the subview Sets the value of the frequency displaying the C N versus Time in the subview as the offset from carrier frequency Setting range The upper limit is Span 2 The lower limit is determined by the span and FFT Points for C N refer to Setting the Number of FFT Points on page 3 112 settings C N Settling Threshold Enabled when C N versus Time is displayed in the subview Sets the threshold value for obtaining the phase noise settling time Setting range 200 to 0 dBc Hz default 0 dBc Hz 3 111 Time Analysis Time Mode Random 4 Subview Random Jitter vs Time C N A Subview C N vs Time jitter Settling time Settling time gt gt Rj Settling CIN Settlin g Threshold Threshold gt Time gt Time C N A Rj Start Offset Rj Stop Offset Frequency Random jitter Frequency measurement range lt 3 Main view 3 112 C N Offset Frequency Offset frequency Figure 3 77 Real time phase noise measurement parameters Setting the Number of FFT Points The real time phase noise measurement
143. Freq File Format J Connecting to LAN Connecting USB Devices Using Windows 98 EHE Screen Hardcopy Using the Online Help E Displaying Version and sets the maximum value of the frequency axis Press the SPAN key on the front panel Select the span with the Span side key gt With the general purpose knob the span can be setin the 1 2 5 sequence With the numeric keypad the span can be set arbitrarily within the limits There is a relation of Stop Freq Start Freq RSA3408A User Manual Span The settings of center start and stop zl Figure 3 158 Online user manual 4 exit the help system press the Cancel Back top side key 3 225 Using the Online Help Using a Mouse and Keyboard 3 226 You can control the help system using a mouse and a keyboard instead of the front panel keys Using a mouse click the topic in the contents window to show the description Using a keyboard select a topic or enter a search word see Figure 3 159 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and the enter key to accept the selection Refer to Side Panel Interface on page 2 6 on connecting a USB mouse and keyboard to the analyzer Locate Back Refresh Print Contents Search Type in the word s to search for Enter a search word marrer with the keyboard List Topics Select topic Tte Location
144. Freq Step Same As C F Sets the center frequency step size equal to the center frequency Center Freq Step Same As Span Sets the center frequency step size equal to the span Step Size Sets the step size amount per press by which the up or down key AW changes the setting value for setting frequency SPAN Controls span Span and frequency settings are shown in Figure 3 83 Span Sets span The available range depends on the measurement frequency band and mode as shown in Table 3 17 on page 3 124 Turn the general purpose knob to set span in the specified sequence In the S A mode except real time you can set an arbitrary span within the limit using the numeric keypad Start Freq Same as Start Freq on page 3 120 Stop Freq Same as Stop Freq on page 3 120 lt Span gt Start Freq Center Freq Stop Freq Figure 3 83 Setting frequency and span RSA3408A User Manual 3 121 Setting Frequency and Span Using the Channel Table The channel table contains channel numbers and the corresponding frequencies for a communication system When you use W CDMA standard signals for example you can set a center frequency by selecting a channel number from the W CDMA table 1 Press the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel 2 Press the Channel Table side key and select one of these items 3 122 None selects no channel table You can select one
145. Hz The following pages show examples for each measurement item Refer to page 3 183 for information about setting scale and formatting each view Refer to page 3 34 for information about changing the overview and subview 3 38 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode AM Demod Measurement Main view gt Demodulates and measures an AM signal Figure 3 34 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the modulation factor versus time graph MEASURE Show Measurements is selected in Figure 3 34 The modulation factor is defined by the following equation modulation factor Am Ao Where Aq Amplitude of the modulation signal Amplitude of the carrier with no modulation 0 modulation Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the AM demod measurement contains the following control Carrier Amplitude Detection Selects how to calculate the amplitude of the carrier with no modulation Ay in the above equation m Average Default Defines Ap as the average amplitude in the analysis range m Median Defines A as the median amplitude maximum minimum 2 in the analysis range Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum de i M M Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 6 4 ms Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Carrier Amplitude Input Att 20 dB Detection Average Median E 4 ANA 5 dB 10 dB 54 Dm e 104 Start
146. Initial screen Figure 1 11 RF INPUT connector Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Setting up the stand Spectrum of the calibration signal 100 MHz about 220 dBm x ve eon XO PARU Rd ate arene e ba Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Setup display secs ce rrr Reference level setting and A D overflow indicator Spectrogram display Calibration menu structure UNCAL display 2 Rr Rm Rr n Center LE eril System menu e Free ess Front panel esse ce exe visite e n einn o n Rear panel le erbe RE erus Side pariel eee Ier ett m yn Connecting USB Operation with mouse and keyboard Display screen configuration Status display vocero e emer res Pre and post trigger regions Key lock display cere cere ences Setup display eve cosas gere Iren Figure 2 11 Menu keys Figure 2 12 Example menu item display 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 10 1 11 1 11
147. LVDS T 21 Q output data bit 15 LVDS T 22 GND Ground 47 GND 23 GND 48 GND 24 N Not used Z A c z e Z C 4 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix C Digital IO Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Setup time Hold time 5ns 5ns at 3 Data s Clock EXT_IQ_CLK Figure C 2 Definition of the setup and hold time RSA3408A User Manual C 5 Appendix C Digital IO Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 C 6 RSA3408A User Manual T a E Se eee Appendix D Using the Removable Hard Disk Drive Option 06 Option 06 provides a removable hard disk drive All user storable information including acquired signal data instrument settings screen images and calibra tion data are stored on the removable hard disk drive Remove the hard drive for storage or security Once the drive is removed from the analyzer no user data remains in the instrument Replace the hard drive using the following steps Replacing the Hard Drive CAUTION Turn off the analyzer before you replace the removable hard drive Use the steps in Figure D 1 on page D 2 to detach the removable hard drive To attach the hard drive reverse these steps Using the USB Memory RSA3408A User Manual Option 06 also supplies a USB memory stick that includes the analyzer name serial number a copy of the factory calibration data and other information Follow these instructions for using the
148. Manual Trigger Level Sets the trigger level Available when the trigger mode is set to Triggered and the source is set to Power or External Table 3 21 shows the setting range Table 3 21 Trigger level setting range Trigger source Trigger level Power Span BW 40 to 0 dBfs in 1 dBfs steps in time domain External 1 5 to 41 5 V in 0 1 V steps Hint for the Power trigger An input signal is FFT processed every frame 1024 points However the displayed data is less than 1024 points refer to Relation between Frame Bin and Pixel on page 3 180 For example 801 bins are displayed when the span is 1 MHz The Power trigger always observes one whole frame 1024 points to determine trigger generation Note that as shown in Figure 3 103 any signal exceeding the trigger level outside the range of 1 MHz of span activates the Power trigger even if no signal exceeds the trigger level within the range of 1 MHz of span I 1 MHz span 801 bins Trigger level I One frame 1024 points Power trigger detection range Figure 3 103 Power trigger detection range Define Mask Option 02 only Creates a trigger mask when the trigger mode is set to Triggered and the source is set to Freq Mask The trigger mask is created in the spectrum view Refer to page 3 155 for details on creating a trigger mask RSA3408A User Manual 3 151
149. NE key on the front panel 2 Press the Overview Content side key and select the overview m Waveform Amplitude versus Time default display Spectrogram The overview displays all data in one acquisition block RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Overview Spectrogram Tektronix RSA 3408A In the RFID analysis Option 21 refer to page 3 61 you can also select Zoom spectrogram with zoom function for the overview 3 Digital modulation analysis Option 21 only Press the Subview Content side key and select a view The subview content depends on measurement Refer to each measurement description Subview Eye diagram VIEW DEFINE VIEW DEFINE menu Frequency Span Input Att Acquisition Cancel Back Show Views 100 dem 0 frarne Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz FreqErr 51 855 Hz Origin Offset 40 59 dB Scale 31 952 mV Urit Digital Demod Constellation Marker 1 668 75ms Y Single Multi M 4 i5 Overview Content lt Overview Content Spectrogram Selects an overview display Subview Content lt Subview Content Eye Diagram Selects a subview display Os Marker 1 66875 ms 00 2 061 Menu Off Figure 3 32 Changing the overview and subview RSA3408A User Manual 3 35 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode One View Display Three views a
150. NOTE When the modulation type refer to page 3 45 is ASK FSK or GFSK the measurement requires at least 16 symbols in the analysis length refer to page 3 30 for setting the analysis length 5 Set the measurement parameters by pressing the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel Refer to page 3 45 for the Meas Setup menu description If No Measurement Result or Waveform is Displayed on the Main View Unless the analyzer obtains valid data for the measurement neither the result nor waveform appears on the main view In this case try the following steps m Set the center frequency to the middle of the measurement signal bandwidth Set the span near the measurement signal bandwidth m Set the data acquisition length TIMING Acquisition Length larger to increase the amount of data The following pages show examples for each measurement item Refer to page 3 183 for information about setting scale and formatting each view Refer to page 3 34 for information about changing the overview and subview 3 49 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Constellation Measurement Measurement results from the top EVM RMS Peak Magnitude error RMS Peak Phase error RMS Peak Waveform quality Symbol length Frequency error Origin offset IQ feedthrough Scale Parameter Presets Al R 223 59375 us Marker 1 49885625 GHz Off 2 746 dB 88 317 dBm 5 25 Modulation dBm dBm Type 1280 di 10 Modula
151. Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum _ Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 12 ms Cancel Back Span 500 kHz Auto Carrier Input Att 20 dB On Off 4 4 Frequency Error dBm dBm Hz 1 428k 5 Threshold dB 10 dB dB i0 54 Em 104 Timing Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 100 MHz Span 500 kHz Main view gt 400 kHz Measurement results ME Peak Peak 388 544974 kHz From the top Peak Peak 2 194272487 kHz Peak to peak frequency deviation Peak 194313387 kHz 20 Peak to peak frequency deviation 2 Peak 194 231587 kHz kHe Positive peak frequency deviation RMS 136393144 kHz Negative peak frequency deviation p RMS frequency deviation Frequency deviation variation Start 12 8 ms Scale 640 us 3 40 Analog Demod Demod Figure 3 35 FM demod measurement RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode PM Demod Measurement Demodulates and measures PM signal Figure 3 36 shows an example The main view displays the phase error versus time graph Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the PM demod measurement contains the following control Threshold Sets the threshold level above which the input signal is determined to be a burst in time domain The burst detected first is used for the measure ment Range 100 0 to 0 0 dB
152. PRI s Duty 96 550 862 62 4881 6 0161 28 78 A Single Pulse 543 778 56 9381 6 0161 28 78 i c Displayed The measurement result highlighted 44 12 66 5040 6 016 28 78 Measurement in the main view is displayed in the 544 175 5155 70 3921 6 0164 28 78 subview with the waveform 5478391 46 69 60 182u 59394 28 431 poni Time 548 438 4284 59 3441 6 016 28 78 a Adaptive u 5435390 4222 56 879 6 0161 28 78 4 6881 5415381 4423 67 5981 6 0164 28 78 i Y Pulse index Select the displayed items with Displayed Measurement Figure 3 72 Setting the View Define menu You can save the measurement table to a file csv by SAVE Save Table For file operations refer to page 3 229 RSA3408A User Manual 3 99 Time Analysis Time Mode Meas Setup Menu 3 100 The Meas Setup menu for the pulse measurements contains the following controls Analyze Starts analysis on acquired data in the analysis range Detection Threshold Sets the threshold level to detect pulses in acquired data This level is shown with a green arrow in the subview see Figure 3 73 Range 100 to 0 dBc default 3 dBc Channel Bandwidth For the Channel Power measurement only Sets the measurement frequency range Range Bin bandwidth x 8 to set span Refer to Trace Compression on page 3 180 for the bin bandwidth OBW Power Ratio For the OBW
153. Rate or Auto Tari Selects whether to set the bit rate or Tari automati cally Tari is the parameter for the PIE Type A and C decoding formats On Detects the bit rate or Tari automatically based on the Bit Rate or Tari set value m Off Default Sets the bit rate or Tari using the Bit Rate or Tari side key NOTE You must set the bit rate or Tari manually to perform the analysis properly Refer to Setting the Bit Rate Tari on page 3 73 Bit Rate Sets the bit rate Range 1 bps to 51 2 Mbps Refer to Table 3 9 Tari Sets the Tari Range 1 ns to 1 s Refer to Table 3 9 Settling Error Width Sets an error range for determining the settling time See Figure 3 56 Range 1 to 10046 default 596 Lower Threshold Sets a lower threshold value for measuring the rise fall time of the pulse See Figure 3 56 Range 1 to 50 default 10 Higher Threshold Sets a higher threshold value for measuring the rise fall time of the pulse See Figure 3 56 Range 50 to 99 default 9096 3 71 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Overview Power Overshoot Undershoot 4 Higher Threshold Lower Threshold Off level Average level below the lower threshold 3 72 Interpolation Points When the sample rate is lower than the bit rate because the data cannot be analyzed correctly the shortage of the sample rate is calculated and interpolated by the spline method Range 0 to 7 default 0 Zero means no interpol
154. Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist SS Extended Res REIN 1 Off On TRACE RBW FFT FFT Av L FFT Points FFT Window refer to page 3 168 Extended Res 4 Off On Real Time S A FFT Start Point FFT Overlap FFT Window refer to page 3 168 Figure 3 116 RBW FFT menu tree Spectrum Analyzer and RBW FFT menu has the following controls in the Spectrum Analyzer and S A with Spectrogram the S A with Spectrogram modes modes RBW FFT Selects whether to set RBW and FFT parameters automatically or manually W Auto Sets RBW automatically with the span setting The filter shape is set to Gaussian m Man Sets RBW and selects the filter manually with the RBW and RBW Filter Shape side keys m FFT Sets the FFT points and window manually with the FFT Points and FFT Window side keys The result of FFT processing is displayed as is without RBW processing When RBW FFT is set to Man RBW Sets RBW when Man is selected in RBW FFT Range 2 kHz to 2 MHz the default is 80 kHz 3 164 RSA3408A User Manual FFT and RBW RBW Filter Shape Selects the filter from the following four types when RBW FFT is set to Man m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian default m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Enters roll off ratio when RBW Filter Shape is set to Nyquist or Root Nyquist Range 0 0001 to 1 the default is 0 5 Extended Res The FFT point number i
155. Signal Input Port Selects which input is used for signal connection m Default Uses the signal from the INPUT connector on the front panel See Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 for the front panel connectors IQ Option 03 only Uses the signal from the I INPUT and INPUT connectors on the rear panel See Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 for the rear panel connectors NOTE IQ INPUT Option 03 only The IQ input gain of the analyzer is set in 10 dB steps To maximize the dynamic range you may need to adjust the signal level externally or insert attenuators in the I and Q signal paths When you calibrate the IQ offset set the IQ input signal level to zero externally The IQ offset calibration is included in the center offset calibration Refer to Calibrating Center Offset on page 1 24 RSA3408A User Manual 3 227 Selecting Input Source Call100M Uses the internal calibration signal 100 MHz 20 dBm The signal is connected internally Refer to Functional Check on page 1 14 for using the cal signal to check the system performance Cal25M Uses the internal calibration signal 25 MHz 20 dBm The signal is connected internally Reference Source Selects the source for reference frequency Int Uses the internal clock 10 MHz simulated sine wave m Ext Uses the 10 MHz sine wave of 10 to 6 dBm from the REF IN connector on the rear panel when you want to synchronize the analyzer with other instrument s T
156. Time MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL STOP SPAN TRIG RBW AMPLITUDE FFT Repeat Continuous Single Real Time S A Demod and Time modes m Mode Free Run Triggered Repeat Continuous Single Stop and Show Results Mode Triggered Source Power Freq Mask External Option 02 only Save on Trigger On Off Save Count On Off Save Count Limit Source Power External Level Slope Rise Fall Rise and Fall Fall and Rise Position Source Freq Mask Define Mask Slope Position Figure 3 101 Trigger menu structure 3 148 Select Next Point Set Selected Point X Set Selected Point Y Delete Selected Point Insert New Point Set All Points to Maximum Set All Points to Minimum Reset Mask to Default n Out In and Out Out and In RSA3408A User Manual Trigger Mode Selects the trigger mode The trigger mode determines whether to acquire data with or without triggering m Free Run Acquires and displays the waveform without triggering Press the RUN STOP key to start data acquisition To stop the acquisition press the RUN STOP key again m Triggered Set the trigger conditions level slope and position before starting data acquisition by pressing the RUN STOP key When the trigger occurs data is acquired and displayed To stop data acquisition when the
157. Trace compression display 3 173 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Trace Avg Menu Controls the trace display and averaging The menu items vary according to the the measurement mode S A Demod or Time RUN STOP TRIG RBW FFT TRACE AVG _ 1 2 Freeze Off S A mode Select Trace Trace r Normal Average MaxHold MinHold Trace n Type Number Of Averages Trace n Type Average Number Of Traces to Hold Trace n Type MaxHold or MinHold Reset Average Trace n Type Average Reset MaxHold Trace n Type MaxHold Reset MinHold Trace n Type MinHold Display Detection 3 Load Trace n Save Trace n Max Min Max Min L gt Load From File menu Refer to Saving a File on page 3 232 Save To File menu Refer to Loading a File on page 3 236 DEMOD and TIME modes Average Off On Average Count Average Term Control Expo Repeat Figure 3 122 RBW FFT menu structure S A Mode Trace Avg menu has the following controls in the S A mode NOTE The Trace Avg menu is not available in the Real Time S A mode Select Trace Selects the trace to control trace 1 or 2 Trace 1 2 Controls the selected trace On Turns on the selected trace W Freeze Freezes display of the selected trace Off Turns off the selected trace 3 174 RSA3408A User Manual
158. User Manual Tektronix RSA3408A 8 GHz Real Time Spectrum Analyzer 071 1617 03 This document applies to firmware version 3 30 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support North America call 1 800 833 9200 m Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area End User License Agreement for Microsoft Software You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by Tektronix Japan Ltd from Microsoft Licensing Inc or its affiliates 5 Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU
159. Views See Figure 3 135 for EVM Mag Error and Phase Error The figure is an example of the constellation view in 1 4 QPSK modulation The cross marks are referred to as symbols and indicate phase positions of the ideal signal amplitude is fixed in this case In this modulation the bit pattern is determined by movements from each position For example if the actual signal has shifted from the ideal symbol position to the position you can evaluate vector signal quality as magnitudes of error in radius direction amplitude error in phase direction and total error vector These three types of errors correspond to the three types of views in the EVM view m EVM RMS Root mean square value of EVM Error Vector Magnitude m Mag Error RMS Root mean square value of magnitude error Phase Error RMS Root mean square value of phase error Magnitude error Mag Erron Error Vector Magnitude EVM Phase error Phase Error 3 4 movement 10 3 47 movement 11 1 1 47 movement 01 N 1 4 movement 00 Assumed position before movement gt Figure 3 135 Constellation view and error vectors 1 47 QPSK RSA3408A User Manual 3 195 Setting Views Symbol Table Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu Eye Diagram Setting Option 21 Only 3 196 The symbol table shows symbol change with time You can display this table in the symbol table analysis in the digital modulat
160. W Menu rere dines SEE Pale t e CR RE A E Ee 3 184 Basic Procedure ess epe a eee eee Cen alee a 3 185 Spectrum View Setting ee n 3 186 Spectrogram View Setting ssssocisotari era ter ce eee ene ences 3 187 Time Domain View Setting 00 eee eee cee een eee 3 189 CCDE View Setting iue Marek bec peewee is 3 191 Constellation View Setting Option 21 Only 3 192 EVM View Setting Option 21 Only s csre ess cerresisserri ers terrats 3 193 Symbol Table Setting Option 21 Only 3 196 Eye Diagram Setting Option 21 Only 3 196 AM AM View Setting Option 21 Only 3 198 AM PM View Setting Option 21 Only 3 199 PDF View Setting Option 21 Only 3 200 Noisogram View Setting Option 21 Only 3 201 Display Lin sses erenn E 3 203 Display Line Operation Other than Real Time S A 3 204 Multi Display Lines Real Time S A 3 207 Marker Operation and Peak Search 3 211 Markers uu ete S helen ER eR Koma pote 3 212 Using Markers einai Ru CERE E ers ao hun 3 215 Peak Search aie 5i uiae ERREUR QUEE Bok UR te dokn 3 220 Using
161. X the marker readout is displayed dBm Hz Markers Marker 1 Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor to Marker X Enables the reference cursor Reference Cursor Off Reference Cursor Off Turns off the reference cursor Selected Marker Off Marker 2 Step Size 10 dB Marker X MUT B 2 mu oe cursor 15 5625 dem Got 2 Center 100 MHz Span 15 kHz o2 9 Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 998 Figure 3 152 Measurement with the reference cursor RSA3408A User Manual 3 217 Marker Operation and Peak Search As shown in Figure 3 152 the marker readout relative to the reference cursor is shown in the top left portion of the screen for the active marker selected using the Select Marker side key To turn off the reference cursor press the Reference Cursor Off side key Changing the Trace Use the following steps to change the trace on which you operate the marker when displaying two traces on a view Trace 1 is displayed in yellow and Trace 2 in green In the S A spectrum analysis mode two traces are shown when Trace 2 is turned on using the TRACE AVG menu In DEMOD modulation analysis mode and TIME time analysis mode two traces are shown in IO vs Time view I level vs time and O level vs time 1 Press the MAKER SETUP key on the front panel 2 Pr
162. X 016 A330 00 650 A900 XX Glossary Glossary RSA3408A User Manual Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition A series of time contiguous frames This is also called a Block Acquisition Time The length of time contained in one acquisition Amplitude The magnitude of an electrical signal Amplitude Modulation AM The process or result of a process in which the amplitude of a sine wave the carrier is varied in accordance with the instantaneous voltage of a second electrical signal the modulating signal Analysis Time A subset of time contiguous samples from one Block Time used as input to an Analysis View Analysis View Any view which produces measurement results except for Spectrum Power versus Time and Spectrogram ASK Acronym for Amplitude Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the amplitude of the carrier is varied in accordance with the state of a digital input signal Block See Acquisition Calibrator A signal generator producing a specified output used for calibration purposes Carrier Carrier Signal The electrical signal typically a sine wave upon which modulation is impressed Carrier Frequency The frequency of the carrier signal Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Carrier to Noise Ratio C N The ratio of carrier signal power to average noise power in a given band width surrounding the carrier usually expressed in decibe
163. a 1 25 Adjusting Display 1 26 Confirming Performance 1 26 Operating Basics hiterface Maps o ence ee oen cle loca e teen rernm dece e a ola n 2 1 Controls and Connectors 2 2 Display sid eu se edad vene divas euin ats athe 2 9 Functional Overview 2 15 Menu Keys eben adeptes Dea Re ha bey eae 2 15 Ment Operations gi cei ek eR ba RR Eb eee 2 18 Measurement Basics eiecti ad y ves d eee e eee 2 23 Setting System Parameters 2 25 Using Windows XP user ub eoe e eke e ee 2 28 RSA3408A User Manual i Table of Contents Reference Tutorial x oes hes VE ace iw deas OR ee n ea e 2 31 Preparations eter Sa ee RR ds Gace 2 32 Displaying Spectrum ee rn exer RE HE 2 35 Using Markers and Peak 5 2 42 Using Averaging and Comparison 1 1 2 47 Displaying a Spectrogram 2 50 Spectrum Analysis ii aerae ee Pe eek bee e er er Re 2 53 Modulation Analysis lle 2 57 Tuming Off the POWer sula eese a b Recto RR REOR Bots RR a 2 64 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 1 Measurement
164. acent channels Measurement Filter Shape Selects a filter shape from these types m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Enters rolloff ratio when Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter is selected Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 Lower3 Lower2 Lower Main Upper Upper2 Upper3 4 Main Chan Bandwidth gt gt gt gt gt Adj Chan Bandwidth Adj Chan Bandwidth gt e gt e gt lt gt Chan Spacing Figure 3 6 ACPR measurement band power markers RSA3408A User Manual 3 7 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Figure 3 7 shows an example of the ACPR measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Main Channel Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Bandwidth Hz 0 Adjacent Channel dBm Bandwidth Hz p 2k Chan Spacing Hz 2 8k 10 dB Measurement Filter Shape Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 100 dBm Ds Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Main Chan BW 2 kHz Main Chan Power 9 84 dBm Adj Chan BW 2kHz Chan Spacing 2 8 kHz Lowerl ACPR 66 01 dB Upperi ACPR 70 15 dB Lower2 ACPR 75 08 dB Upper2 ACPR 75 66 dB Lower3 ACPR 75 13 dB Upper3 ACPR 75 5 dB Spectrum Analyzer ACPR Main Channel Bandwidth kHz 2 Figure 3 7 Example of
165. age input occurs the status indicator A D OVERFLOW is displayed in the red box see Figure 3 89 CAUTION If a signal exceeding 30 dBm 1 W is applied it can damage the analyzer Be sure to limit input signals to 30 dBm or below When the input signal level is too high A D OVERFLOW is indicated in the red box Tektronix RSA 3408A A D OVERFLOW INPUT CAL AMPLITUDE SS Frequency 50 MHz RBW 50 kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level 2 Input Att 0 dB Trace 2 Off dBm E Figure 3 89 A D overflow indicator NOTE If A D OVERFLOW is displayed it indicates that the A D converter in the subsequent part of the downconverter inside this instrument is overloaded In this case data display is distorted and the measurement is not accurate If a signal larger than the reference level set value by 20 dB or more is applied continuously however the limiter of the IF amplifier in the downconverter is automatically activated to prevent large level signals from passing through the A D converter Even if a signal exceeding the reference level is applied therefore A D OVERFLOW may not be displayed Auto Leveling the signal can usually eliminate all overload conditions Take sufficient care about the input signal level The overflow indicator is updated at every physical frame acquisition When a high level signal is applied u
166. agnostic measurement m Getting answers to elusive EMI problems m VCO synthesizer design m RFID device characterization General purpose digital modulation vector signal analysis Option Spectrum monitoring m Radar measurements Characterization troubleshooting and verification of wireless designs Option GSM EDGE m W CDMA m HSDPA m cdma2000 1 m cdma2000 1xEV DO m TD SCDMA m WLAN 802 11a b g 1 2 RSA3408A User Manual Product Overview Real Time Analysis Conventional Swept Spectrum Analyzer RSA3408A User Manual This section explains real time analysis with the comparison of conventional swept spectrum analyzer and real time spectrum analyzer Figure 1 1 is a block diagram of the conventional swept spectrum analyzer There are two RF input signals in this example The RF signal is converted to IF intermediate frequency by the swept local oscillator IF output goes through a bandpass filter where resolution of the spectrum analyzer is defined lu F Mixer b F Local oscillator Figure 1 1 Concept of the swept spectrum analyzer The filter is swept from Fstart to Fstop See Figure 1 2 Only signals within the filter bandwidth are observed at one point in time Signal A is detected first and then signal B is detected and displayed NOTE An intermittent signal such as a burst phenomenon will not be detected unless it is present at the exact moment that the filter is being swept past it
167. al and then is stored as measurement data and is concurrently demodulated The demodulated signal is modulated again goes through the reference filter and is stored as reference data The Constellation Symbol table and Eye diagram displays are based on measurement data and the EVM AM AM AM PM CCDF and PDF displays are based on the comparison of the measurement data and the reference data RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Basic Procedure RSA3408A User Manual To perform digital modulation analysis follow these steps 1 Press the MODE DEMOD key on the front panel 2 Press the Digital Demod side key and then select the measurement item 3 Display the measurement waveform NOTE You should set appropriate frequency and span It is important to set frequency and span as close to the measurement signal band as possible and finely adjust them The modulated signal will not be recognized unless frequency and span are set appropriately For information about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 a Set the frequency by pressing the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel b Set the span by pressing the SPAN key on the front panel c Set the amplitude by pressing the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel 4 Set analysis range by pressing the TIMING key on the front panel Refer to page 3 30 for details
168. al IQ Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 ten br EE eR UTE C 1 Appendix D Using the Removable Hard Disk Drive Option 06 D 1 Replacing the Hard Drive oso ius eru d urne ug o a D 1 Using the USB Memory nd emnes pud ectetur eu e gir aa D 1 Appendix E Inspection and Cleaning E 1 Inspecting the Exterior isesi icre duen ek ee yeh pr ee ed E 1 Cleaning the Exterior io sudes eR HR RUE RR ERE Ren E 2 Eubricatioti sitarea d URL ERO v oe eg bn aree E 2 Cleaning the Interior usua RR ER RO Ren E 2 Appendix Options and Accessories F 1 Options ck aor S IE F 1 Standard ACCeSSOrIeS ocu e ope uH dpi tete e F 3 Optional Accessories 1 6 0 0 eee n 4 RSA3408A User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures RSA3408A User Manual Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Concept of the swept spectrum analyzer Sweep of resolution filter Concept of the real time spectrum analyzer Concurrent acquisition Frame acquisition Block diagram Figure 1 7 AC Input rear panel Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Principal power switch rear panel Front panel power switch ON STANDBY switch
169. alicom Reference Source Int Ext Span 36 MHz Figure 1 13 Spectrum of the calibration signal 100 MHz about 20 dBm RSA3408A User Manual Installation 3 Check the center frequency and peak amplitude using the marker a Press the PEAK key on the front panel to place the marker on the peak see Figure 1 13 b Check the marker readouts on screen The frequency should be 100 MHz and the amplitude should be approximately 20 dBm c Press the MARKER SETUP key on the front panel and then the Markers side key to select Off Check that the marker disappears 4 Checkthe RBW Resolution Bandwidth while changing the span setting a Press the SPAN key on the front panel b Confirm that the span is 36 MHz and the RBW is 100 kHz in the setup display on the upper part of the screen see Figure 1 14 Span RBW Span setting RSA 3408A 2004 12 07 14 10 0 INPUT CAL ee ees ME Freanandes inc MHZ ABW 80 Cancel Back Setup display Tr a Span 4 io db Trace 2 Off Hz Marker 100 MHz 21 18 dBm 70 21 dBm Hz 0 Start Freq Hz Figure 1 14 Setup display c Using the general purpose knob change the span setting as listed in Table 1 1 and check that the RBW is displayed correctly Table 1 1 Span and RBW Span RBW 36 MHz 100 kHz 15 MHz 80 kHz 5 MHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 500 Hz 1kHz 20 Hz d Using the numeric keypad set the span back t
170. an amplitude correction table from a file Save Table Writes a created correction table to a file RSA3408A User Manual 3 133 Setting Amplitude Amplitude Correction File Correction value 3 134 Before performing amplitude correction you must describe the frequency characteristics of the external device in an amplitude correction file cor You can use word processing software to create the file on a computer and then use a disk or network to load the file into the analyzer Alternatively you can create correction data on the analyzer screen The rules for creating an amplitude correction file are given on page 3 135 and the procedures are given on page 3 136 File Format A correction file contains amplitude correction values at each frequency in the following format Frequency 1 Amplitude correction value 1 Frequency 2 Amplitude correction value 2 Frequency 3 Amplitude correction value 3 Example The following amplitude correction file has correction data for three points Correction data Correction file description 10 dB at 10 MHz 10M 10 5 dB at 100 MHz 100M 5 0 dB at 1 GHz 1G 0 In this example only the data from 10MHz to 1GHz is corrected see Figure 3 91 The correction value in the display range is obtained using linear interpolation between input points A waveform obtained by subtracting the correction value from the input waveform is displayed Displayed waveform
171. analysis Conventions This manual uses the following conventions m Front panel key and control labels are printed in the manual in upper case text For example SPAN PEAK PRINT If it is part of a procedure the key or control label is printed in boldface For example Press SPAN identify keys on the front panel the area name label precedes the key For example Press the MODE DEMOD key m Menu and on screen form titles are printed in the manual in the same case initial capitals as they appear on the analyzer screen such as Span Source and Channel Power If it is part of a procedure the menu title is shown in boldface For example Press the Source side key A series of keys controls and or menu items separated by an arrow symbol gt indicates the order in which to perform the listed tasks For example Select RBW FFT gt Filter Shape Gaussian RSA3408A User Manual xix Preface XX RSA3408A User Manual Getting Started _ Se 2 Product Overview Features RSA3408A User Manual The RSA3408A is a portable real time spectrum analyzer having RF measure ment capability up to 8 GHz with wide vector span of 36 MHz The real time spectrum analyzer has a vastly different architecture from traditional tools and is uniquely capable of capturing continuous intermittent or random signals with equal ease The waveform and measurement results of data acquired seamlessly can be displayed in var
172. and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Service Options Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other services that are designed to meet your specific service needs Advancing technology has brought incredible change to the power of measurement instruments Manufac turing methods and calibration techniqu
173. aph of accumulation from the threshold CCDF is calculated using this formula Max SP X X CCDF X SP X Average P Y dY CCDF crest factor 0 where P Probability density of amplitude Max Maximum of amplitude Average Average of amplitude The analyzer processes input signals internally using the following procedure see Figure 3 66 1 Measure the amplitude of the input signal over time 2 Determine the amplitude distribution 3 Obtain CCDF using the above formula Amplitude 5 ji PA Nan Figure 3 66 CCDF calculation process 3 88 A x Average Max CCDF A gt n gt Amplitude 0 Crest factor Average gt X Amplitude RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Basic Procedure Follow these steps to perform the CCDF measurement 1 Press the TIME key on the front panel 2 Press the CCDF side key 3 Display the measured waveform NOTE Make sure to set the proper frequency and span It is important to set the frequency and the span as close to the measured signal bandwidth as possible and adjust precisely If not modulated signals are not recognized correctly For details about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 a Press the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel to set the frequency b Press the SPAN key on the
174. arkers are displayed on the waveform A maximum of 20 spurious signals are displayed In addition frequency difference deltaF and amplitude ratio Ratio in relation to the carrier are displayed in the measurement table at the bottom of the screen You can save the table to a file csv by SAVE Save Table For file operations refer to page 3 229 Tektronix RSA 3408A 3 05 2 05 33 PM PAUSE MEAS SETUP pu 9J
175. asurement described on page 3 109 except that this spurious display is real time You can observe the noisogram or C N versus offset frequency in the subview NOTE In the real time spurious measurement the number of FFT points is fixed to 1024 Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for the Real Time Spurious measurement Analyze Performs measurement for acquisition data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings The following menu items are identical to those in the spurious measurement Refer to page 3 109 Carrier Threshold Level Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Symmetrical Filter Carrier Tracking Scroll Table The following items are added for the real time measurement They depend on the subview content refer to Selecting the Subview Content on page 3 116 Carrier Bandwidth This value is used to display C N versus Offset frequency in the subview Sets the frequency bandwidth for calculating channel power Setting range Span 100 to Span 2 default Span 100 C N Sideband This value is used to display C N versus Offset frequency in the subview Selects the sideband for measuring phase noise Upper Default Measures upper sideband half span Lower Measures lower sideband half span Figure 3 80 shows an example of the real time spurio
176. at key is displayed Refer to page 2 15 for details of menu items Menu setting display area Displays the last setting of the menu item that can be set with the general purpose knob View The View window displays the waveform or the measurement results Multiple views can be displayed on one display screen depending on the measurement mode For more information refer to Spectrum Analysis S A mode page 3 1 Modulation Analysis Demod mode page 3 27 Time Analysis Time mode page 3 83 Setting Views page 3 183 Measurement function display area Displays the measurement function currently in use the settings of the Mode and Measure menus RSA3408A User Manual Interface Maps Status Display status display area in the upper right side of the screen see Figure 2 7 shows the instrument status as listed in Table 2 2 Tektronix RSA 3408A Status display Frequency 800 MHz Span Input Att 15 MHz 20 dB RBW 80 kHz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off Cancel Back dBm Figure 2 7 Status display Table 2 2 Status display Item ARM READY TRIG D FREE RUN PAUSE Description The pre trigger portion of the acquisition record is filling REQ CHAN Center Freq 4 Hz __ Start Freq Hz EM A trigger event occurring during this state will not be recognized Pre trigger data has been acquired and the instrument is waiting for a trigg
177. ation Effective sample rate Actual sample rate x Interpolation Points setting value 1 The actual sample rate and effective sample rate are displayed in the main view of the power on down and RF envelope measurements see Figure 3 57 on page 3 74 and Figure 3 58 on page 3 76 Edge number selected by VIEW DEFINE Edge 0 12 3 4 y Y ry The selected edge is displayed in the main view Settling Error Width 100 0 p Rise time Settling time Time Fall time Figure 3 56 Transmission power on down measurement parameters RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RSA3408A User Manual Advanced Parameter For the standard types of 14443 2 A and 14443 2 B only Sets the following three parameters Channel Filter Selects the filter for demodulating an input signal m None no filter default m Raised Cosine Preamble Determines whether to search for the preamble On Default Searches for the preamble while analyzing data The preamble is displayed in yellow in the symbol table m Off Analyzes data without searching for the preamble Side Band Selects the sideband to analyze m Upper Default Analyzes the upper sideband m Lower Analyzes the lower sideband Setting the Bit Rate Tari You must set the bit rate or Tari near the true value within 20 of the true value ap
178. ation Analysis Demod Mode Carrier Measurement 3 64 Measures the carrier frequency OBW Occupied Bandwidth EBW Emission Bandwidth and the maximum EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu of the carrier measurement Analyze Perform measurements for acquired data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings Counter Resolution Sets the resolution of the carrier frequency measurement Setting range 1 mHz to 1 MHz switching by 10 times default 1 Hz Refer to page 3 13 for the carrier frequency measurement in the S A mode Power Ratio Unit for OBW or EBW Selects the unit for the OBW or EBW measurement or dB Refer to OBW Measurement page 3 11 and EBW Measurement page 3 14 in the spectrum analysis S A mode Power Ratio for OBW Valid when is selected for the unit Sets the power ratio of the carrier and span region of the OBW measurement Range 80 to 100 default 99 Power Ratio for EBW dB Valid when dB is selected for the unit Sets the power ratio of the carrier and span region of the EBW measurement Range 80 to 100 dB default 20 dB Antenna Gain Sets the amplitude offset for the maximum EIRP measurement The maximum EIRP value to which the amplitude offset value is added is displayed as
179. ational laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and country destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information on exporting the SOFTWARE see http www microsoft com exporting LIMITATION ON SOFTWARE PROGRAMS USED ON THE DEVICE The combination of software programs you use on the DEVICE shall address not more than two 2 general office automation or consumer computing functions Such functions include but are not limited to email word processing spreadsheets database network browsing scheduling and personal finance STORAGE NETWORK USE The SOFTWARE may not be installed accessed displayed run shared or used concurrently on or from different computers including a workstation terminal or other digital electronic device Computing System Notwithstanding the foregoing and except as otherwise provided below any number of Computing Systems may access or otherwise utilize the file and print services and internet information services of the SOFTWARE if included You may use the SOFTWARE on a single DEVICE as interactive workstation software but not as server software However you may permit a maximum of ten 10 Computing Systems to connect to the DEVICE to access and use services of the SOFTWARE such as file and print services and internet information services The ten connection maximum includes any indirect connecti
180. before the trigger pre trigger m 1 Indicates that the frame is after the trigger post trigger short overLoad Indicates whether an input overload occurred m 0 Indicates that the MaxInputLevel value in the file header was correct m 1 Indicates that the MaxInputLevel value in the file header was too low short lastFrame The analyzer can divide its memory into 100 frames X 40 blocks for example LastFrame indicates the last frame in a block Q Indicates that the frame is not the last in the block Indicates that the frame is the last in the block unsigned long ticks Shows a time stamp using UnitPeriod in the file header not FramePeriod as a unit time RSA3408A User Manual File Format Frame Data Calculation of Data RSA3408A User Manual A frame contains 1024 pairs of I and Q data in the time domain in order of data acquisition Definition of Bin The bin is defined by the following structure struct iqBin_st short q short i Definition of Frame The frame is defined by the following structure struct iqFrame1024 st struct 19 st iq 1024 All the data of amplitude phase I and Q are transformed to 2 byte signed integers and then written in the file Amplitude The amplitude is calculated using i and q in the IQT file using these formulas i i Offset q q QOffset Amplitude 10 In i i q q In 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel LevelOffset
181. by the deviation Carrier frequency offset Frequency deviation Symbol length mV Start 11 175 ms 50 kHz 10 kHz 50 Modulation Fidelity RMS Error Magnitude Carrier Frequency Offset Deviation Length 1227 symbols The red dots indicate the symbol points kHz Scale 948 125 jus Hz Start 11 175 ms Scale 948 125 Lis Marker 2 3839763766 s 1 8097138214 kHz 0 274 96 5 2142 Hz kHz 1 808 kHz 2 40349 s 6 387153 ms Figure 3 42 IQ Frequency versus time measurement 3 52 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Power versus Time Measurement RSA3408A User Manual Observes signal power change over time Figure 3 64 shows an example The main view displays a power versus time graph For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 45 For setting views refer to page 3 183 Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum ee Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 40 5 Cancel Back Span 36 Parameter Input Att 20 dB Presets Marker 33 10578125 ms Off 4 526 dBm 10 10 Modulation dBm dBm Type ASK di 10 Modulation dB Parameters 90 Auto Carrier Er 90 Timing T dem on of Start 60 294531 ms Scale 6 ms Center 12 608527 MHz Span 5 MHz B E Marker 33 675 ms TEGUCnecy EGO 5 178 dBm Hz 3 8 P 515 9271807584 dBm ram el 0 2 dB 5 8 dem
182. can set the bandwidth and sweep time on this analyzer When you use the video filter press the RBW FFT key on the front panel to set the following items Video Filter Determines whether to use the video filter When you use the filter select On Then the following items appear VBW Sets the frequency bandwidth of the video filter Range 1 Hz to 1 GHz The setting value may be limited by the sweep time setting Sweep Time for VBW Sets the sweep time to scan a set span Range 1 us to 100 s 3 67 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 68 ACPR Measurement Measurement table The channel selected by the Scroll Table side key is indicated by the red band power cursor with the waveform The ACPR Adjacent Channel Leak Power Ratio measurement is similar to that of the S A mode refer to page 3 7 However in the ACPR measurement of the RFID analysis the adjacent channel is measured for up to 25 channels from up and down Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu of the ACPR measurement is the same as that of the S A mode except that Scroll Table is added Refer to page 3 7 Scroll Table Selects an adjacent channel 1 to 25 in the upper lower side from the measurement table displayed in the bottom of the screen Figure 3 53 shows an example of the ACPR measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A 29 45 PM PAUSE MEAS SETUP Freq
183. ck to display the reference cursor 2 Setthe end point 100 Left click to put the marker dem Timing 17 3 Setthe analysis range Press MARKER Analysis Time Marker Time Figure 3 30 Specifying the analysis range using the mouse RSA3408A User Manual 3 33 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Setting FFT Processing Range for the Subview Overview Changing the Overview 3 34 and Subview Set the FFT processing range shown in Figure 3 31 for the spectrum displayed in the subview with the following procedure using the Timing menu after data acquisition The range is indicated by a pink line 1 Press the TIMING key on the front panel The Spectrum Length side key shows the time for creating the FFT available in the subview It is determined by the span internally 2 Press the Spectrum Offset side key and specify the beginning of the range using the general purpose knob or numeric input keypad Spectrum Offset Spectrum Length 100 dBm Timing T Start 25 6 ms Scale 2 56 ms div Figure 3 31 FFT processing range setting on the overview By default the overview shows the waveform representing the signal level change over time and the subview shows the spectrum waveform To change the views use the following procedure NOTE You can change the subview only in the digital modulation analysis Option 21 1 Press the VIEW DEFI
184. coding format as shown in Table 3 12 Table 3 12 Measurement result display items Modulation type Subcarrier BPSK Modulation depth Modulation index Frequency error Auto bit rate on off 1 Estimated bit rate Estimated symbol rate Subcarrier jitter rms Frequency offset Decoding format PIE Modulation depth Modulation index Frequency error Auto bit rate on off 1 Estimated bit rate Estimated symbol rate 1 Set in the Meas Setup menu Modulation type Other than Subcarrier BPSK Decoding format Other than PIE Modulation depth Modulation index Frequency error Auto tari on off 1 Estimated Tari data 0 duration of a data 0 Estimated Tari data 1 duration of a data 1 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 61 shows the definition of the modulation depth and index Voltage Modulation depth A B A A Modulation index A B A B 0 Time Figure 3 61 Definition of the modulation depth and index 3 81 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 82 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode This section describes how to perform measurements in the time analysis Time mode MODE poemas SIA Measure menu _ Oui 9 r Transient gt Q versus Time 1 CCDF Power versus Time DEMOD Pulse Measurements Frequency versus Time icr Signal Source Ana
185. ct Folder selects a folder m Close Folder closes the selected folder m Done accepts the selected file PAUSE Folder Frequency 1 5 GHz Span 10 MHz Input Att 20 dB L My Computer 29 3 Floppy Egg C 1 3 My Documents C3 My Pictures CJ Program Files E windows D Figure 3 163 Selecting the folder 3 234 RBW Trace 1 Normal 50 kHz Cancel Back Trace 2 Off Open Folder Open Folder c Opens the selected folder Select Folder Select Folder Selects a folder using the knob Close Folder Open Folder Closes the selected folder Done Done Accepts the selected folder After selecting the folder press the Done side key to accept it The list of files in the selected folder appears displaying only files with the same extension as the file to be stored RSA3408A User Manual File Operations d Press the Filename side key see Figure 3 164 and enter a file name using the front panel keypad The file extension is automatically added Refer to Entering a File Name on page 3 238 for details about how to enter the name Here input TRACE1 for example using the front panel keypad W Press the TUV number 2 key once to select the letter T and then press the ENTER key W Press the PQRS number 1 key three times to select the letter and then press the ENTER key W Press the ABC number 8 key once to select the letter
186. ction describes scaling and formatting for the following view types m Spectrum view m Spectrogram view m Time domain view m CCDF view For Option 21 only m Constellation view m EVM view m Symbol table Eye diagram AM AM view AM PM view m PDF view Noisogram view For information on views specific to the other optional analyses refer to each user manual RSA3408A User Manual 3 183 Setting Views View Menu SELECT DEFINE SCALE 3 184 Use the following View keys on the front panel to scale and format views Selects a view when displaying two or three views on screen The view switches each time you press this key The selected view is surrounded with a white box Selects a view style format and content The menu items depend on the measurement Refer to each measurement description Sets the horizontal and vertical axes for the view selected with the SELECT key VIEW VIEW SELECT DEFNE VIEW DEFINE selects a view defines the view VIEW SCALE soare scales the view MARKERS Figure 3 127 View keys RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views Basic Procedure RSA3408A User Manual The following procedures set the scale or format the view using the VIEW keys in single view or multiple views Procedure for Single View When you are displaying one view on screen press the VIEW SCALE key and set the scale For the Scale menu of a specific view refer to the following pages Proc
187. ctor shown i 100 96 Vertical Scale dy Vertical Offset 100 95 Start 6 4 ms Scale 320 A lt Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 130 Setting the scale in time domain view 3 190 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views CCDF View Setting The CCDF view displays the CCDF measurement in the Digital Demod mode digital modulation analysis Option 21 only and the Time mode time analysis The horizontal axis indicates amplitude and the vertical axis logarithmic scale indicates CCDF Refer to page 3 88 for more information about the CCDF measurement View Scale Menu Scale menu for the CCDF view contains the following controls see Figure 3 131 Auto Scale Sets the starting value and the scale of the vertical axis automatical ly to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Range Twice of Vertical Start value to 10046 in a 1 2 5 sequence Vertical Start Sets the minimum value bottom of the vertical axis Range 107 to 1 2 of Vertical Stop value in a 1 2 5 sequence Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value Sub Grid Time mode only Determines whether to display the sub grid Vertical Stop
188. cts the filter for extracting symmetrical spurious signals only m On Default Displays symmetrical spurious signals only m Off Displays all spurious signals Carrier Tracking Selects whether carrier tracking is executed or not Carrier tracking ensures that the carrier frequency is always positioned centrally even when the signal drifts it does not affect the waveform display On Default Carrier tracking is executed The measurement is conducted with the carrier frequency always positioned centrally m Off Carrier tracking is not executed The measurement is conducted with the central frequency that was set using FREQUENCY Center Freq 3 109 Time Analysis Time Mode 3 110 a Frequency 2 GHz RBW SO kHz Cancel Back H Hz Trace 1 Normal Carrier Threshold Input Att 5 dB Trace 2 Off Level dBm 30 0 Ignore Region ed NN WIE E Spurious detection range m Spurious is displayed in blue Threshold dBc TI Es Excursion 10 dB dB dB Spurious marker 3 il Symmetrical Filter On Off Carrier Tracking 100 Bm On Off Center 2 GHz Span 10 Measurement table 8 Scroll Table Up to 20 spurious signals deltaF H2 4556M 1194M 1109M displayed Ratio dBc 69 46 7505 70 15 7476 Figure 3 76 shows an example of the spurious measurement Detected spurious signals are numbered sequentially from No 1 in descending order of amplitude and spurious m
189. cy m i 2 2M 12 Hz Frequency 3 30M 14 a Inputs frequency of the point Amplitude D lt Amplitude Inputs correction value Frequency Amplitude correction value Delete Point Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Frequency Hz 0 Delete Point Deletes a line Add New Point Add New Point Deletes all data in the table Done Editing Table Done Editing Table Registers the input values and adds a line Clear Table lt Clear Table Deletes all data in the table Figure 3 92 Amplitude correction data input RSA3408A User Manual To modify input data Press the Select Point To Edit side key and turn the general purpose knob to move the cursor to the row to be modified Use the following side keys as needed m To modify a frequency use the Frequency side key To modify an amplitude use the Amplitude side key To delete a row press the Delete Point side key To delete all data in the table press the Clear Table side key Repeat steps 5 through 6 as needed 3 137 Setting Amplitude 8 When you have finished the data input save the file as follows a Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel b Press the Corrections side key Press the Save Table side key to specify the save file Refer to page 3 229 for file handling For information about performing amplitude correction refer to page 3 140 3 138 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Amplitude
190. d measurement result for the analysis range TE 100 96 Start 40 ms Analog Demod AM Demod Analysis Offset ms 24 Figure 2 52 Analysis range settings Setting the Acquisition Length 2 60 TIMING Cancel Back Acquisition Length s 64m Acquisition History 0 Spectrum Length 5 32m Spectrum Offset s 0 Analysis Length s 32m Analysis Offset s Step Size Scale 32 ms Analysis Offset 62 5 Timing menu Acquisition History Specifies the number of the block to be analyzed Analysis Length Specifies the time length of the analysis range Analysis Offset Specifies the start point of the analysis range One frame consists of 1024 data points and one block consists of several frames Data are acquired in block units in the Demod mode The number of frames in Frame 0 Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 gt 1 block N frames one block is referred to as block size Frame and block size are shown in Figure 2 53 1024 data points A O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 2 53 Frame and block Frame 1 J RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Suppose that one block contains N frames T
191. d bit rate or Tari is displayed in the Bit Rate side key In the constellation eye diagram and symbol table measurements the calculated bit rate or Tari is also displayed in the main view see Figure 3 60 on page 3 79 Figure 3 57 shows an example of the power on down measurements You can save the measurement table to a file csv by SAVE Save Table For file operations refer to page 3 229 Overview Zoom Tekironix RSA 3408A SESS SI 1 5 GHz 10 MHz 15 dB Frequency Span Input Att SSS Acquisition Length 4 ml Subview Power vs Time PAUSE MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Analyze NOTE The overview and subview kHz contents can be selected using the View Define menu Al R 238 125 11 41 5 dB 22 4 ms 14 frame 87 frame dem Sample rate Effective sample rate Refer to Interpolation Points on page 3 72 L Effective Sample Rate Measurement table Index Rise Fal Time s Rise Fall time Settling time Overshoot Undershoot Off level frame Center 1 GHz Sample Rate 640 k Hz M Hz 3 2 Fal Rise 2 9361 RFID 18000 4 6 Power On Down Edge number selected by VIEW DEFINE Edge Span 500 kHz Marker 58 8828125 ms 0 dBm 10 dB 100 dBm Marker 35 17 734 dBm Start 80 4 ms 78 0846875 ms 16 895 UW Scale 2 88 ms
192. d displays the value in the Modulation Depth side key m Off Sets the modulation depth using the Modulation Depth side key RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Shifting Q Data for OQPSK RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Depth Sets the modulation depth when Auto Modulation Depth described above is Off Range 0 to 100 Auto Frequency Deviation Valid when the modulation type refer to page 3 45 is FSK or GFSK Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the frequency deviation used to distinguish between the two states of an FSK or GFSK signal On Default Automatically calculates the frequency deviation for the analysis range and displays the value in the Frequency Deviation side key m Off Sets the frequency deviation using the Frequency Deviation side key Frequency Deviation Sets the frequency deviation when Auto Frequency Deviation is Off Range 0 to Span 2 Hz Decoding Format Valid when the modulation type refer to page 3 45 is ASK FSK or GFSK Selects the method used to decode data bits from each symbol NRZ m Manchester m Miller Auto Carrier Selects whether to use automatic carrier detection m On Default Automatically detects carriers for every frame and displays errors from center frequency as Freq Error on the screen m Off Sets the carrier frequency using Frequency Error Frequency Error Sets the carrier frequency when Off is selected in Auto Car
193. dBm Phase The phase is calculated using i and q in the IQT file using these formulas i i Offset q q QOffset Phase atan2 q i 180 Pi degree l Q I and Q are calculated using i and q in the IQT file using these formulas i i Offset q q OOffset IOScale Sqrt Power 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel LevelOffset 10 20 2 I i IQScale V q IOScale V 3 247 File Format Correction and Extended Correction Data Blocks Dummy Header 3 248 The correction data block contains gain and phase correction data as one frame of data block in the frequency domain The extended correction data block contains the next lower byte of the correction data When these blocks are added the amplitude and phase are calculated using the following formulas Be careful about the sign for phase correction Amplitude dBm Original data Gain correction data lt lt 8 Extended gain correction data amp 0x000000ff 128 256 Phase degrees Original data Phase correction data lt lt 8 Extended phase correction data amp 0x000000ff 128 256 Definition of Bin The bin is defined by the following structure struct apBin st short a short p do Definition of Frame The frame is defined by the following structure struct apFrame1024 st struct apBin st ap 1024 Definition of Extended Correction Data Block The extended correction data block
194. e PM demodulation display phase deviation versus time m 1 Q level versus Time For Option 21 only m Random jitter versus Time Integrated phase noise versus Time C N versus Time The Scale menu for the time domain view contains the following controls see Figure 3 130 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the vertical axis automatically to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Available when the vertical axis represents Power Random jitter Integrated phase noise C N Vertical Offset Sets the center value maximum minimum 2 of the vertical axis Available when the vertical axis represents AM modulation factor FM frequency deviation PM phase deviation IO voltage Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value 3 189 Setting Views Vertical axis Power Random jitter Integrated phase noise or C N Power shown Vertical Stop 0 dBm 10 Vertical Scale dei 100 _ dem Start 64 ms Scale 6 4 ms A lt Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Vertical axis AM modulation factor FM frequency deviation PM phase deviation or IQ level AM modulation fa
195. e using the Windows help system You can use the front panel arrow keys as in the following procedure a mouse or a keyboard to navigate through the help system See page 3 226 for information about using a mouse or keyboard to navigate through the online help The help system provides information about operating this analyzer providing the following help resources online m Front panel key descriptions m Online user manual m Online programmer manual Displaying the Online Help Use the following procedure to show the online help 1 Press the HELP key on the front panel UTILITY HELP HELP PRESET Shows the online help LL 2 Select the type of online help using the side keys m View Front Panel Button Help Provides descriptions of the front panel keys m View Online User Manual Displays the analyzer user manual formatted for online use m View Online Programmer Manual Displays the analyzer programmer manual formatted for online use RSA3408A User Manual 3 223 Using the Online Help 3 Depending on the type of online manual you selected use one of the following two procedures If you selected View Front Panel Button Help Press the front panel key about which you want to receive information For example press the MEASURE key to show information about that key see Figure 3 157 Press the front panel key to show the description of that key FrontPanel E e fF amp
196. e 3 59 page 3 60 Refer to Appendix B for digital demodulation symbol mapping RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Meas Setup Menu This subsection describes the Meas Setup menu items common to all the measurements in the digital modulation analysis For the Meas Setup menu items specific to a measurement refer to that measurement description Parameter Presets Selects a communication standard Parameters are set according to the standard you have selected refer to Table 3 6 Table 3 6 Communication standard and parameters 802 15 4 0QPSK OQPSK ve o BT 0 35 0 5 0 5 0 35 0 3 0 5 0 5 0 2 Modulation Type Selects a modulation method Available measurement items depend on the modulation method as shown in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 Modulation type and available measurement item Constellation EVM fe Ff Power versus Time E 2 Symbol Table Eye Diagram Dg pl 50 022 ci AMIPM a CCDF CNET E RACE PDF EE UEM 17 2888 1 Includes BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM and 256QAM RSA3408A User Manual 3 45 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 46 Restrictions of Use m When the modulation type is P25 the analysis is performed only for the span of 20 kHz and 50 kHz For the 50 kHz span Acquisition Length in the Timing menu must be set to greater
197. e Timing menu in Demod modulation analysis and Time time analysis modes contains the following items see Figure 3 97 Acquisition Length Sets the time length to acquire one block 2 M frames The acquisition length is calculated using this equation One block acquisition length M One frame acquisition length where M is the number of frames in a block One frame acquisition length is determined by span internally For details refer to Specifications in the RSA3408A Technical Reference Acquisition History Specifies the number of the block to display and analyze The latest block is number zero Older blocks have larger negative numbers In most cases the analyzer retains previous acquisitions You can view previous acquisitions by selecting the acquisition history by block number Spectrum Length Displays the time length for FFT processing of the spectrum displayed in the subview It is equivalent to one frame acquisition length determined by Span RBW and FFT points setting Spectrum Offset Sets the beginning of Spectrum Length with respect to the trigger output point Analysis Length Sets the time length of the analysis range in the block specified by Acquisition History Analysis Offset Sets the beginning of Analysis Length with respect to the trigger output point Output Trigger Indicator Determines whether to display the output trigger indicator O on the overview Refer to Trigger Point Indicator on
198. e cloth or a soft bristle brush If dirt remains use a cloth or swab dampened with a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution A swab is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces around the controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the instrument CAUTION Do not allow moisture inside the instrument During exterior cleaning use only enough solution to dampen the cloth or swab There is no periodic lubrication required for this instrument Consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative for cleaning the analyzer interior RSA3408A User Manual aa eee Appendix F Options and Accessories Options RSA3408A User Manual This appendix describes the options and standard and optional accessories that are available for the analyzer The following options can be ordered for the analyzer m Option 1A External preamplifier 20 dB gain to 3 GHz Option 1R Rack Mount Kit includes hardware and instructions for converting to 19 inch rackmount configuration m Option L5 Provides Japanese language user manual and programmer manual instead of English manuals Option 02 256 MB data memory with frequency mask trigger m Option 03 IO input function Option 05 Digital IO output function m Option 06 Removable hard disk drive m Option 21 Advanced measurement suite m Option 23 UMTS W CDMA uplink analysis software m Option 24 GSM EDGE analysis software m Option 25 cdma2000 analysis software m Opti
199. e front panel 2 Press one of the following side keys according to the type of data to load Table 3 29 File load operation T sa 3 To select a file by name skip to step 5 4 To select the preset file to which you have saved data in step 4 on page 3 233 press the Load from file name to load the data see Figure 3 165 as an example The file extension is automatically added according to the file type NOTE If you have not saved any data to the preset file that you select the error message File name not found appears on the bottom left of the screen Load from TraceA Load from TraceB gt Loads data from the preset file trace file in this example Load from Select File J Figure 3 165 Load from the preset file lower right of the screen 3 236 RSA3408A User Manual File Operations Tektronix RSA 3408A 5 select an existing file press the Folder side key Select the folder containing the file to be loaded For a file select procedure see step 5 on page 3 234 6 After selecting the folder press the Done side key to accept it The list of files in the selected folder appears 7 Press the Select File side key and then select the file from the list using the general purpose knob 8 After selecting the file press the Load File Now side key See Figure 3 166 The data is loaded from the specified file PAUSE Load From File Frequency 800 MH
200. e general purpose knob set the measurement range to 40 kHz for example See the display in Figure 2 48 Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 MEAS SETUP e alan ci UN Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Channel E Input Att 15 dB Trace2 Off Bandwidth Hz z Channel Bandwidth Ek Sets the measurement bandwidth 0 lt x1 Measurement Sm Channel Bandwidth Filter Shapes 40 kHz Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 0 5 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Channel Power 9 85 dBm Density 43 88 dBm Hz Channel Bandwidth 8 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Channel Power Channel Bandwidth kHz 8 Figure 2 48 Channel power measurement Channel Bandwidth 40 kHz RSA3408A User Manual 2 55 Tutorial Measuring Carrier Carrier frequency can be measured accurately using the counter function Frequenc q y 1 Press the MEASURE key on the front panel 2 Press the Carrier Frequency side key The measurement result is displayed at the bottom of the screen see Figure 2 49 Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 41 13 MEASURE Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Channel Power dem ACPR C N OBW 10 dB Carrier Frequency EBW 100 i dBm Spurious Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Carrier frequency measurement gt Frequency
201. e graticule is a 10 x 10 grid by default You can select a different grid style by pressing VIEW DEFINE Grid Style as follows NOTE The Grid Style menu item is available only in the S A mode except Real Time S A Off Turns off the graticule Fix Always displays a 10 x 10 grid Flex Displays the graticule with the horizontal scale per division in a 1 2 5 sequence Tektronix RSA 3408A 03 08 13 VIEW DEFINE Frequency 800 MHz RBW 1 2 kHz Cancel Back Span 300 kHz Trace 1 Normal Grid Style Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Off Fix Flex 0 10 dB 100 dem Center 800 MHz Scale 50 kHz Span 300 kHz Menu Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off The horizontal scale is set to 50 kHz div for span of 300 kHz in the Flex grid style Figure 3 3 Flex grid style 3 3 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spectrum Analysis Basic Procedure 3 4 You can select following measurement items with the MEASURE key when you select S A and then the Spectrum Analyzer side key Table 3 2 Measurement items in the S A mode Measure menu Title Refer to Channel Power Channel Power Measurement page 3 5 ACPR ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Measurement page 3 7 C N C N Carrier to Noise ratio Measurement page 3 9 OBW OBW Occupied Bandwidth Measurement page 3 11 Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency Measurement page 3 13 EBW EBW E
202. e label is followed by you can move to a lower level Corrections menu by pressing the associated side key Move between pages Go to page 2 of When the number of menu items is greater than seven this menu 2 appears To move to the next page press the associated side key If you are on the last page you will return to the first page Invalid Menu items without labels do not cause any action Figure 2 13 Menu item types Numeric Input An example numeric input field is shown in Figure 2 14 In this type of field you can change the numeric value by turning the general purpose knob by pressing the up down AW keys or by entering a value using the keypad Center Freq Hz 156 7 Numeric input field Figure 2 14 Numeric setting menu RSA3408A User Manual 2 19 Functional Overview Changing a Setting Using the General Purpose Knob or the Up Down Keys 1 Press the side key for setting a numeric value For example press FREQUENCY CHANNEL Center Freq to set a center frequency The menu item changes to the display as shown in Figure 2 15 vou Freq E Indicates that numeric values can be changed Ea with the general purpose knob Numeric input field Figure 2 15 Changing value with the knob 2 Turn the general purpose knob to increase or decrease the value You can also use the up and down AW keys to increase or decrease a setting value respectively Down key
203. e measurement item Constellation 7 gt Parameter Presets Off PDC PHS TETRA GSM CDPD Bluetooth EVM Modulation Type IQ Frequency Modulation Parameters 1 4Pl_QPSK BPSK QPSK 8PSK versus Time Auto Carrier On Off 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 2560 Power versus Time Frequency Error Auto Carrier On GMSK GFSK ASK FSK OQPSK Symbol Table Frequency Offset Auto Carrier Off Eye Diagram 71 Symbol Rate AM AM AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF Measurement Filter None Root Raised Cosine Linear Signal Region Unit dB dBm Reference Filter None Raised Cosine Gaussian CCDF Linear Signal Region Filter Parameter PDF Measurement Off AM AM AM PM Modulation Type ASK Scroll Table Auto Modulation Depth On Off Maximum Coefficients Modulation Depth Display Reference Line On Off Display Best Fit Line On Off Modulation Type FSK GFSK Auto Frequency Deviation On Off AM AM only Frequency Deviation Linear Signal Region Mask On Off Modulation Type ASK FSK GFSK CCDF PDF Decoding Format 2 Manchester Miller Horizontal Division CCDF only Display Gaussian Line On Off RFID Measurements Option 21 only Carrier gt Analyze
204. e sum or difference frequency at the output of a mixer stage which will be used for further signal processing Key Contacts A pattern of interlaced fingers on the front panel circuit board that form a contact closure when mated with a conductive pad under a mechanical front panel button Link Connect to a file containing settings or other data to be used by the application Maintain the connection Live Trace Any combination of the A trace and or the B trace when SAVE A is off RSA3408A User Manual Glossary RSA3408A User Manual Load Copy settings or other data from a file but don t maintain any connection with that file Local Oscillator LO An oscillator which produces the internal signal that is mixed with an incoming signal to produce the IF signal Marker A visually identifiable point on a waveform trace used to extract a readout of domain and range values represented by that point MAX HOLD Digitally stored display mode which at each frequency address compares the incoming signal level to the stored level and retains the greater level In this mode the display indicates the peak level at each frequency after several successive sweeps MIN HOLD A spectrum analyzer feature which captures the minimum signal amplitude at all displayed frequencies over a series of sweeps Modulate To regulate or vary a characteristic of a signal Modulating Signal The signal which modulates a carrier The signal which vari
205. e viewable Tektronix RSA 3408A 12 14 2004 2 06 46 PM MEASURE i V SS SS SSS Se Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 100kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Trece 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Channel Power 0 dBm ACPR C N OBW 10 dB Carrier Frequency EBW Mp ly PLI ife Piero A len Spurious 100 dem Center 1 5 GHz Span 36 M rement Off Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 2 29 Initial screen Restoring Default Settings analyzer saves the settings when it is turned off When you turn on the analyzer it starts with the settings as they were when it was shut down This tutorial starts with the factory default settings Perform the following steps to restore the factory default settings 1 Press the SYSTEM key 2 Press the Reset All to Factory Defaults side key The instrument is now ready to take measurements 2 34 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Displaying Spectrum This section describes how to set the frequency span and amplitude and then appropriately display the spectrum Figure 2 30 shows the settings Frequency Center frequency Amplitude gt Y Span gt Figure 2 30 Frequency span and amplitude settings Setting Center Frequency center frequency is set to 1 5 GHz and span is set to 36 MHz when you and Span power on the analyzer Change the settings of center freq
206. eal time spectrum analysis with zoom function Refer to page 3 24 for details m Standard Performs spectrum analysis according to a communication standard For details refer to the user manual included in each option as shown in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Standard menu in the S A mode Menu item Option Description W CDMA UL W CDMA uplink analysis 3GPP R5 DL 3GPP Release 5 downlink analysis 3GPP R5 UL 3GPP Release 5 uplink analysis 3 1 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Measurement Screen Layout Figure 3 2 shows the basic screen layout in the spectrum analysis S A mode The spectrum waveform and measurement results are displayed You can display the spectrum and the spectrogram at the same time Refer to Spectrogram Display on page 3 18 Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 0 MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Channel Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Bandwidth Hz ak Measurement dBm Filter Shape Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 10 Spectrum gt db 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Measurementresut Channel Power 9 82 dBm Density 45 84 dBm Hz Channel Bandwidth 4 kHz Spectrum Analyz amp amp Channel Power 2 Channel Bandwidth kHz Measurement item Figure 3 2 S A measurement screen 3 2 RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Changing the Grid Style RSA3408A User Manual Th
207. easurement waveform NOTE You should set appropriate frequency and span It is important to set frequency and span as close to the measurement signal band as possible and finely adjust them The modulated signal will not be recognized unless frequency and span are set appropriately For information about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 a Set frequency by pressing the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel b Set span by pressing the SPAN key on the front panel c Setamplitude by pressing the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel Set analysis range by pressing the TIMING key on the front panel Refer to page 3 30 for information about setting the analysis range Set the measurement parameters by pressing the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel For the Meas Setup menu refer to the following sections 3 37 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode ASK FSK Modulation Analysis Basic ASK and FSK modulation analysis can be performed using Analog Modulation Analysis This analysis includes frequency deviation and depth of modulation Typical settings are as follows m ASK signal measurement Measurement item AM Demod Span ones eh 500 kHz Acquisition Length 10 24 ms m FSK signal measurement Measurement item FM Demod Span x Res 500 kHz Acquisition Length 10 24 ms Vertical Scale 1 6 MHz deviation scale 800 k
208. ection provides the operating fundamentals Menu Keys Menu Keys Menu Operations Measurement Basics Setting System Parameters Using Windows XP Menu keys on the front panel shown in Figure 2 11 on page 2 16 are divided into the following three functional groups RSA3408A User Manual MEASUREMENT Sets frequency amplitude and time parameters for specified measurement and controls data acquisition DISPLAY The Display group is divided into the following three subgroups MODE Selects a measurement mode wm VIEW Selects a view content and scales a measurement graph MARKERS Controls markers UTILITY Provides system initialization waveform storage facilities instrument calibration screen hard copy and miscellaneous other functions Functional Overview Measurement group Display group Utility group MEASUREMENT DISPLAY UTILITY MODE VIEW FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL STOP SIA SELECT DEFINE HELP PRESET SPAN TRIG DEMOD SCALE LINES INPUT LOAD MARKERS RBW f AMPLITUDE F TIME SELECT CAL SAVE TRACE TIMING AVG lt q PEAK p SYSTEM PRINT MEAS MARKER MARKER MACRO MEASURE SETUP gt v SETUP SETUP Figure 2 11 Menu keys Table 2 4 summarizes the front panel menu key functions For details refer to each section listed in the Reference column Table 2 4 Menu key summary MEASUREM
209. ed as 5M Frequency can be expressed as a floating point number or with the SI unit k M or G For example the following lines show three different ways to express the same value 1000 1E 3 1k 1230000 1 23E 6 1 23M 1000000000 1 0E 9 1 0G Amplitude is expressed as a decimal number or integer such as 1 23 or 10 Do not use a space in a numeric value however you can space before and after Correct 10M 10 A space is inserted before and after Incorrect 10 M 10 A space is inserted between 10 and M 3 135 Setting Amplitude 3 136 Creating an Amplitude Correction File on a Computer Use word processing software on a computer to create a text file with the extension cor Be sure to use the correct file format refer to File Format on page 3 134 and follow the Rules for Creating an Amplitude Correction File on page 3 135 For information about performing amplitude correction refer to page 3 140 Creating Correction Data on the Analyzer Screen The procedure for entering new correction data or modifying existing data on the screen is as follows Refer also to Rules for Creating an Amplitude Correction File on page 3 135 1 Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel 2 Press the Corrections side key 3 To edit an existing file Refer to page 3 229 for file handling a Press the Load Table side key to load the file b Press the Edit Table side key 4 To enter n
210. edure for Multiple Views When you are displaying multiple views on the screen follow these steps 1 Select a view by pressing the VIEW SELECT key The selected view is surrounded by a white frame 2 If necessary change a multiple view display to a single view display a Press the VIEW DEFINE key b Press the Show Views side key to select Single Only the selected view will be displayed 3 Setthe scale by pressing the VIEW SCALE key 4 If necessary return to the multiple view display a Press the VIEW DEFINE key b Press the Show Views side key to select Multi Refer to page 3 34 for information about changing the overview and the subview using the Define menu 3 185 Setting Views Spectrum View Setting View Scale Menu Vertical Stop 7 Vertical Scale 3 186 The spectrum view is the frequency domain representation of a signal It indicates frequency along the horizontal axis and power along the vertical axis The Scale menu for the spectrum view contains the following controls see Figure 3 128 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the vertical axis automatically to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Full Scale Sets the
211. ef Level dBm 10 Figure 2 37 Reference level of 10 dBm AM P 10 Vertical Units dBm dBp V w Span 20 kHz Corrections RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Starting and Stopping Use the RUN STOP key to start or stop data acquisition There are two Data Acquisition acquisition modes the continuous mode in which data is acquired repeatedly and the single mode in which one waveform is acquired You can select the mode using the Trig menu MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL strop RUN STOP key SPAN TRIG TRIG key RBW AMPLITUDE i By default the analyzer is now acquiring data in the continuous mode 1 Press the RUN STOP key to stop data acquisition When acquisition stops PAUSE is shown in the status indicator on screen see Figure 2 38 Status indicator 0 Pause DVETE n H PI m P E Q Frequency 100 MHz _ RBW 200 bz SEES Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level 4 Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off dBm 2 IH Figure 2 38 Status indicator 2 Acquire data in the single mode using the following steps a Press the TRIG key on the front panel b Press the Repeat side key and select Single c Press the RUN STOP key to acquire data One waveform is acquired and displayed every time you press the k
212. elp View Online User Manual View Online Programmer Manual Signal Input Port RF IQ Cal100M Cal25M Reference Source Calibrate All Calibrate Gain Calibrate Center Offset Calibrate DC Offset Calibrate IF Flatness Int Ext Auto Calibration Service Refer to the Service Manual Display Brightness Reset All to Factory Defaults Remote Setup Refer to the Programmer Manual Yes No r Scroll Option Key Change Option Key Version and Installed Options Instrument Setup Angular Units Phase Digital IQ Output Option 03 only Degrees Radians On Off S A mode except Real Time Load State gt Load From File Menu Load Trace 1 Select File Load Trace 2 Load File Now Load Correction Folder Load from XXXA Real Time S A Demod and Time modes Load from XXXB Load State Load from XXXC Load Data S A mode except Real Time Save State Save Trace 1 Filename Save Trace 2 J Save File Now Save Correction Folder Save to XXXA Real Time S A Save to XXXB Save State Save to XXXC Save Data Demod and Time modes Save State Save Data Print now All Blocks Current Block Current Area Save screen to file Background color Printer Black White Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office for installing user specific macros RSA3408A User Man
213. ements are not guaranteed For Option 02 256 MB memory the acquisition length TIMING Acquisi tion Length and the analysis length TIMING Analysis Length are both up to 1 28 s at the maximum real time span 36 MHz The length of a burst is up to 20 ms A burst more than 20 ms is analyzed every 20 ms as one burst each The time length varies according to span settings 1 Press the DEMOD key on the front panel 2 Select Standard RFID using the side keys 3 Select a measurement item by pressing the side key For example press the Carrier side key to perform the carrier measurement 4 Adjust the amplitude and frequency to display the measurement waveform Refer to page 3 119 for setting frequency and span Refer to page 3 127 for setting amplitude 5 Setthe analysis range in the overview This is not necessary in the spurious and ACPR measurements Refer to page 3 30 for details of the analysis range settings If you use the zoom function do these steps Press the VIEW DEFINE key Press the Overview Content side key and select Zoom Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 24 for setting the analysis area on the spectrogram with the zoom function 6 Press the MEAS SETUP key and set the measurement parameters Refer to Meas Setup Menu in each measurement description 7 Press the Analyze side key and carry out the analysis It is not necessary in the spurious and ACPR measurements 3 63 Modul
214. en 7 Press the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel to set the measurement parameters Refer to page 3 100 for the Meas Setup menu RSA3408A User Manual 3 95 Time Analysis Time Mode 3 96 10 After you capture a measurement waveform stop the data acquisition If you are acquiring data in the continuous mode press the RUN STOP key Press the MEAS SETUP key and then Analyze side key to start the analysis of the acquired data Press the VIEW DEFINE key to select a pulse to observe from the measurement results Hints for Taking Measurements It takes longer to detect pulses when the analysis length in the Timing menu is set to a larger value The results are not displayed in the Channel Power OBW or EBW measurement The number of data samples in Pulse On must be 20 to 16 384 for FFT calculation Change the span to display the results The results are not displayed in the Pulse Repetition Interval or the Duty Cycle measurement The observed pulse and the next one must be contiguous If either pulse is not recognized due to noise and so on the measurement results are not shown Error messages displayed on the bottom of the screen Message Filter bandwidth is too wide or Channel bandwidth is too wide Indicates that you set Filter Bandwidth or Channel Bandwidth inappropriate ly in the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 100 In this case change the setting of Filter Bandwidth or Channel Bandwidth until the me
215. ency Channel power Integrated phase noise Random Jitter Maximum periodic jitter RSA3408A User Manual 15 dB 160 dBc Hz Start 100kHz Carrier Frequency Channel Power Integrated Phase Noise Random Jitter Max Periodic Jitter Ref 100kHz 200 dB 108 923919483 MHz 9 455 dBm 5143 degRMS 1 312 ns RMS 0 919 ps Signal Source Analysis RT Phase Noise Figure 3 78 Real time phase noise measurement End 18MHz C N Sideband Rj Stop Offset Max Pj Threshold MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Level dBm 30 Carrier Bandwidth Hz 360k Lower Upper Rj Start Offset Frequency Hz 100k Frequency Hz 2M Rj Settling Threshold s 5n dB 10 Go to page 2 of 2 Selecting the Subview Content The real time phase noise measurement subview has displays that are specific to the signal source analysis The subview is selected by pressing VIEW DEFINE Subview Content Subview Content Selects the information that is displayed in the subview Refer to Setting Views on page 3 183 for scaling a view Spectrum W Noisogram Color axis C N Horizontal axis Frequency Vertical axis Time Frame No It is like a spectrogram but the color axis represents C N in dBc Hz m Random Jitter vs Time See Figure 3 79 The random jitter settling time is also indicated Integrated Phase Noise vs Time m C N vs Time See Figure 3 79 T
216. ent of pressing the key is discarded and the measure ment results are shown for the previous block of data Pressing TRIG Stop and Show Results to stop data acquisition Shows measurement results even for the block of data acquired at the moment of pressing the side key which might not fill a whole block In either case press RUN STOP again to restart acquisition Source Selects a trigger source when the trigger mode is Triggered Power Span BW Default Uses time domain 1 data of the input signal as the trigger source You can set the trigger level slope and position Freq Mask Option 02 only Uses a trigger mask as the trigger source Refer to page 3 155 for information about creating the trigger mask External Uses the external signal input from the TRIG IN connector on the rear panel as the trigger source You can set the trigger level slope and position For specifications of the external trigger refer to the RSA3408A Technical Reference Position Available when the trigger mode is set to Triggered Specifies the position of the trigger in a block as a percentage of all the frames in the block For example if you set the trigger position to 50 the trigger occurs at the center of the block as shown in Figure 3 102 Range 0 to 100 in 1 step F 1 block gt Time Position setting mm Trigger occurs Acquisition completed Figure 3 102 Trigger position RSA3408A User
217. equencies using the delta marker Delta Marker follow these steps l Press the MAKER SETUP key on the front panel 2 Press the Makers side key to select Delta Marker 1 and 2 are displayed with the two markers overlapping each other Select Marker is set to 1 Marker 1 by default Note that the Marker X Position menu item is already selected 3 Rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the active marker to the reference point 4 Change the active marker by pressing the Select Marker side key to select 2 5 Rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the active marker to the measurement point As shown in Figure 3 151 the marker readout is shown in the top left portion of the screen Delta marker readout Marker 1 readout Marker 2 readout Delta marker measurement value MARKER SETUP Marker 1 readout Marker 2 readout Readout of the selected marker Cancel Bak Select Marker E lt Select Marker er it A EE Selects the active marker J Marker X RE dBm Hz Markers Marker 1 lt Markers Single Delta Here selects Delta to enable Marker 1 and 2 Reference Cursor to Marker X 10 dB Marker 2 Reference Cursor Off Selected Marker Step Size Marker X 15 525 Go to page 2 of 2 Center 100 MHz Span 15 kHz
218. er enters the A D converter through the fine tuning attenuator low noise amplifier and anti alias filter to be converted into a digital signal The sampling rate of the A D converter is 102 4 MHz with a resolution of 14 bits The I Q splitter separates the real signal from the A D converter into complex I and Q components With Option 03 you can input I and Q signals from the rear panel connectors Performs center frequency and span fine tuning The digital data from the A D converter is transformed to a complex signal of maximum 20 MHz setting any center frequency to 0 Hz A decimating filter composed of FIR Finite Impulse Response filters changes the span by effectively reducing the sampling rate It allows extremely accurate filtering with minimal spurious emissions The data streams from the digital down converter are then divided into frames and saved in the data memory Option 05 provides the digital IQ data output from the rear panel connectors to store and analyze on an external PC Option 02 provides a real time digital trigger function that monitors the frequency spectrum for the occurrence of specific events A trigger mask is used to set conditions for trigger The FFT processor performs high speed calculations to create extended trigger signals The FFT processor performs 1024 point complex FFT at high speed to create extended trigger signals The FFT processor consists of an input buffer FFT calculation DSP output buffer
219. er event Pre trigger data has been acquired and a trigger event has been detected The instrument is now acquiring post trigger data The instrument acquires and measures without waiting for a trigger event The user has temporarily stopped acquisition measurement cycling The acquired data is stored in the data memory from address zero in order of acquisition When you set a trigger condition the acquired data is stored in the pre trigger region until the trigger event occurs Thereafter it is stored in the post trigger region see Figure 2 8 Data memory Pre trigger region Post trigger region Trigger point Figure 2 8 Pre and post trigger regions RSA3408A User Manual Time gt 2 11 Interface Maps Front Panel Key Lock When controlling this instrument through GPIB you can disable all the keys on the front panel except the power switch using the SYSTEM KLOCK command At this time the message PANEL LOCK is displayed on the top side key see Figure 2 9 PANEL LOCK Front panel key lock display Figure 2 9 Key lock display To cancel the key lock the following two methods can be used m Use the SYSTEM KLOCK command to cancel m Turn off the power and then on Refer to the RSA3303A and RSA3308A Programmer Manual for information about the GPIB commands 2 12 RSA3408A User Manual Interface Maps Setup Display
220. er menu items available RBW FFT FFT points 64 to 8192 powers of 2 FFT points 1024 fixed RBW 1 Hz to 10 MHz RBW No RBW process FFT overlap capability Timing No timing parameters Acquisition Length and Spectrum Offset can be set Basic Procedure following steps show the basic procedure for real time spectrum analysis with spectrogram 1 Press the S A key on the front panel 2 Press the Real Time S A side key The spectrum is displayed concurrently with the spectrogram 3 Display the spectrum waveform of the measurement signal NOTE For details on setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 For details on setting trigger refer to Trigger on page 3 147 a Setthe frequency by pressing the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel b Setthe span by pressing the SPAN key on the front panel Table 3 4 shows the span setting range Set the amplitude by pressing the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel d Setthe trigger by pressing the TRIG key on the front panel Table 3 4 Span setting range Measurement band Baseband DC to 40 MHz RF 40 MHz to 8 GHz Setting range 100 Hz to 40 MHz 1 2 5 sequence 100 Hz to 20 MHz 1 2 5 sequence and 36 MHz RSA3408A User Manual 3 21 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 4 Press the TIMING key on the front panel and then the Acquisition Length side key to set the time leng
221. erly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life XV General Safety Summary xvi A CAUTION Caution statements ide
222. es have been revolutionized making the service challenge tougher than ever By using Tektronix as your service provider you make use of our technology and product knowledge our world wide logistics infrastructure and our ISO9000 approved service centers Tektronix technicians are trained on the latest products and are equipped with the most current information on product improvements and upgrades for optimum product performance Warranty Repair Service Tektronix technicians provide warranty service at most Tektronix service locations worldwide The warranty period for this product can be found behind the title page in this manual Calibration and Repair Service Tektronix offers calibrations non warranty repair and support for customers performing their own service Where appropriate calibrations are compliant to ANSI NCSL Z 540 ISO17025 and ISO9000 Quality Systems If you prefer to perform your own service Tektronix supports repair to the replaceable part level through providing for circuit board exchange services can be purchased through a variety of agreements to fit your specific requirements For more information regarding service offerings or service locations worldwide please see the Tektronix product catalog or visit us on our Customer Services World Center web site at http www tek com Measurement Service DEED SUE Table of Contents General Safety Summary Preface cee 8
223. es or regulates some characteristic of another signal Modulation The process of varying some characteristic of a signal with a second signal Noise Unwanted random disturbances superimposed on a signal which tend to obscure it Noise Floor The self noise of an instrument or system that represents the minimum limit at which input signals can be observed The spectrum analyzer noise floor appears as a grassy baseline in the display even when no signal is present Open Recall Restore Bring data into the application from a file of application native format OQPSK Acronym for Offset QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying PDF Acronym for Probability Distribution Function Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Peak Detection A detection scheme wherein the peak amplitude of a signal is measured and displayed In spectrum analysis 20 log peak is often displayed Platform Utility User available software applications provided with the instrument Primary Marker The marker displayed in the Single Marker mode whose frequency and or position is changed when tuning with the general purpose knob PSK Acronym for Phase Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the carrier phase is varied discretely in accordance with a digital code QAM Acronym for Quadrature Amplitude Modulation The process or result of a process in which the amplitude and phase of the carrier are varied concur rently by synthesizin
224. ess the Go to page 2 of 2 bottom side key to show the next menu page 3 Press the Assign Marker X to Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 as shown in Figure 3 153 The marker moves to another trace with the same horizontal position Tektronix RSA 3408A 02 4 54 PAUSE MARKER SETUP p V A A EEEE 5 Frequency 800 MHz RBW 500 Hz Cancel Back Span 100 kHz Trace 1 Freeze Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Normal All Markers Off Marker Ue ra T 36 85 dBm 63 84 dB 0 mi mHz Assign Marker X dBm The marker moves to another trace to Trace with the same horizontal position EENN gt Peak Search Freq Threshold 2k Assign Marker X to Trace Selects the trace to place the marker Trace 1 10 dB 100 dem Ani 1 Got 1 of Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz 3 o page 1 o Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 3 153 Changing the Trace 3 218 RSA3408A User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Markers in Multiple Views RSA3408A User Manual When you display multiple views on one screen markers displayed in those views are locked together Figure 3 154 shows a concurrent display of the spectrum and the spectrogram If you move the marker to the left on the spectrum the marker on the spectrogram moves to the left in accordance with that movement Conversely if you move the marker on the spect
225. everal pairs of frame header and frame data see Figure 3 170 The number of pairs in a block is indicated by ValidFrames in the file header The frame order is determined by FrameReverse in the file header Frame header Frame data Frame header Frame data Number indicated by ValidFrames Frame header Frame data Frame header Frame data J Figure 3 170 Data block Frame Header frame header is defined by the following structure struct frameHeader st short reserved1 short validA short validP short valid short validQ short bins short reserved2 short triggered short overLoad short lastFrame unsigned long ticks Descriptions of the frame header items follow RSA3408A User Manual 3 245 File Format 3 246 short reserved1 Internal use only short validA validP validI validQ These parameters indicate whether data of amplitude phase I or Q value converted into a two byte signed integer is written Q Indicates that data is not written in the file Indicates that data is written in the file There are seven combinations as listed in Table 3 30 Table 3 30 Combinations of validA P and Q validA short bins Shows the number of bins It is the same as Bins in the file header short reserved2 Internal use only short triggered Indicates whether the frame is before or after the trigger Q Indicates that the frame is
226. eviation from the center frequency versus time Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum SS aS EE SSS SSP er me A PT Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 12 8 ns Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Input Att 20 cB IQ versus Time an m Power versus Time 10 10 requency versus dB lime 100 100 E Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 100 MHz Span MHz 800 Hz 160 kHz 800 Hz Start 12 8 ms Scale 512 us Measurement Off Transient Frequency versus Time Main view Frequency deviation versus Time Figure 3 65 Frequency measurement RSA3408A User Manual 3 87 Time Analysis Time Mode CCDF Measurement CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function represents the probability that the peak power above average power of a measured signal exceeds a threshold The analyzer displays the ratio of peak power to average power along the horizontal axis and the probability that the ratio is exceeded along the vertical axis This CCDF analysis function and the real time analysis function allow you to measure the time varying crest factor in the time series for code multiplexing signals such as CDMA W CDMA signals and multi carrier signals such as OFDM signals This function is useful in designing amplifiers for CDMA W CDMA and OFDM CCDF Calculation Process The CCDF analysis obtains the distribution of the amplitude of observed signals and makes a gr
227. ew data See Figure 3 92 a Press the Frequency side key and enter the frequency of a correction point b Press the Amplitude side key and enter the amplitude correction value at the correction point c Press the Add New Point side key A new row is added containing the same frequency and amplitude correction values as the previous row Modify the values appropriately NOTE If you set the same frequency as the previous row the amplitude correc tion value in the previous row will be overwritten the next time you press the Add New Point side key It is not necessary to enter correction data in order by frequency The rows are automatically reordered in ascending order of frequency d Repeat step c to enter the frequency and amplitude correction values for all points e Press the Done Editing Table side key The input is accepted and a new row is added RSA3408A User Manual Setting Amplitude Tektronix RSA 3408A 5 To add correction data a Press the Select Point To Edit side key and turn the general purpose knob to move the cursor to the last row empty in the table b Perform step 4 to enter the frequency and amplitude correction values Edit Table Frequency 1 5 GHz SO kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Select Point To Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Edit Select Point To Edit Frequency Hz amplitude dB 4 Selects a line 1 10M 10 Frequen
228. ey 3 Press the Repeat side key again and select Continuous to return to the continuous mode When acquisition starts READY is displayed in the status indicator indicating that the analyzer is ready for trigger RSA3408A User Manual 2 41 Tutorial Using Markers and Peak Search 2 42 Measuring with a Single Marker The markers are used to measure amplitude or frequency and also to find the peak signal One or two markers can be displayed as Marker 1 and 2 To measure an absolute value only Marker 1 is used and that is called single marker mode To measure a relative value Markers 1 and 2 are used and that is called delta marker mode To position the markers use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad 1 Press the MARKER SETUP key on the front panel DEMOD SCALE LINES MARKERS TIME SELECT PEAK gt MARKER MARKER gt v SETUP MARKER SETUP key Selects the behavior of the markers 2 Press the Markers side key to select Single The marker appears at center on the waveform 3 The Marker X Position menu item is selected by default Turn the general purpose knob to move the marker to a measurement point see Figure 2 39 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Tektronix RSA 3408A Frequency 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Input Att 15 dB RBW 200 Hz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off
229. following m Lo Tangent line through the threshold point on the rising edge m L Tangent line through the threshold point on the falling edge m 14 Regression line calculated on the pulse top W Lp Regression line calculated on the pulse bottom These lines are displayed in red in the subview The pulse on and off times are determined by the nodes of these lines as shown in Figure 3 70 Basic Measurement Use this procedure to perform the pulse measurements Procedure Press the TIME key on the front panel 2 Press the side key Pulse Measurement Pulse Characteristics 3 Display the measurement waveform a Press the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel to set the frequency b Press the SPAN key on the front panel to set the span Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel to set the amplitude For information about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 4 For the channel power OBW and EBW measurements only You can select an FFT window for the measurement Refer to RBW FFT Menu on page 3 97 5 Press the TIMING key on the front panel to set the analysis range Refer to page 3 30 for details on setting analysis range 6 Press the VIEW DEFINE key on the front panel to select the measurement item s for display Refer to page 3 97 for the View Define menu By default only the pulse width measurement result is displayed on scre
230. g the vertical axis You can display this diagram in the eye diagram analysis in the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 55 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views View Scale Menu RSA3408A User Manual The Scale menu for the eye diagram contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects the vertical axis of the eye diagram see Figure 3 137 m Displays I signal level on the vertical axis default Q Displays signal level on the vertical axis Trellis Indicates phase on the vertical axis Eye Length Sets the number of symbols displayed on the horizontal axis The time required for movement between symbols is defined as 1 one Range 1 to 16 the default is 2 Marker 164 375 0 722 15 300 Os 22 153873 Us Marker 164 375us 0 594 15 300 m Os 22 153873 Us Marker 164 375us 493 3590 95 Trellis Os 22 153873 Us Figure 3 137 Eye diagram view 3 197 Setting Views AM AM View Setting Option 21 Only The AM AM view shows non linearity characteristics of a device under test DUT such as an RF amplifier representing reference amplitude along the horizontal axis and measured signal amplitude along the vertical axis Refer to AM AM Measurement on page 3 56 View Scale Menu Sca
231. g two orthogonal ASK waves see ASK Reference Level The signal level required to deflect the CRT display to the top graticule line Residual FM Incidental FM Short term displayed frequency instability or jitter due to instability in the spectrum analyzer local oscillators Given in terms of peak to peak frequency deviation and expressed in hertz or percent of the displayed frequency Residual Response A spurious response in the absence of an input signal Noise and zero pip are excluded Resolution Bandwidth RBW The width of the narrowest filter in the IF stages of a spectrum analyzer The RBW determines how well the analyzer can resolve or separate two or more closely spaced signal components Save Commit data to memory in application native format Secondary Marker The second marker displayed only in the Delta Marker mode Sensitivity Measure of a spectrum analyzer s ability to display minimum level signals expressed in volts or decibels Internal frequency IF bandwidth display mode and any other influencing factors must be given RSA3408A User Manual Glossary Shape Factor Skirt Selectivity The ratio of the frequency separation of the two 60 dB 6 dB down points on the response curve to the static resolution bandwidth Single Sweep Operating mode in which the sweep generator must be reset for each sweep Especially useful for obtaining single examples of a signal spectrum Span Per Division Spa
232. h Failure to do so may cause the operating system to shut down improperly When you power on the analyzer again wait at least 10 seconds after the last power off When you press the front panel ON STANDBY switch the analyzer starts a shutdown process including a Windows shutdown to preserve settings and then power off The LED next to the power switch changes to orange Avoid using the rear panel power switch or disconnecting the power cord to power off the analyzer To completely remove power to the analyzer perform the shutdown just described and then set the power switch on the rear panel to off NOTE Turning off the front panel power switch does not shut down the principal power supply completely To turn off the principal power supply press the principal power switch on the rear panel Turning off the principal power switch turns off the front panel LED When you do not use the analyzer for a long time or in case of emergency you should unplug the power cord RSA3408A User Manual Installation Restarting the Analyzer When Scan Disk Appears When the Display Brightness Is Not Even RSA3408A User Manual When the analyzer operates abnormally use the following procedure to turn the analyzer off and on again NOTE When the analyzer operates abnormally it will not be shut down by turning off the front panel power switch alone Make sure that the front panel power switch is in the turned off positi
233. he acquisition history control to view alternate In Out blocks Trigger level PC Trigger occurs Rise Fall Figure 3 104 Trigger level and slope 3 152 RSA3408A User Manual Trigger Data Data Data Free Run Continuous i i i acquisition Display acquisition Display acquisition Display gt Time Free Run Single Data i Data i Data i acquisition Display acquisition Display acquisition Display j f j f Time Press the RUN STOP key Press the RUN STOP key Press the RUN STOP key Data acquisition Triggered Continuous Display Display Display i Time Trigger Trigger Trigger Triggered Single Data acquisition Display Data acquisition Display i Time Press the Trigger Press the Trigger RUN STOP key RUN STOP key Figure 3 105 Acquiring and displaying data by Trigger and Repeat modes RSA3408A User Manual 3 153 Trigger Data Saving on Trigger Save on Trigger function is provided to save one block of input data to the IOT file each time a trigger occurs This function is enabled when the trigger mode is set to Triggered For details of file operations refer to page 3 229 The file name and location are as follows m File name yyyymmdd hhmmss ticks IQT Where yyyy is the year mm the month and dd the date hh is the hour mm the minutes and ss the seconds ticks is the time stamp of the final frame Refer to unsigned long ticks on page 3 246
234. he C N settling time is also indicated 3 113 Time Analysis Time Mode Random jitter settling time C N settling time Marker 3 716582031 ms 13116555033 ns E Settling Time 640us Setting Time 740us 1 15 ns dB 2 160 Ls ns dBc Hz 5 196582 ms 2 936582 ms 5 196582 ms 2 536582 ms Random jitter versus Time C N versus Time Figure 3 79 Settling time displayed in the subview Hints for Taking Measurements If the subview displays nothing check the following Subview Random Jitter vs Time or Integrated Phase Noise vs Time Make sure that the jitter measurement range set by Rj Start Stop Offset Fre quency in the Meas Setup menu is within the display range of the C N versus Offset frequency in the main view Subview C N vs Time Make sure that C N Offset Frequency in the Meas Setup menu is within the display range of the C N versus Offset frequency in the main view Error messages 3 114 Message No Carrier In this case lower Carrier Threshold Level in the Meas Setup menu Message Out of Span In this case decrease Carrier Bandwidth in the Meas Setup menu or match the carrier frequency with the center frequency RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Real Time Spurious Measurement RSA3408A User Manual Spurious measurements are made in real time The main view shows the spurious display same as in the spurious me
235. he acquisition length for a block is calculated using this equation One block acquisition length N One frame acquisition length One block acquisition length is set using Acquisition Length in the Timing menu One frame acquisition length is set internally depending on span and displayed in Spectrum Length in the Timing menu To set the acquisition length perform the following steps l Press the TIMING key on the front panel By default Acquisition Length is set to 64 ms and Spectrum Length 32 ms The number of frames in a block is 64 32 2 2 Press the Acquisition Length side key to change the value For example set 256 ms by turning the knob see Figure 2 54 TIMING SS Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 256 ms Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Acquisition E Input Att 15 dB Length s Acquisition Length om Sets the time length to 0 0 Acquisition acquire one block dBm dBm History Q 10 Spectrum Length 8 frames dy 8192 points zea 100 Spectrum Offset ern 100 s E Start 256 ms Scale 25 6 ms Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Analysis Length s 100 32m 96 Analysis Offset s 7 Start 232 ms Scale 3 2 ms Analog Demod AM Demod Acquisition Length ms 256 Figure 2 54 Changing the acquisition length In this case Acquisition Length is 256 ms and Spectrum
236. he calculation The analyzer discards invalid data and displays only valid data Valid data are called bin The number of bins depends on the span as shown in Table 3 25 Table 3 25 Number of bins Span Number of bins 20 MHz or less 801 36 MHz 721 40 MHz Baseband only 801 RSA3408A User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Compression Method Selecting Compression Method RSA3408A User Manual The number of bins is valid in all modes except Scalar mode The number of bins is meaningless in Scalar mode because it uses several physical frames to display data Generally the following calculations are used Frequency bandwidth of one bin Sampling rate Number of FFT points Number of bins Specified span Frequency bandwidth of one bin 1 The sampling rate varies depending on span Refer to Specifications in the RSA3408A Technical Reference for more details Generally because the number of horizontal pixels on screen is smaller than the number of bins bin data is compressed according to the number of pixels on screen when they are displayed see Figure 3 125 Data displayed on screen C 0 0 0 0 0 0 corresponds to each pixel t Bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Frame C O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Invalid data Valid data lt Invalid data E
237. he data ValidFrames Shows the number of frames in the data block This value divided by MultiFrames represents the number of frames that are scanned and synthe sized into one frame FramePeriod Shows the frame period setting in seconds The actual period is obtained by multiplying UnitPeriod described below by the difference of time stamp ticks of each frame in the data block UnitPeriod Shows the unit time in seconds of time stamp Ticks of each frame in the data block FrameLength Shows the time in second necessary to acquire one frame DateTime Shows the time when the analyzer acquired the last frame in a data block Change to space for display because files may have many characters GainOffset Shows the gain offset It is used for calculating the amplitude refer to page 3 247 MultiFrames Shows the number of frames in multi frame mode For example when MultiFrames 20 scanning 20 times with a span of 5 MHz makes a span of 100 MHz MultiAddr Shows the last frame address in the multi frame mode The range is 0 to MultiFrames 1 MultiFrames 1 indicates that the data ends just at the end of scans RSA3408A User Manual File Format IOffset Shows the offset value of I data It is used for calculating the data value refer to page 3 247 QOffset Shows the offset value of data It is used for calculating the data value refer to page 3 247 Data Block Each data block contains s
238. he maximum power consumption is 350 W Refer to Specifications in the RSA3408A Technical Reference for additional information on power and environmental requirements CAUTION Use only power cords that are approved for the country of use Using non approved power cords could result in fire or shock hazard 1 Plug the power cord into the AC input on the rear panel LJ o Jo AC input Figure 1 7 AC Input rear panel 2 Connect the plug of the power cord to a properly grounded outlet RSA3408A User Manual Installation Turning on the Analyzer 1 Turn on the principal power switch on the rear panel Principal power switch Jo of Jo Figure 1 8 Principal power switch rear panel When you turn on the principal power switch a voltage is applied to the analyzer standby circuit Make sure the LED next to the power switch on the front panel lights up in orange 2 Turn on the power switch ON STANDBY on the lower left of the front panel The LED next to the power switch changes to green 1 L JL 1 L J 1 L J J H WU UU UJ Power switch 000000000
239. he origin of an analysis range with the marker in the overview For the detail refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 30 Positions the marker to the highest peak signal Moves the marker lower or higher in frequency to the next signal respectively Moves the marker higher or lower in amplitude to the next signal respectively The definition of next can be set in the Marker Setup menu using Peak Search Freq Threshold or Hor Threshold Refer to Setting the Minimum Jump of the Marker on page 3 221 3 213 Marker Operation and Peak Search 3 214 MARKER SETUP Set up the behavior of the markers Select Marker Selects which marker is being controlled in the delta marker mode Same as MARKERS SELECT Marker X Position Sets the horizontal position of the selected marker Markers Selects the marker mode m Off Displays no marker m Single Displays one marker Marker 1 m Delta Displays two markers Marker 1 and 2 Reference Cursor to Marker X Enables the Reference Cursor at the same position as the selected marker Only available when the selected view can contain a reference cursor Reference Cursor Off Turns off the Reference Cursor Only available when the selected view can contain a reference marker Selected Marker Off Turns off the selected marker Markers Off Turns off both markers the reference cursor and all their readouts Assign Marker X to Trace When two traces are bei
240. he reference clock is available from the REF OUT connector on the rear panel 3 228 RSA3408A User Manual File Operations The instrument settings and waveform data can be saved in or loaded from files on the hard disk or 3 5 inch disk This section contains the following topics File Type File Type Load Save Menu Saving and Loading Files Entering a File Name Deleting a File Making Deleting a Directory The analyzer can make files with the following extensions RSA3408A User Manual STA Status file A status file used to save all the current menu settings You can save the settings you frequently use and reset the analyzer any time by loading the settings from this file Data file A file used to save time domain waveform data acquired on the data memory in the Demod Modulation Analysis and the Time Time Analysis modes I Q and T stand for in phase quadrature phase and time domain respec tively TRC Trace file A file used to save Trace 1 or 2 in the S A Spectrum Analysis mode The data in this file is loaded as the reference waveform in comparison displays between Trace 1 and 2 for example COR Amplitude correction file A file used in the S A Spectrum Analysis mode to save an amplitude correction table The data in this file is loaded when the amplitude correction is performed Refer to page 3 132 for the amplitude correction 3 229 File Operations Load Save Menu Figure 3 161
241. her the spurious signal comes from the input signal or the instrument The number of FFT points is normally limited to 8192 internally to avoid displaying internally generated spurious signals However you can remove this restriction and set the number of FFT points up to 65536 using the following steps 1 Display the measurement signal on the screen Press the RBW FFT key on the front panel 2 3 Press the RBW FFT side key to select FFT 4 Press the Extended Res side key to select On 5 Press the FFT Points side key and select the value with the general purpose knob The range extends up to 65536 in powers of 2 The waveform after FFT is displayed with the selected number of points Normal noise floor Increasing the number of FFT points causes the noise floor to go down and Spurious signal occasionally display spurious signals Figure 3 119 Generating spurious signals by increasing the number of FFT points 3 167 FFT and RBW FFT Window The phase of the waveform processed by FFT analysis is assumed to start at zero and end at zero so the waveform data is an exact multiple of one cycle If the phase at the start and end of the waveform are equal there is no unnatural discontinuity in the signal waveform and the frequency and the amplitude can be accurately calculated If the waveform data is not an exact multiple of one cycle the amplitudes at the start and end of the waveform will be different
242. iew But only when the subview is Power versus Time or Frequency versus Time Default Scale is used instead of Full Scale in the View Scale menu The time domain waveform is processed in units of 256K data points When the number of points equivalent to the analysis length TIMING Analysis Length is 256K or less pressing the Default Scale side key sets the horizontal scale so that the whole waveform in the analysis range is displayed When it is greater than 256K the horizontal full scale is set to the time equivalent to 256K points displaying the waveform of the analysis range partially Measures the spurious level of the RF signal It is the same as the spurious measurement in the S A mode refer to page 3 16
243. ime spurious measurement The main view displays the spurious measurement results when the carrier level exceeds Carrier Threshold Level in the Meas Setup menu The subview displays the measurement results in C N versus Offset frequency and Noisogram when the carrier channel power exceeds Carrier Threshold Level Selecting the Subview Content The real time spurious measurement subview includes displays specific to the signal source analysis The subview is selected by pressing VIEW DEFINE Subview Content Subview Content Selects the information displayed in the subview Spectrum Noisogram Color axis C N Horizontal axis Frequency Vertical axis Time Frame No This is like a spectrogram except that the color axis represents C N in dBc Hz m C N vs Offset Freq This is the same as the main view in the real time phase noise measurement see Figure 3 78 on page 3 113 3 116 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Frequency versus Time Measures changes in frequency A running average of the frequency versus time Measurement waveform is displayed in the main view and the frequency settling time is obtained However the measurement signal must meet the following conditions m The frequency shift does not exceed the threshold at the start and end of the analysis range m Frequency hopping occurs only once within the analysis range NOTE The frequency versus time measurement requires at least 2048 sa
244. ine Help Table 3 26 Front panel keys for online help Front panel key General purpose knob Function Contents window Descriptions window Sco the display up ordo Up key A Scrolls the display up Downkey W Scrolls the display down MARKERS A Scrolls the display up MARKERS W Scrolls the display down MARKERS lt q Scrolls the display to the left MARKERS p gt Scrolls the display to the right PEAK Switch the window to operate the cursor MARKER Se Selects a character string with hyperlink BKSP Returns to the previous display ENTER Accepts the selection and displays the corresponding content from the contents eh 8 Back Print Ed Locate Select the topic centenis Search Cancel Back View Front Panel Basic Procedure Button Help 8 3 User Manual EHE Setting Frequency and 5 Marker ar 1 E Setting Range E Vector Span FPL Setting Amplitude QFFT and RBW EHE Acquiring Data Use the following steps to set a frequency and span View Online User Manual Press the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel 2 Set the center frequency with the Center Freq side key View Online Programmer Manual The following two items are available in the S A E Trigger mode Trace Comparison Display Start Freq m Marker Operation and Pe sets the minimum value of the frequency C3 Display Line axis File Operations Stop
245. ing 1 6 Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 103 frequency versus time measurement 3 117 phase noise measurement 3 105 real time phase noise measurement 3 111 real time spurious measurement 3 115 spurious measurement 3 109 Single trigger 3 149 Single view 3 36 SPAN 3 121 Span menu 3 120 setting 3 119 vector span 3 126 Spectrogram S A with Spectrogram 3 18 view setting 3 187 Spectrum analysis S A mode 3 1 length 3 142 offset 3 143 view setting 3 186 Spurious measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 66 S A mode 3 16 Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 109 Stand setting up 1 13 Standard accessories F 3 Status display 2 11 Step size center frequency 2 22 setting 2 22 Stop and Show Results 3 150 Subview changing 3 34 modulation analysis screen 3 29 Symbol mapping B 1 Symbol table analysis 3 54 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 79 setting 3 196 Symmetrical filter Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 109 Synchronous operation external trigger 3 162 System menu 2 25 Index 5 Index T Tari RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 70 Technical Reference related documents xviii Time analysis Time mode 3 83 Time domain view setting 3 189 Time variation measurement 3 84 basic procedure 3 84 Timing menu 3 141 zoom 3 24 Trace comparison 3 173 displaying 3 176 menu 3 174 saving loading 3 180 Trigger 3 147 creating a mask 3 155 level 3 151
246. ing procedure Measurement Press the MEASURE key on the front panel 2 Press the Measurement Off side key The display returns to the spectrum view However the analysis mode is still in the Demod mode RSA3408A User Manual 2 63 Tutorial Turning Off the Power When you have completed the measurements turn off the power 1 Press the ON STANDBY switch at the lower left of the front panel Windows XP runs the shutdown process and the power source goes to the standby state with the orange LED on 2 Turn off the signal generator You have now completed the tutorial 2 64 RSA3408A User Manual Reference LEED GENESIS Spectrum Analysis S A Mode RSA3408A User Manual This section describes how to perform measurements in the spectrum analysis S A mode MODE Measure menu SIA Spectrum Analyzer T Channel Power S A with Spectrogram 1 ACPR Real Time SA _ C N DEMOD Real Time S A with Zoom OBW N Standard Carrier Frequency EBW Spurious TIME Figure 3 1 S A menu structure There are four items in the S A menu m Spectrum Analyzer Performs general spectrum analysis Refer to page 3 4 for details m S A with Spectrogram Performs spectrum analysis with spectrogram Refer to page 3 18 for details m Real Time S A Performs real time spectrum analysis with spectrogram Refer to page 3 20 for details m Real Time S A with Zoom Performs r
247. io 9 Offset Frequency kHz 6 Figure 3 9 Example of C N measurement 3 10 RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode OBW Measurement RSA3408A User Manual The OBW Occupied Bandwidth measures the frequency bandwidth using the ratio you specify for carrier signal power power within the span setting Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the OBW measurement contains the following control Power Ratio Specifies the power ratio of the carrier and span regions for calculating OBW see Figure 3 10 The default setting is 99 as defined in T 53 IS 95 standard Range 80 to 99 99 Power Ratio Cp Sp x 100 gt Cp Power of carrier region Sp Power of span region Figure 3 10 OBW measurement band power marker 3 11 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Figure 3 11 shows an example of the OBW measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A Frequency 100 MHz RBW Span 12 kHz Input Att 20 dB 200 Hz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off 0 dBm ah 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 12 kHz Occupied BandWidth 1 04064 kHz Frequency Error 4 48177 Hz Power Ratio 99 Spectrum Analyzer Occupied Bandwidth Power Ratio 9 0 99 Figure 3 11 Example of OBW measurement MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Power Ratio 9 E RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Carrier Frequency Measurement measuremen
248. ion This section describes how to install this instrument The topics are organized as follows m Unpacking to check contents Applying the power m Setting up the stand Functional check Powering off the analyzer Restart Backing up the user file Before starting installation you should become familiar with the General Safety Summary on page xv Unpacking to Check Contents 1 This product is packed in a cardboard box for delivery Before opening the box make sure that there is no damage on the surface Open the box check that the product has no damage and that all the standard accessories are found inside For a list of accessories refer to Standard Accessories on page F 3 If you find any damaged or missing components contact your local Tektronix representative It is recommended to keep the box and packing materials You may need them to send this product to Tektronix for calibration or repair least 5 cm 2 in on both sides for proper air circulation CAUTION The analyzer has exhaust fans on the side panel Leave a space of at RSA3408A User Manual 1 9 Installation Applying Power AC Power Requirements A Connecting the Power Cord Power on the analyzer using the following procedure The analyzer operates from an AC line frequency of 47 63 Hz over the range of 90 250 Volts without the need for configuration except the power cord Refer to page F 2 for the power cord options T
249. ion 21 only TIE Standard Transient CCDF Pulse Measurements Signal Source Analysis Option 21 only For details about the Standard menu refer to the optional software user manual Display Markers Menu MARKERS SELECT lt PEAK v MARKER SETUP Select Marker 1 2 Marker X Position Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor Off Selected Marker Off S A Mode is Step Size Marker X Center Freq Marker Freq Markers Off Assign Marker X to Trace Demod and Time Modes except CCDF 8 Is Analysis Time Marker Time S A Mode only Peak Search Freq Threshold Real Time S A with Zoom Mode Center Freq Marker Freq Analysis Time Marker Time Center Zoom Marker Freq Demod and Time Transient Modes only Peak Search Hor Threshold Reference Cursor to Trigger Reference Cursor to Trigger Output Time CCDF Mode only Peak Search Hor Threshold RSA3408A User Manual A 9 Appendix Menu Tree Display View Menu 1 of 3 SELECT SCALE Spectrum view Spectrogram view r Auto Scale Time domain view Auto Scale Constellation view Measurement Content Vector Constellation EVM view Auto Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Vertical Scale Vertical Start
250. ion analysis refer to page 3 54 The Scale menu for the symbol table contains the following controls see Figure 3 136 Radix Selects the radix for displaying the table from hexadecimal digit Hex octal digit Oct and binary digit Bin Rotate Sets the value start position The setting range is 0 to 3 This item is invalid in 1 4zt QPSK and GMSK modulations because absolute coordinates have no meaning Decoding Start Position Selects the decoding start position for the ASK FSK and GFSK signals with the decoding format of Manchester or Miller Auto Determines the decoding start position automatically Q Starts decoding from the beginning of a symbol 1 Delays the decoding start position by half a symbol Marker 199sym 01 0 01111010 01101110 01000101 00001010 11010011 11110110 01001001 01101111 32 11001001 10101001 10011000 00001100 01100101 00011010 01011111 11010001 54 01100011 10101100 10110011 11000111 11011101 00000110 10110110 11101100 96 00010110 10111110 10101010 00000101 00101011 11001011 10111000 00011100 128 11101001 00111101 01110101 00010010 00011001 11000010 11110110 11001101 160 00001110 11110000 11111111 10000011 11011111 00010111 00110010 00001001 192 01001110 1101008 Figure 3 136 Symbol table The eye diagram shows I or Q signal that is triggered on a clock signal aligned with the symbol rate representing time along the horizontal axis and amplitude or phase alon
251. ious formats such as spectrum spectrogram containing three dimensional information of frequency time and amplitude phase time versus amplitude frequency phase AM FM PM demodulation and optionally digital demodulation m DC to 8 GHz measurement frequency range m 100 Hz to 3 GHz measurement span and 36 MHz vector span W Real time analysis for seamless capture of time varying RF signals m Spectrum analysis of power ACPR C N OBW EBW and spurious m Analog modulation analysis of AM PM FM ASK and FSK signals m Digital modulation analysis ranging from BPSK to 2560AM Option 21 m Time characteristic analysis including pulse measurements m CCDF analysis m AM AM and AM PM distortion analyses Option 21 m Time correlated simultaneous views Spectrum display Spectrogram display frequency versus time versus power m Time domain display IS 95 standard m Analog demodulation display time versus modulation factor phase or frequency m Digital demodulation display Option 21 constellation eye diagram symbol table or EVM m 8 41 TFT color display and sturdy cabinet 1 1 Product Overview Application The RSA3408A can perform real time analysis for the following purposes m Signal quality analysis of analog and digital modulation Understanding frequency and spectral occupancy behavior over time Capture and characterization of undesired unknown or interfering signals Device system design or operational di
252. ipo decade f 16 008 En Vertical Start Sm OB Seale 5 Stop 37546 A lt Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 131 Setting the scale in CCDF view RSA3408A User Manual 3 191 Setting Views Constellation View Setting Option 21 Only The constellation view shows the signal represented by phase and amplitude in polar coordinate or IO diagram You can display it in the constellation analysis of the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 50 The constellation displays I and O components of the signal in two dimensions As the overall signal level changes both I and Q are automatically scaled to keep the size of the constellation relatively constant from one update to the next This new scale is then normalized to a unitless scale View Scale Menu Scale menu for the constellation view contains the following controls see Figure 3 132 Measurement Content Selects vector or constellation display see Figure 3 132 m Vector Selects the vector display Signals represented by phase and amplitude such as digitally modulated signals are shown in a polar coordinate or IO diagram The red point indicates the symbol position of the measurement signal and the yellow trace indicates the locus of the signal between symbols The magnitude of the error vector is evaluated by comparing the point where yellow traces are concentrated to the red point The cross marks indicate symbol
253. ired frames and the frame cycle becomes meaningless Refer to Vector Span on page 3 126 for details RSA3408A User Manual 3 145 Setting Timing Parameters 3 146 RSA3408A User Manual Trigger Triggers determine when the analyzer stops acquiring an input signal and displays measurement results To properly acquire data that you want to measure you need to set up the trigger conditions This section describes the following trigger parameters Mode Selects free run or triggered acquisition Repeat Determines whether to acquire data continuously or singly Source Selects a trigger signal source Level Sets a trigger level Slope Selects the rising or falling edge of a trigger signal Position Specifies a trigger position You must create a trigger mask when triggering in the frequency domain with Option 02 Refer to page 3 155 for creating a trigger mask A mark with optionally indicating a trigger point is displayed on the overview in the Demod and Time modes Refer to page 3 161 for information about displaying the trigger point RSA3408A User Manual 3 147 Trigger Trigger Menu Use the Trigger menu to set trigger conditions Press the TRIG key on the front panel and set the parameters using the following menu items NOTE Except for the Repeat menu item the Trigger menu is available when the measurement mode is set to Real Time S A Demod or Time S A mode except Real
254. isplay 99 Auto Carrier dim _ Reference data m m Peak amplitude Start 10 ms Scale 1 ms EET Average amplitude Ref Te SUEY Hz Peak 1 97 dBm Average 3 80 dam E Cato 77 2724213991 Measurement data gt pata Ref m Peak amplitude Peak 0 79 dm inear Signa Average 4 75 dam Region Unit m Average amplitude T dB dBm Linear Signal Region dB 10 0 A 95 Horizontal Start 15 dB Stop 15 db Division Digital Demod PDF 0 1 NOTE The reference line is displayed in the PDF graph when the subview content is AM AM or AM PM PDF graph Yellow line Measurement line Green line Recovered reference line Blue center line Average power Figure 3 50 PDF measurement RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RFID Analysis Option 21 Only This section describes the method of RFID Radio Frequency Identification analysis RFID is an automatic individual identification technology that uses a radio The IC microprocessors in which data is recorded and the antenna module are considered to be the A tag can be incorporated in various objects or living beings The tag information is read by the radio wave from the Interroga tor also called Reader Writer and if necessary the data is written in the tag This instrument performs an analysis based on the ISO IEC and EPC global standards related to RFID Compatible Standards RFID analysi
255. ix RSA 3408A 03 08 4 53 3 Corrections Sa TW Frequency 800 MHz RBW 50 kHz CCorrection gt ancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Amplitude Offset Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off dB 0 0 Frequency Offset dem Hz Indicates the amplitude correction is on Figure 3 95 Amplitude correction setup display The analyzer automatically saves the correction data in use when it is powered down The data will be erased when you press these keys AMPLITUDE gt Corrections Edit Table Clear Table m PRESET RSA3408A User Manual a Setting Timing Parameters You can adjust the length of various time parameters and the relationship between them in the Real Time S A Demod and Time modes using the Timing menu NOTE The Timing menu is not available in the S A mode except Real Time S A Timing Menu Figure 3 96 shows the Timing menu structure FREQUENCY CHANNEL Real Time S A mode l Acquisition Length Spectrum Offset Real Time S A with Zoom mode Acquisition Length AMPLITUDE Acquisition History Analysis Length Analysis Offset Frequency Center TIMING M Frequency Width DEMOD and Time modes Acquisition Length Acquisition History Spectrum Length Spectrum Offset Analysis Length Analysis Offset Output Trigger Indicator Figure 3 96 Timing menu structure RSA3408A User Manual 3 141 Setting Timing Parameters Timing Parameters in Demod and Time Modes 3 142 Th
256. lar noise lar window m Transient phenomenon or burst signal levels m Frequency resolution of Hamming is slightly before and after the event are remarkably superior to that of Hanning different Blackman Harris m Suitable for amplitude measurement but not m Signal that has one frequency ruling when a high suitable for frequency measurement order harmonic is detected 3 168 RSA3408A User Manual FFT and RBW Time domain data FFT window Time domain data resulting after windowing process Frequency domain data RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 120 outlines how frequency domain data is generated from time domain data The FFT window serves as a bandpass filter between time and frequency domain data The FFT frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy of each frequency component depends on the window shape Time z Frequency Figure 3 120 Windowing process of time domain data Generally window frequency resolution is inversely proportional to the accuracy of measuring amplitude levels For ordinal measurements select the window capable of separating the desired frequency component Such a window maximizes the accuracy of measuring amplitude levels and minimizes leakage error while separating each frequency component 3 169 FFT and RBW Window Type To select a proper window first select the rectangular window then sequentially switch to a window with less frequency resolution such
257. lays the graph with the signal peak value as the maximum value right edge of the horizontal axis CCDF Scale Sets the full scale of the horizontal axis of CCDF graph display when CCDF Auto Scaling is Off Range 1 to 100 dB Threshold Sets the threshold which defines the samples to be included in the CCDF calculation Range 250 to 130 dBm 3 90 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Measurement Display RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 67 shows an example of the CCDF measurement Total number of power samples used to calculate Frequency 1 5 GHz Span 15 MHz Input Att 20 dB Tektronix RSA 3408A the CCDF curve Acquisition Length 80 ps Accumulation 128000 points 100 decade 1 005 96 Start dB Vertical line at the crest factor urve green Gaussian line blue MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Display Gaussian Line Off Display 2 Reference Line Scale 2dB Stop B Peak 23 59 Average 33 35 Crest Factor 9 75 CCDF values in the CCDF curve Measurement results Peak dBm 10 96 dBm 35 8 96 1 96 dB 0 1 96 0 01 96 0 001 96 0 0001 96 itude Average amplitude Crest factor Figure 3 67 CCDF single view 3 88 dB 7 07 dB 8 50 dB 9 25 dB 9 72 dB 9 74 dB Off Store Reference Line Reset Measurement CCDF Auto Sca
258. le contents 3 75 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 76 RF Envelope Measurement Sample rate Effective sample rate Refer to Interpolation Points on page 3 72 Measurement table On Off time Period Duty cycle Measures time attributes for each envelope on the Interrogator to Tag or Tag to Interrogator signaling and displays the measurement table with the amplitude versus time waveform see Figure 3 58 NOTE In the analysis range there must be at least one pulse rise or fall If there is not an analysis is not performed Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu of the RF envelope measurement is the same as the power on down measurement Refer to page 3 69 E Sample Rate 640 L Effective Sample Rate 3 2 Index On width s Off width s 0 ERPE i 124 7981 25 241u 2 748 25 2 3 24 693u 25 262u 4 24 8031 25 271 5 74 88 25 1741 Ripple Rise Fall time Envelope number kHz Marker 74 929413327 ms 1 275 mV M Hz 40 Bugs us pet T 5 74 80 49 4 49 5 10 74 842 b Start 75 004101 ms Scale 7 5 is Each envelope contains three slopes selected by VIEW DEFINE Envelope Figure 3 58 RF envelope measurement main view Figure 3 58 shows an example of the RF envelope measurement main view The following items are provided in the measurement table see Figure 3
259. le menu for the AM AM view contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects a vector or dot display see Figure 3 138 m Vector Displays yellow lines between the dots default m Dot Displays the calculated result as a series of red dots By default the measurement results are displayed with the horizontal and vertical axes scaled automatically to fit the graph to the screen Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis to expand the graph Range The initial minimum value left edge to the maximum value right edge Vertical Start Shows the minimum value bottom of the vertical axis not settable Equal to the Horizontal Start value Vector display Dot display 5 5 dem dem 455 455 2 Vertical Start gt Ban dBm Horizontal Start Figure 3 138 Vector and dot displays for AM AM view 3 198 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views AM PM View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu Vertical Scale u RSA3408A User Manual The AM PM view shows non linearity characteristics of a device under test DUT such as RF amplifier representing reference amplitude along the horizontal axis and phase error along the vertical axis Refer to AM PM Measurement on page 3 58 The Scale menu for the AM PM view contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects a vector or dot display see Figure 3 13
260. ling On Off CCDF Scale dB 15 Threshold dBm 150 3 91 Time Analysis Time Mode Changing the View You can change the contents of the views by pressing the VIEW DEFINE key with the following controls Show Views Selects the view style m Single Displays only the view selected by the VIEW SELECT key m Multi Displays the overview the subview and the main view Overview Content Selects the content of the overview Spectrogram m Waveform power versus time Refer to page 3 183 for information about setting the view scale and format Figure 3 68 shows an example of the CCDF multi view Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum 5 T Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 20 Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Display Input Att 20 dB Accumulation 128000 phints Gaussian Line Off On Maximum value red line 20 Display NT dBm Reference Line Average blue line Off On dy 10 Store dB Reference Line 29 Reset Start 20 ms Scale 2 ms Center 2 1175 GHz Span 5 MHz CCDF Peak amplitude gt Peak 23 59 dBm Auto Scaling Average amplitude Average 33 35 dBm 35 8 96 100 On Off Crest factor gt Crest Factor 9 75 dB Threshold CCDF measurement results 10 36 3 88 dB dBm i Yor 7 07 dB decade 150 0 1 8 50 dB 001 96
261. ll Table Scrolls the measurement table in the main view horizontally Display Area Valid for the constellation and the eye diagram views Sets the percentage of display area sample points from the beginning in the selected burst Range 0 1 to 100 default 100 100 represents the whole burst RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Changing the Vertical Unit The unit for the vertical axis of the graph displayed in the main view is V volts by default You can also select dBm and W watts using VIEW SCALE Unit NOTE The measurement table in the main view always displays the results for waveform data with the default unit of W Selecting the unit does not affect the table contents Constellation Measures modulation attributes on the Interrogator to Tag or Tag to Interrogator Eye Diagram and signaling and displays the constellation eye diagram or symbol table see Symbol Table Figure 3 60 Modulation Depth 9 468 Modulation Index 4 969 Frequency Error 1 03 Auto Bit Rate OFF Calculated Bit Rate 10 Calculated Symbol Rate 40 Auto Tari Calculated Tari data O Calculated Tari data 1 Measurement results refer to Table 3 12 Display Area setting 96 95 Hz k Bit sec k Sym sec refer to page 3 78 Marker 30 271875 ms 1 027 2 2 0 deg Display Area 100 0 2 983 Marker 30 271875 ms 33 1 2 400
262. llation Eye Diagram Symbol Table Power Power on pq uc eer E m elm e eem a ie See utes Measurement items m Carrier frequency OBW Occupied Bandwidth EBW Emission Bandwidth Maximum EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power m Spurious m ACPR Adjacent Channel Leak Power Ratio m Transmission Power on down rise fall time m Settling time Overshoot m Undershoot m On Off width Duty cycle On Off ripple Rise Fall time m Modulation depth Modulation index m Frequency error m Bit rate or Tari RF envelope Constellation Eye diagram Symbol table Tag to Interrogator signaling response Interrogator to Tag signaling command Carrier Spurious Time ACPR Figure 3 51 RFID waveform and measurement items 3 62 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Basic Procedure RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 51 illustrates the measurement items with a typical RFID waveform The analyses are performed on the carrier in the Carrier Spurious and ACPR measurements on the transmission power on down in the Power On Down measurement and on the Interrogator to Tag or Tag to Interrogator signaling in the RF Envelope Constellation Eye Diagram and Symbol Table measurements Use the following procedure to perform the RFID analysis NOTE If you use a signal input INPUT Signal Input Port other than RF the measur
263. ls Center Frequency That frequency which corresponds to the center of a frequency span expressed in hertz Clear Erase Presets memory to a prescribed state usually that denoting zero Controls User accessible mechanisms to modify setup parameters dBm A unit of expressed power level in decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt dBmV A unit to express voltage levels in decibels referenced to 1 millivolt dBuV A unit to express voltage levels in decibels referenced to 1 microvolt Decibel dB Ten times the logarithm of the ratio of one electrical power to another Depth of Modulation The difference between the maximum and the minimum of the RF envelope amplitude expressed as a percentage of the maximum RF envelope level Display Law The mathematical law that defines the input output function of the instru ment The following cases apply Linear A display in which the scale divisions are a linear function of the input signal voltage Square Law Power A display in which the scale divisions are a linear function of the input signal power Logarithmic A display in which the scale divisions are a logarithmic function of the input signal voltage Display Line A horizontal or vertical line on a waveform display used as a reference for visual or automatic comparison with a given level time or frequency RSA3408A User Manual Glossary RSA3408A User Manual Display Reference Level A designated vertical positi
264. lysis S gt CCDF TIME Pulse Characteristics Phase Noise Spurious Real Time Phase Noise Real Time Spurious Frequency versus Time Figure 3 62 Time menu structure There are three items in the Time menu Transient Performs time variation measurement Refer to page 3 84 for details CCDF Performs CCDF measurement Refer to page 3 88 for details m Pulse Measurements Performs pulse measurements Refer to page 3 93 for details m Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only Performs signal source analysis Refer to page 3 103 for details Measurement Screen Layout The measurement screen layout in the time analysis Time mode is the same as in the modulation analysis Demod mode Refer to Measurement Screen Layout on page 3 29 for the view functions setting an analysis range and changing the view content RSA3408A User Manual 3 83 Time Analysis Time Mode Time Variation Measurement Basic Procedure 3 84 You can select the following time variation measurement items using the MEASURE key when you select Transient in the Time menu versus Time Power versus Time m Frequency versus Time The time variation measurements have no Meas Setup menu items Follow these steps to perform the time variation measurement 1 Press the MODE TIME key on the front panel 2 Press the Transient side key and select a measurement item 3 Display
265. m 30 Figure 1 15 Reference level setting and A D overflow indicator e Using the numeric keypad set the reference level back to 0 dBm Press 0 gt ENTER in that order on the keypad RSA3408A User Manual Installation 6 Check the spectrogram display a Press the S A key on the front panel b Press the S A with Spectrogram side key Check that the spectrogram is displayed on the lower side of the screen see Figure 1 16 c Press the RUN STOP key on the front panel to stop data acquisition Confirm that the trace display freezes and PAUSE is displayed in the status indicator at the top right of the screen Status indicator Tektronix RSA 3408A 2107 14 13 14 INPUT CAL EE quu Frequency 100 MHz RBW 100kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Channel Power Marker 100 MHz 21 06 dBm 71 06 dBm Hz dBm ACPR 10 db C N 100 OBW dBm Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Carrier Frequency EBW Spectrogram Spurious 100 dem 0 block Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Measurement Off S A with Spectrogram Measurement Off Figure 1 16 Spectrogram display RSA3408A User Manual 1 17 Installation Powering Off the Analyzer A Turn off the power switch on the front panel CAUTION When you power on or off the analyzer you must use the front panel power switc
266. ment processes and application specific operations It also describes the front panel keys and menus Appendices provide additional information including the menu tree accessories and cleaning information First time users should install the analyzer in Getting Started then go to Operating Basics and perform the tutorials beginning on Page 2 31 The analyzer uses Microsoft Windows XP as the operating system This manual does not describe common usage of Windows XP Refer to your Windows manuals as necessary RSA3408A User Manual xvii Preface Related Documents In addition to this user manual the following documentation is available for your analyzer Tektronix part numbers are supplied in Appendix F Options and Accessories m RSA3408A Programmer Manual standard accessory PDF contains the programming commands and other information related to controlling the analyzer over the GPIB interface m RSA3408A Technical Reference standard accessory PDF provides specifications and performance verification procedures m RSA3408A Service Manual optional accessory describes how to verify the characteristics of adjust disassemble assemble and troubleshoot the analyzer and contains the information required for repair including module replacement and calibration PDF Manuals programmer manual and technical reference described above are PDF documents the file size is about 3 MB and 2 MB respectively These files
267. mes and a frame is defined as a number of FFT data points The number of frames acquired at one time is called block size In the normal spectrum analysis the instrument acquires data for the block size determined from RBW and creates one spectrum waveform In the real time mode the instrument acquires data for the block size specified with the Timing menu performs the FFT process and creates spectrum waveforms for each frame so that you can observe spectrum variation in time seamlessly The difference between normal and real time modes is shown in Figure 3 20 The block size determined from RBW one frame FFT points A 2 Normal spectrum analysis Frame N 2 Frame 1 Frame 0 Time gt amp 2 Y I The block size specified with the Timing menu one frame 1024 points fixed A Real time mode Frame N 2 Frame 1 Frame 0 Time 1 TO ux Er Figure 3 20 Difference between normal and real time modes 3 20 RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Table 3 3 shows the features of the real time mode compared with the normal spectrum analysis Table 3 3 Features of the real time mode Item Normal spectrum analysis Real time mode Span Up to 3 GHz arbitrary value can be set Up to 36 MHz 1 2 5 sequence Trigger Only the Repeat menu item available All the Trigg
268. mission Bandwidth Measurement page 3 14 Spurious Spurious Signal Measurement page 3 16 Pressing the Measurement Off side key stops the measurement and returns to the original spectral display 1 Press the S A key and then the Spectrum Analyzer side key 2 Select the measurement item refer to Table 3 2 3 Display the spectrum waveform of the measurement signal a Press the RUN STOP key on the front panel to start data acquisition NOTE For details on setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 119 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 127 b Set the frequency by pressing the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel Setthe span by pressing the SPAN key on the front panel d Setthe amplitude by pressing the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel 4 Setthe following Measurement Setup controls by pressing the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Channel Power This measurement calculates power in the range specified using a band power Measurement X marker shown in Figure 3 4 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the channel power measurement contains the following controls Integration Bandwidth Sets frequency range for power measurement see Figure 3 4 Measurement Filter Shape Selects a filter shape from these types m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Enters rolloff
269. mples If the analysis length is set to less than 2048 an error message Analysis Length is too short is displayed Also 1024 samples stable in frequency are required at both the start and end of the analysis range to calculate the average frequency Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for the frequency versus time measurement Freq Settling Threshold Sets the threshold for judging the frequency settling time see Figure 3 81 When frequency deviation exceeds this value hopping is considered to have occurred Setting range 10 Hz to Span default 10 Hz Smoothing Factor Sets the number of points from which the running average is calculated Setting range 1 to analysis range 2 or 9999 points default 1 S Frequency Frequency settling time Mean value Freq Settling Threshold on the bottom on the top Threshold gt Settling time from trigger gt Trigger Time Figure 3 81 Frequency versus Time measurement parameters RSA3408A User Manual 3 117 Time Analysis Time Mode Tekironix RSA 3408A 20 9 PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 2 4453 GHz Acquisition Length 40 ms Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Freq Settling Input Att 0 dB Threshold Hz Marker 4 490 p 13 ms Marker 2 4424 He 300k iew 1 23 006 dB 26 274 Overview Power versus Time umet m e P m Smoothing dem dBm Factor E 10 def Subview Spectr
270. n Figure 1 19 Center offset To run the center offset calibration do the following 1 Press the CAL key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate Center Offset side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process 1 24 RSA3408A User Manual Calibration Calibrating DC Offset Calibrating IF Flatness RSA3408A User Manual The DC offset calibration cancels DC offset that appears at 0 Hz in the baseband DC to 40 MHz When you change the amplitude setting and the DC offset is too obvious run the DC offset calibration C offset appears at 0 Hz in When D y the baseband run the calibration Figure 1 20 DC offset To run the DC offset calibration do the following 1 Press the CAL key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate DC Offset side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process The IF flatness calibration adjusts the IF intermediate frequency flatness using the internal signal generator It optimizes the flatness of gain and phase within the IF bandwidth automatically This calibration is recommended in digital modulation analysis To run the IF flatness calibration do the following 1 Press the CAL key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate IF Flatness side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds
271. n Display Time Range Selects how to display a pulse in the subview m Adaptive Default Adjusts the horizontal scale for each pulse to fit the pulse width to the subview m Max Adjusts the horizontal scale to fit the maximum pulse width in the analysis range to the subview 3 98 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Guidelines Determines whether to display the guidelines in the subview m On Default Displays the guidelines in the subview m Off Hides the guidelines in the subview For the guidelines refer to Definition of Pulse On Off Time on page 3 94 Menu Off Turns off the side menu to expand the measurement results and waveform view area on screen To recall the side menu press the key on the front panel When View Results For is A Single Pulse Select a pulse with Select Pulse Select a measurement item with Select Measurement Tekironix RSA 3408A 0 17 04 PAUSE view DEFINE D O WW A B Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 40 5 Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Show Views Input Att 25 dB Single Mult 0 1 T Overview dem Content Waveform 10 Select 100 Measurement uw Peak Power 100 Select Pulse 4 dem S Indicates the position of the pulse MEME E Scale 10 A selected with Select Pulse Start 20 ms Scale 2 ms 10 616406 ms 10 609609 ms Ew
272. n Horizontal Stop Sets the maximum value right edge of the horizontal axis Range Horizontal Start x2 to Span 2 Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Range The minimum offset frequency of the analyzed data to Horizontal Stop 2 Vertical Size Sets the range of the vertical axis Range 40 to 40960 frames Vertical Start Sets the start frame number for the vertical axis Range the number of frames in the analysis range to 0 Zero 0 represents the latest frame Color Scale Sets the scale value subtracting the minimum power value from the maximum power value of the color axis The level is represented in 100 steps 100 colors from the minimum value blue to the maximum value red in the default state Range 10 to 100 dB in a 1 2 5 sequence Color Stop Sets the maximum value top of the color axis Range 70 Color Scale to 70 dBc Hz Full Scale Sets the maximum value of the color axis to 0 and the height to 100 dBc Hz 3 201 Setting Views 103 30 Color Stop Ty Vertical Size Color Scale 130 dBc Hz gt Vertical Start uU 100kHz 115 463 dBc Hz 2 956582031 ms 0 Start 100kHz End 18MHzf Horizontal Start Figure 3 141 Setting the scale in noisogram view 3 202 Horizontal Stop RSA3408A User Manual Za Display Line The analyzer provides a convenient
273. n Store Reference Line Reset Measurement CCDF Auto Scaling Threshold On Off Pulse Measurements Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only Phase Noise Lr Carrier Threshold Level Real Time Phase Noise Carrier Bandwidth C N Sideband Max Pj Threshold Analyze Symmetrical Filter Carrier Tracking Spurious gt Carrier Threshold Level Real Time Spurious Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Symmetrical Filter Carrier Tracking Scroll Table Analyze Carrier Bandwidth C N Sideband Frequency versus Time gt Freq Settling Threshold Smoothing Factor Real Time Spurious Only Upper Lower Minimum Offset Frequency Maximum Offset Frequency Rj Start Offset Frequency Rj Stop Offset Frequency Real Time Phase Noise Only Off Off Off Off Upper Lower r Pulse Characteristics Analyze Detection Threshold Channel Bandwidth OBW Power Ratio EBW Meas Level Counter Resolution P P Phase Time Offset Measurement Filter None Gaussian Filter Bandwidth for Gaussian filter Filter Parameter for Gaussian filter Frequency Recovery 1st User Off Frequency Offset RSA3408A User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Display Mode Menu SIA Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram Real Time S A Real Time S A with Zoom DEMOD Standard DEN Analog Demod Digital Demod Opt
274. n Div Frequency difference represented by each major horizontal division of the graticule Spectrum The frequency domain representation of a signal wherein it is represented by displaying its frequency distribution Spectrum Analysis The technique or process of determining the frequency distribution of a signal Spectrum Analyzer A device for determining the frequency components of a signal Spectrum Length The amount of time required to acquire one frame Spurious Response A response to a spectrum analyzer wherein the displayed frequency is not related to the input frequency Vertical Scale Factor Vertical Display Factor The number of dB volts etc represented by one vertical division of a spectrum analyzer display screen View An area or window of the display screen which contains information all of the same type such as a Spectrum View or a Power versus Time View RSA3408A User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 RSA3408A User Manual Index Index A A D overflow 3 131 AC line frequency 1 10 Accessories F 1 optional F 4 standard F 3 ACPR measurement 3 7 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 68 Acquisition history 3 142 length 3 142 AM signal measurement 3 39 AM AM measurement 3 56 view setting 3 198 AM PM measurement 3 58 view setting 3 199 Amplitude correction 3 132 menu 3 127 3 128 setting 3 127 Analog modulation analysis 3 37 basic procedure 3 37 Analysis
275. n example of a digitally modulated signal 10 dB 100 dem Center 800 MHz Span 200 kHz Figure 3 124 Compared display RSA3408A User Manual 3 179 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Saving Loading Waveform Data Saving a Trace Loading a Trace Trace Compression Relation between Frame 3 180 Bin and Pixel You can save the waveform data currently being acquired in a file and load the saved data as trace 1 or 2 To save Trace 1 or 2 in a file 1 Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 3 Press the Save Trace side key and select the destination file For information about file operations refer to page 3 229 and subsequent pages To load Trace 1 or 2 from a file 1 Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 3 Press the Load Trace side key and select the source file The trace is automatically frozen For information about file operations refer to page 3 229 and subsequent pages Although waveform data are acquired as 1024 points per frame the acquired data are displayed after being thinned out and compressed due to the limitation of the number of pixels on screen The compression method and the procedure to select the method are described in the following section One frame contains FFT points 1024 of data Part of the data in the frame is invalid for t
276. n of analysis range Do the following steps in place of step 5 on the previous page 1 2 Press the MARKER SETUP key on the front panel see Figure 3 28 Press the Markers side key to select Single The marker appears on the screen Rotate the general purpose knob to move the marker to the measurement starting point Press the MARKER key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The green line resizes to the specified range MARKER MARKER RSA3408A User Manual MARKERS TIME A SELECT gt W MARKERS MARKER SETUP key Figure 3 28 MARKERS keys 3 31 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Specifying Analysis Range Using the Marker and Reference Cursor You can use the marker and the reference cursor in place of the Analysis Length and the Analysis Offset side keys to specify the analysis range Perform the following steps in place of steps 4 and 5 on page 3 30 1 2 Overview IR 20 28125 ms Reference Cursor Marker Press the VIEW SELECT key on the front panel to select the overview Press the MARKER SETUP key on the front panel Press the Markers side key to select Single The marker 0 appears on the screen Rotate the general purpose knob to move the marker to the measurement start point Press the Reference Cursor to Marker X side key The reference cursor appear
277. n setting range Measurement mode Span setting range except real time 50 Hz to 40 MHz 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 8 sequence 50 Hz to 3 GHz 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 8 sequence Real Time S A 100 Hz to 40 MHz 1 2 5 sequence aou 100 Hz to 20 MHz 1 2 5 sequence and 36 MHz In Demod and Time modes the frequency and span settings must meet the following conditions Center frequency Span 2 lt Upper limit of the frequency setting range RF mode lt 40 MHz Baseband Center frequency Span 2 gt Lower limit of the frequency setting range RF mode gt 0 Hz Baseband When you enter an out of range value the value is limited based on these conditions In spectrum analyzer mode the out of range values are allowed but part of the trace may not be displayed because the analyzer cannot acquire that part of the waveform see Figure 3 85 3 124 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Frequency and Span Center frequency Span and frequency settings should fit within the maximum allowable span setting Maximum allowable span setting for the analyzer lt gt Set span Center frequency A part of the trace is not displayed in these two settings Not displayed Set span Center frequency Not displayed Set span Figure 3 85 Relationship between the frequency and span settings RSA3408A User Manual 3 125 Setting Frequency and Span Vector Span 3 126
278. n the Demod and Time modes Acquisition History Same as in the Demod and Time modes Analysis Length Same as in the Demod and Time modes Analysis Offset Same as in the Demod and Time modes Frequency Center Sets the frequency of the center of analysis area Frequency Width Sets the frequency width of the analysis area Trigger output point Frequency Analysis Offset Time Analysis area Analysis Length Frequency Width Frequency Center Figure 3 98 Timing parameters in the zoom mode 3 144 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Timing Parameters Seamless Acquisition The frame data is acquired every designated time The interval between one acquisition and another is called a frame cycle as shown in Figure 3 99 Frame length A Frame 0 Frame 1 Time Frame cycle Figure 3 99 Frame cycle If the frame cycle is longer than the frame length time gaps appear between frames The shorter the frame cycle the more precisely you can observe the spectrum waveform variation in time You can acquire frames without gaps when the span setting is below 36 MHz Acquiring frame data without a gap is called Seamless Acquisition See Figure 3 100 Seamless acquisition Frame 0 m Frame 1 Frame 2 Time Figure 3 100 Seamless acquisition When the span is set greater than 36 MHz one display frame is reproduced from multiple acqu
279. nalysis page 3 83 Pulse Measurements Pulse characteristics analysis Signal Source Analysis Signal source analysis Option 21 1 Contains optional analysis functions Refer to Appendix F Options and Accessories for optional software RSA3408A User Manual 2 23 Functional Overview Starting Stopping Data Use the RUN STOP key on the front panel to start or stop data acquisition Acquisition MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL RUN STOP Starts or stops data acquisition SPAN TRIG RBW AMPLITUDE FFT Figure 2 21 Starting Stopping data acquisition If acquisition and measurements are waiting for a trigger or are paused stopped pressing this key will start the acquisition If acquisition and measurements are running pressing this key will stop acquisition and measurements aborting the current acquisition Restoring Default Settings analyzer saves the settings when it is turned off When you turn on the analyzer it starts with the settings as they were when it was shut down UTILITY HELP PRESET PRESET key restores default settings for current measurement mode INPUT LOAD CAL SAVE CN SYSTEM SYSTEM Reset All to Factory Defaults M restores all default settings for the analyzer Figure 2 22 Restoring default settings W Pressing the PRESET key returns the instrument settings t
280. nd Span Setting Menu FREQUENCY CHANNEL 3 120 FREQUENCY CHANNEL Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq Channel SPAN Channel Table Refer to page 3 122 Center Freq Step Same As C F Center Freq Step Same As Span Step Size AMPLITUDE n Span TIMING Start Freq Stop Freq S A mode except Real Time S A only Sets frequency or channel Center Freq Sets the center frequency Numeric entry field Range 0 Hz to 8 GHz Start Freq Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Numeric entry field Range 0 Hz to 8 GHz Stop Freq Sets the maximum value right edge of the horizontal axis Numeric entry field Range 0 Hz to 8 GHz NOTE Start Freq and Stop Freq are available when the measurement mode Mode is set to spectrum analysis S A except real time The values of Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq and Span are set in conjunction with each other The relationship is described as Stop Freq Start Freq Span When one value is set the other values are automatically changed accordingly Channel Selects a channel number to set the center frequency from a channel table specified with the Channel Table menu item Channel Table Selects a communication standard to load the channel table Select a channel number with the Channel menu item For using the channel tables refer to page 3 122 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Frequency and Span Center
281. nder a setting that uses multiple physical frames for one scan A D OVERFLOW may be displayed for a moment and then turned off immediately When a single high level signal is applied under a setting using one physical frame in one scan the same phenomenon may be observed 3 131 Setting Amplitude Amplitude Correction If an external device such as an antenna or preamplifier is connected to the analyzer you can amplitude correct the waveform by considering the amplitude characteristics of the external device NOTE The amplitude correction function is fully controlled only in the S A mode except real time mode In the other modes Real Time S A Demod and Time amplitude offset control is available Refer to page 3 139 for setting the offset Figure 3 90 shows the concept of amplitude correction In this example a signal with 80 dBm is sent to a preamplifier with a gain of 20 dB around 1 GHz In the normal display without any amplitude correction the signal peak becomes 80 20 60 dBm If amplitude correction is performed the peak becomes 60 20 80 dBm to obtain the original peak value of the input signal Normal display Corrected display 420 dB 60dBm Amplitude Input signal correction 80 dBm 20 dB 1 GHz wu gt Preamplifier gt 80dBm 1 GHz 1 GHz Figure 3 90 The amplitude correction concept 3 132 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Amplitude Amplitude Correction Pre
282. ng displayed moves the selected marker to another trace with the same horizontal position Available only if two traces are being displayed Peak Search Freq Threshold S A mode only Sets the minimum frequency jump that should be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down Peak Search Hor Threshold Demod and Time modes only Selects the minimum horizontal jump that should be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down Marker X Vertical Spectrogram view in the Real Time S A mode only Specifies the number of the frame in the spectrogram to display the spectrum The latest frame is number zero Older frames have larger negative numbers Same as Spectrum Offset in the Timing menu Reference Cursor to Trigger Demod and Time modes only Enables the reference cursor at the same position as the trigger in the overview Reference Cursor to Trigger Output Demod and Time modes only Enables the reference cursor at the same position as the trigger output in the overview RSA3408A User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Using Markers Measuring with a Single Marker Tektronix RSA 3408A This section shows some examples of marker operation NOTE If multiple views are displayed on the screen select the view to operate the markers using the VIEW SELECT key on the front panel The selected view is shown with a white frame To measure amplitude or frequency with a single ma
283. ng items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for Phase Noise measurement see Figure 3 74 Carrier Threshold Level Sets the threshold for carrier detection A signal with amplitude above the threshold is detected as a carrier Setting range 100 to 30 dBm default 20 dBm Carrier Bandwidth Sets the carrier bandwidth Setting range Span 100 to Span 2 default Span 100 C N Sideband Selects the sideband for measuring phase noise m Upper Default Measures the upper sideband Lower Measures the lower sideband Minimum Offset Frequency Sets the minimum frequency in the phase noise measurement range as the offset from carrier frequency Setting value 10 Hz default 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz or 10 MHz Maximum Offset Frequency Sets the minimum frequency in the phase noise measurement range as the offset from carrier frequency Setting value 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz or 100 MHz default Rj Start Offset Frequency Sets the random jitter measurement start frequency as the offset from carrier frequency Setting range 10 Hz to Rj Stop Offset Frequency set value default 10 Hz Rj Stop Offset Frequency Sets the random jitter measurement stop frequency as the offset from carrier frequency Setting range Rj Start Offset Frequency set value to 100 MHz default 100 MHz NOTE The integrated phase noise and random jitter will be calculated if the frequency range from Rj Star
284. nore Region Sets the frequency range with the carrier standard signal peak as the center in which spurious signals are not to be detected for avoiding false recognition of spurious signals see Figure 3 15 Range 0 to Span 2 Hz default 0 Hz Spurious Threshold Sets the threshold for detecting spurious signals see Figure 3 15 Enter the value relative to the peak of standard signal Range 90 to 30 dB Excursion Sets the deviation amount of amplitude that is considered to be spurious see Figure 3 15 A signal with amplitude higher than the set value of the Spurious Threshold and larger than the set value of Excursion is considered to be spurious Range 0 to 30 dB default 3 dB Scroll Table Horizontally scrolls the spurious table displayed in the lower part of the screen Up to 20 spurious signals are displayed Ignore Region r Standard signal peak Signal Threshold Spurious Threshold Excursion Normal signal Spurious signal Figure 3 15 Setting up spurious signal measurement RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Figure 3 16 shows an example of spurious signal measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 0 43 2 MEAS SETUP Frequency 2 GHz RBW Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Signal Threshol Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off dBm E 0 Ignore Region dBm Hz _ Spurious Threshold dB Spurious marker 20 E
285. nt 4 Adjust the amplitude and frequency to display the measurement waveform Refer to page 3 119 for setting frequency and span Refer to page 3 127 for setting amplitude 5 Setthe analysis range in the overview This is not necessary in the Phase Noise and the Spurious measurements Refer to page 3 30 for details of the analysis range settings If you use the zoom function do these steps Press the VIEW DEFINE key Press the Overview Content side key and select Zoom Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 24 for setting the analysis area on the spectrogram with the zoom function 6 Press the MEAS SETUP key and set the measurement parameters Refer to Meas Setup Menu in each measurement description 7 Press the Analyze side key and carry out the analysis This is for the Real Time Phase Noise and Real Time Spurious measure ments only Selecting the Phase Unit The phase unit is set to degrees by default It is possible to select degrees or radians as the unit using the following procedure 1 Press the SYSTEM key on the front panel 2 Press the Instrument Setup side key 3 Press the Angular Units side key to select degrees or radians 3 104 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Phase Noise Measurement RSA3408A User Manual C N Carrier to Noise ratio is measured at the offset frequency from the carrier Jitter is also calculated from the phase noise data Meas Setup Menu The followi
286. nt X P n X P n for n 1 max X p orn 22 Min Hold Displays only the minimum value at each data point x p n for n 1 min X p 2 2 RSA3408A User Manual 3 177 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Averaging Example This section shows how to use averaging and the compared display Performing Averaging Average and display Trace 1 l Display the spectrum of the measurement signal 2 Pause data acquisition to simplify the operation If you are acquiring the data in the continuous mode press the RUN STOP key to stop the acquisition Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel Press the Select Trace side key to select 1 Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select Average for example Press the Number of Averages side key and set 64 for example Press the RUN STOP key to acquire data 9e e 2 Press the Reset Average side key to perform averaging again The averaged waveform is displayed on screen see Figure 3 123 The average count is indicated in the right top portion of the screen Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 y TRACE AVG Frequency 100 MHz RBW 500 Hz Cancel Back Span 100 kHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Select Trace Input Att 20 cB Trace 2 Off Select Trace Selects Trace 1 or 2 to control n Average count usd dem i Trace 1 or 2 Cn Freeze Off Selects the display method
287. nt refer to Appendix C NOTE IQ Input option 03 and Digital IQ Output option 05 function connectors are factory pre installed The functions are enabled by software key code entry Ensure that the required key code has been accepted by the instru ment before you use these functions Refer to Displaying Versions and Installed Options on page 2 26 for entering the key code 8 ACline connector Connect an AC power cable WARNING The instrument uses a power plug as a disconnecting device N The instrument shall be installed where the plug can be easily reached by the operator When you do not use the instrument for a long time or in case of emergency you should unplug the power cord 9 PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH When this switch is on the internal standby circuit is energized Refer to page 1 10 for applying power RSA3408A User Manual 2 5 Interface Maps 2 6 Side Panel Interface A SS KC 05 eJ Figure 2 3 Side panel 1 Indicator Indicates whether the disk drive is active CAUTION When this indicator is lit you must not remove the disk from the disk drive If you do so the data stored on the medium may be destroyed or an error may occur 2 Floppy disk drive A 3 5 inch 2HD 1 44MB 2DD 720KB disk formatted for MS DOS can be used to save and load data and settings 3
288. ntify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A Protective Ground CAUTION Earth Terminal Refer to Manual RSA3408A User Manual EEUU CEN Preface This is the user manual for the RSA3408A 8 GHz Real Time Spectrum Analyzer It covers the following information Describes the capabilities of the analyzer and how to install it m Explains how to operate the analyzer how to control acquisition of processing of and input output of information m Shows the menu structure and lists accessories of the analyzer About This Manual This manual is composed of the following chapters m Getting Started describes the product overview architecture installation and calibration of the analyzer m Operating Basics explains the functions of the front rear and side panels and menu items of the analyzer and describes the basic menu operations This section also provides tutorials for beginners It gives step by step procedures for measurement using a signal generator m Reference explains the basic concepts of measure
289. nual Trigger output point Frequency Analysis Offset Time Zoomed area Analysis Length gt Frequency Width Frequency Center Figure 3 23 Zoom domain settings using the Timing menu The zoomed area can be set by using the marker and reference cursor instead of entering a numeric value in the Timing menu see Figure 3 24 The mouse can also be used in the marker operation refer to USB connectors on page 2 7 for connecting the mouse In the following procedure Mouse indicates an operation where the mouse is used 1 Press the VIEW SELECT key on the front panel and select the spectrogram with zoom function Mouse Click on the spectrogram to select it and then go to step 4 2 Press the MARKER SETUP key on the front panel 3 Press the Markers side key and select Single to display the marker 4 Move the marker to the upper left point of the zoomed area using the Marker X Position and the Marker X Vertical side keys Mouse Move the mouse pointer to the upper left point of the zoomed area and left click to put the marker on it 5 Press the Reference Cursor to the Marker X side key to display the reference cursor on the marker position Mouse Right click to display the reference cursor 6 Move the marker to the lower right point of the zoomed area using the Marker X Position and Marker X Vertical side keys Mouse Move the mouse pointer to the lower right point of the zoomed area and left click
290. ny time NOTE You cannot save data in an existing file 1 Press the SAVE key on the front panel 2 Press one of the following side keys depending on the type of data to save Table 3 27 File save operation T Current Block Data of the block currently displayed Current Area Data currently shown in the main view 3 To enter a new file name skip to step 5 3 232 RSA3408A User Manual File Operations RSA3408A User Manual 4 To use a preset file name press the Save to file name side key see Figure 3 162 as an example Save to TraceA Save to TraceB Save to TraceC Filename ABC Saves data to the preset file trace file in this example Figure 3 162 Save to the preset file lower right of the screen There are three preset names for each file type as shown in Table 3 28 Table 3 28 Preset file names File type Save file name State sta StateA StateB StateC Data iqt IQDataA QDataB IQDataC Trace trc TraceA TraceB TraceC CorrA CorrB CorrC Correction cor The data is saved to the file with that name in the C My Documents folder The file extension is automatically added according to the file type 3 233 File Operations 5 To enter a new file name Tektronix RSA 3408A Press the Folder side key Select the destination folder using the following menu items see Figure 3 163 m Open Folder opens the selected folder m Sele
291. o 36 MHz Press 3 6 MHz in that order on the keypad RSA3408A User Manual 1 15 Installation 5 Check the reference level a Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel b Make sure that the reference level is set to 0 dBm with the Ref Level side key Check that 0 dBm is displayed on the upper left side of the graticule see Figure 1 15 Use the general purpose knob to set the reference level to 30 dBm d Confirm that A D OVERFLOW is indicated in the red box at the top center of the screen Make sure that 30 dBm is displayed on the upper left side of the graticule and that the spectrum waveform is distorted as shown in Figure 1 15 AJD overflow indicator Reference level setting Tektronix sA asoan 080 s NM MN ave TUDE OS oA Frequency 100 MHz RBW 100 kHz Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level E Input Att O0 dB Trace 2 Off dBm Marker 100 MHz 26 65 dBm 76 65 dBm Hz _ 30 1 Reference level Auto Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RFAtt Mixer RF Att dB 0 10 Mixer Level dB dBm Nominal Vertical Scale dB div TE 10 Vertical Units dBm dBv vjuv W Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Corrections Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Ref Level dB
292. o the factory defaults for the current measurement mode Pressing SYSTEM Reset to Factory Defaults sets all parameters for all measurements and modes to the default values 2 24 RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Setting System Parameters UTILITY HELP PRESET INPUT LOAD CAL SAVE SYSTEM C Ne 07 Figure 2 23 System menu System Menu RSA3408A User Manual The System menu sets system wide parameters such as the display brightness factory defaults and GPIB address Display Brightness Reset All to Factory Defaults Remote Setup Version and Installed Options Instrument Setup Scroll Option Key Change Option Key Angular Units Phase Degrees Radians Digital IQ Output igital IQ Outpu L on Of The System menu contains the following controls Display Brightness Adjusts the brightness of display Setting range 0 to 100 Reset All to Factory Defaults Sets all parameters for all measurements and modes to the default values Remote Setup Sets GPIB parameters Refer to the RSA3408A Programmer Manual for details Versions and Installed Options Displays the current versions of all standard and optional software and any third party software licenses Refer to page 2 26 for information about displaying versions and installed options Instrument Setup Sets the fundamental parameters for measurements m Angular Units Select
293. of the following communication standards CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 FL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 FL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 FL CDMA2000 IMT2000 FL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND FL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 RL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 RL CDMA2000 IMT2000 RL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND RL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS RL CDMA2000 700MHz Cellular FL CDMA2000 700MHz Cellular RL CDMA2000 N A Cellular FL CDMA2000 N A PCS FL CDMA2000 450 20k FL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k FL CDMA2000 SMR800 FL CDMA2000 TACS BAND FL CDMA2000 N A Cellular RL CDMA2000 N A PCS RL CDMA2000 450 20k RL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k RL CDMA2000 SMR800 RL CDMA2000 TACS BAND RL DCS1800 DL DCS1800 UL GSM850 DL GSM850 UL GSM900 DL GSM900 UL 802 11 IEEES802 11b g NMT450 DL NMT450 UL PCS1900 DL PCS1900 UL TD SCDMA W CDMA DL W CDMA UL FL Forward link RL Reverse link UL Uplink DL Downlink Press the Channel side key and select a channel number For example when selecting channel 10551 in the W CDMA downlink table the center frequency is automatically set to 2 1102 GHz RSA3408A User Manual Setting Frequency and Span Using the Marker and Peak Search RSA3408A User Manual You can use the search function to position the marker on the spectrum peak and then set the center frequency to the frequency at the marker as shown in Figure 3 84 In S A Mode You can set the peak s
294. oint C to five divisions from the left edge c Press the Set Selected Point Y side key and set the vertical position of Point C to four divisions from the top edge see Figure 3 112 Point Figure 3 112 Adding Point C The trigger mask is stored in the internal memory RSA3408A User Manual 3 159 Trigger 3 160 10 If you started with a multi view display return using the following steps a Press the VIEW DEFINE key on the front panel b Press the Show Views side key and select Multi 11 Set the trigger a Press the TRIG key on the front panel b Set Slope and Position appropriately 12 Start data acquisition using the RUN STOP key The analyzer stops data acquisition when the trigger event occurs The trigger mask is stored in the internal memory for each measurement mode of S A Real Time S A DEMOD Analog Demod Digital Demod TIME Transient and CCDF When you press the PRESET key on the front panel the instrument settings are reset to the default only for the currently active mode RSA3408A User Manual Trigger Trigger Point Indicator Overview Indicating Trigger Output RSA3408A User Manual In the Demod modulation analysis and the Time time analysis modes is displayed in the Timing field on the overview indicates the trigger occurrence point in the Triggered mode and is used as a reference point f
295. on Turn off the principal power switch on the rear panel Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn on the principal power switch again BAGA UNOS um Turn on the front panel power switch If the analyzer was not shut down properly Windows Scan Disk may run when you turn on the analyzer When the Scan Disk screen appears wait until the Scan Disk is completed If an error is detected refer to the Windows manual for treatment For more information on accessing Windows on the analyzer refer to Using Windows XP on page 2 28 It is a characteristic of the LCD Liquid Crystal Display panel to sometimes have uneven brightness dead pixels dots that never turn on or stuck pixels dots that always stay on This is neither a malfunction nor a defect and not a cause for repair or exchange Installation Backing Up User Files Using LAN You should back up your user files on a regular basis to ensure against system failures The Back Up tool is located in the System Tool folder in the Accessory folder of Windows Start this tool to select the files and folders to back up For more information use Windows online help For more information about access to Windows on the analyzer refer to Using Windows XP on page 2 28 The following files should be backed up more frequently m Status files sta m Data files iqt m Trace files trc W Correction files cor Refer to page 3 229 for details on file operations The analyze
296. on 26 cdma2000 1xEV DO analysis software m Option 27 3GPP Release 5 downlink HSDPA analysis software m Option 28 TD SCDMA analysis software m Option 29 WLAN 802 11a b g analysis software m Option 40 3GPP Release 6 HSUPA analysis software m Option C3 Calibration service 3 years m Option C5 Calibration service 5 years Option D1 Calibration data report m Option D3 Calibration data report 3 years requires Option C3 F 1 Appendix F Options and Accessories m Option D5 Calibration data report 5 years requires Option C5 m Option R3 Repair service 3 years m Option R5 Repair service 5 years W Power cord options listed in Table F 1 Table F 1 Power cord identification Plug configuration Option number North America 120 V Universal Euro 230 V United Kingdom 230 V North America 240 V Switzerland 220 V Japan A6 100 V China A10 240 V No power cord supplied A99 F 2 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix F Options and Accessories Standard Accessories Optional Software User Manuals RSA3408A User Manual All analyzers in this series are shipped with the accessories listed in Table F 2 Table F 2 Standard accessories Accessory English language user manual English language programmer manual PDF only 1 English language technical reference PDF only 1 U S power cord USB mouse USB keyboard BNC N adapter Front cover Operating system restore floppy disk 1
297. on Bandwidth for the pulse on spectrum m Frequency Deviation Measures the signal frequency change from the center frequency over time during the pulse on For information about Channel Power OBW and EBW measurements refer to the S A Spectrum Analysis mode Channel Power page 3 5 OBW page 3 11 EBW page 3 14 The frequency deviation measurement is based on the Frequency versus Time measurement in the Transient mode Refer to page 3 87 3 93 Time Analysis Time Mode Definition of Pulse On Off Time The maximum peak 3 94 100 Mean power during the pulse on lt Pulse Pulse Phase gt Pulse Ripple lt Pulse on gt lt Peak Power Pulse Width amp Repetition Interval 7 Pulse off Figure 3 69 Definition of pulse characteristics The pulse on and off times are fundamental parameters for pulse measurements These parameters are defined in Figure 3 70 The threshold is a level to detect a pulse relative to the maximum peak in the acquired data You can set it by using Detection Threshold in the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 100 I Pulse on Threshold Pulse off e Figure 3 70 Definition of pulse on off RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode The Lo L4 La and Lg lines represent the
298. on History Analysis Length Analysis Offset Frequency Center Frequency Width Demod and Time modes Acquisition Length Acquisition History Spectrum Length Spectrum Offset Analysis Length Analysis Offset Output Trigger Indicator 4 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree RUN STOP TRIG RBW FFT TRACE AVG Mode Repeat Stop and Show Results Mode Triggered Source Save on Trigger Save Count Save Count Limit Source Power External Level Slope Position Source Freq Mask Define Mask Slope Position Real Time S A Mode FFT Start Point FFT Overlap FFT Window Free Run Triggered Continuous Single Power Freq Mask External Option 02 only On Off On Off Rise Fall Rise and Fall Fall and Rise Select Next Point Set Selected Point X Set Selected Point Y Delete Selected Point Insert New Point Set All Points to Maximum Set All Points to Minimum Reset Mask to Default n Out In and Out Out and In Same as in the S A mode Refer to page A 3 Pulse Measurements in the Time Mode FFT Window Rolloff Ratio Demod and Time Modes Average Average Count Average Term Control RSA3408A User Manual Nyquist Blackman Harris 4B Off Expo Repeat Appendix A Menu Tree Measurement Menu 3 of 3 S A Mode MEAS MEASURE E MES Channel Power
299. on representing a specified input level The level may be expressed in dBm volts or any other units Distortion Degradation of a signal often a result of nonlinear operations resulting in unwanted signal components Harmonic and intermodulation distortion are common types Dynamic Range The maximum ratio of the levels of two signals simultaneously present at the input which can be measured to a specified accuracy Export Save data to a file in a format other than application native FFT Time The length of time covered by one frame whether or not an RBW filter is applied to the FFT This was previously called a multi frame Filter A circuit which separates electrical signals or signal components based on their frequencies Frame A series of time contiguous samples long enough in duration and at a sufficient sample rate to produce a spectrum view of a specified span and RBW Frequency The rate at which a signal oscillates or changes polarity expressed as hertz or number of cycles per second Frequency Band The continuous range of frequencies extending between two limiting frequencies expressed in hertz Frequency Domain Representation The portrayal of a signal in the frequency domain representing a signal by displaying its sine wave components the signal spectrum Frequency Drift Gradual shift or change in displayed frequency over the specified time due to internal changes in the spectrum analyzer where other
300. ons made through other software or hardware which pools or aggregates connections Warranty 2 Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product Parts modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance replaced parts modules and products become the property of Tektronix In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance
301. or setting the Timing parameters in the Free Run mode However indicates the trigger output point when the trigger source is Power and the slope is Rise and Fall Fall and Rise or when the trigger source is Freq Mask Scale 5 12 ms div Time Start 51 2 my T indicates the trigger point Figure 3 113 Trigger point display You can use the trigger output to synchronize the analyzer with other instru ments In the Demod modulation analysis and the Time time analysis modes O indicating the trigger output time can be also displayed in the Timing field on the overview The default status for O is off Follow these steps to display the indicator 1 Press the TIMING key on the front panel 2 Press the Output Trigger Indicator side key to select On appears on the overview The trigger output timing is determined by the analyzer hardware so that you cannot change it For the external trigger the output timing coincides with the trigger occurrence For other triggers there is no relationship between the timing of the trigger occurrence and that of the trigger output To connect the trigger output to other instruments use the TRIG OUT connector on the rear panel see Rear Panel on page 2 4 The output specification is H level 22 0 V L level 0 4V and output current 1 mA 3 161 Trigger Synchronous Operation with External Instruments 3 162 Use the
302. orm Ref Level Sets the maximum top edge of the vertical axis The available range depends on the measurement frequency band as shown in Table 3 18 Table 3 18 Reference level setting range Frequency band Setting range Baseband DC to 40 MHz 30 to 20 dBm 5 dB step RF 40 MHz to 8 GHz 50 to 30 dBm 1 dB step IQ Option 03 only 10 to 20 dBm 5 dB step Auto Level Automatically adjusts reference level for the best system perfor mance based on power measurement within the set span NOTE An input signal within 10 MHz of the center frequency may cause Auto Level to choose the wrong reference level even if the span setting does not make the signal appear on sereen To prevent nonlinear operation the reference level may need to be adjusted manually Auto Level will force the analyzer to acquire new data which will overwrite the existing data To scale the existing displayed waveform do not use Auto Level Instead use the View Scale menu Figure 3 88 Setting the amplitude RSA3408A User Manual Setting Amplitude RF Atten Mixer Input signals are attenuated through the attenuator and converted to IF signals through the mixer in the down converter refer to Architecture on page 1 6 The attenuation level and the mixer level are normally set automatically Select RF Att or Mixer to manually set either parameter if necessary Auto Set
303. page 3 229 RSA3408A User Manual 3 77 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 78 Changing the View The contents of the view can be changed in the next item by pressing the VIEW DEFINE key The next items are the same as the carrier measurement Refer to page 3 65 Show Views Overview Content Subview Content Selects the information displayed in the subview m Spectrum W Power versus Time m Frequency versus Time Zoomed Spectrum Spectrum for a zoomed area in the Zoom display m RF Envelope Waveform same as the RF envelope in the main view m Constellation Waveform same as the constellation in the main view m Eye Diagram Waveform same as the eye diagram in the main view Symbol Table Same as the symbol table in the main view Refer to page 3 24 for the zoom function Refer to page 3 66 for setting the view scale Burst Selects the burst number to be measured Refer to page 3 77 Figure 3 59 The setting range is limited as follows default 0 Burst setting Edge setting 20000 for Edge refer to page 3 75 Envelope Selects the envelope number the index number in the RF envelope measurement table that displays the waveform in the main view Range 0 to 65536 Refer to page 3 77 Figure 3 59 Guidelines Selects whether to display the guidelines red color along with the waveform in the main view Default Displays the guidelines m Off No guideline is displayed Scro
304. pectrum to the center frequency using the marker search functions when the measurement mode is S A spectrum analysis 1 Display the spectrum on the screen 2 Press the PEAK key on the front panel The maximum peak spectrum is detected and the marker is moved to that point Use the arrow keys lt gt A V to move the marker to another peak 3 Press the MARKER gt key and then the Center Freq Marker Freq side key The center frequency is set to the frequency at the marker position Center Freq Marker Freq Center frequency Figure 3 84 Setting the center frequency using MARKER The frequency set in this procedure may not take effect with all span settings Refer to Frequency Setting Range on page 3 124 In Demod and Time Modes The MARKER key is used to set the analysis range when the measurement mode is Demod or Time modulation and time analyses Refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 30 for details In the overview of spectrogram or the subview of spectrum you can use the Center Freq Marker Freq side key as in the S A mode described above 3 123 Setting Frequency and Span Frequency Setting Range Frequency bands are defined as shown in Table 3 17 based on the analyzer hardware architecture The frequency band is switched automatically by a frequency setting Span setting range depends on the frequency band and the measurement mode S A Demod or Time Table 3 17 Frequency and spa
305. peration of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 LIMITATIONS ON REVERSE ENGINEERING DECOMPILATION AND DISASSEMBLY You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US origin You agree to comply with all applicable international and n
306. positions of the ideal signal Constellation Selects the constellation display It is the same as the vector display except that only symbols of the measurement signal are indicated in red and the locus between symbols is not displayed Marker 1 6875 ms Marker 1 6625 ms 747 258 m 699 635 m 698 933 m 639 286 m 15 B y tot LS 2 061 2 061 2 061 Vector display Constellation display Figure 3 132 Vector and constellation displays 3 192 RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views EVM View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu Vertical axis EVM The horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates EVM amplitude or phase in the EVM view You can display this view in EVM analysis of the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 51 The Scale menu for the EVM view contains the following controls see Figure 3 133 Auto Scale Sets the starting value and the scale of the vertical axis automatical ly to size the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Start Available when the vertical axis represents EVM Sets the minimum value bottom of the vertical axis Vertical Offset Available when the vertical axis represents magnitude or phase error Sets the center val
307. proximately depending on waveform to perform the analysis properly in the power on down RF envelope constellation eye diagram and symbol table measurements NOTE If the bit rate or Tari setting value is out of range the analyzer cannot distinguish between the rising edge of the power on CW and that of the RF envelope pulse In the measurement setup enter the bit rate or Tari and perform the analysis using the following steps 1 Press the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel Press the Standard Type side key and select the standard Select Link Modulation Type and Decoding Format as appropriate Select Off in the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari side key rr PES Press the Bit Rate side key and set the bit rate or press the Tari side key and set the Tari Enter a value near the true value within about 20 of the true value 6 Press the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari side key to select On 3 73 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode NOTE When you set Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari to On the analyzer estimates the bit rate or Tari from your input value and performs measurements based on the estimate If you want to use your input value directly in measurements without using an estimate leave the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari setting Off 7 Press the Analyze side key to perform the analysis The analysis is performed based on the bit rate or Tari set value After the analysis has been completed the estimate
308. r description 3 107 RBW description 3 163 menu 3 164 Real Time S A operation 3 20 RSA3408A User Manual Index Real time phase noise measurement Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 111 Real time spurious measurement Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 115 Real time analysis 1 3 S A mode 3 20 Rear panel 2 4 Removable hard disk drive Option 06 using D 1 Repeat trigger 3 149 Restart 1 19 RF envelope measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 76 RF INPUT Caution 1 12 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 61 ACPR measurement 3 68 carrier measurement 3 64 constellation 3 79 eye diagram 3 79 Power on down measurement 3 69 RF envelope measurement 3 76 spurious measurement 3 66 symbol table 3 79 RMS description 3 177 RMSExpo description 3 177 RUN STOP key 2 24 S S A mode 3 1 S A with Spectrogram operation 3 18 Save menu 3 230 Save on trigger 3 154 Scalar mode span 3 126 Scale menu AM AM 3 198 AM PM 3 199 CCDF 3 191 Constellation 3 192 EVM 3 193 eye diagram 3 196 noisogram 3 201 PDF 3 200 spectrogram 3 187 spectrum 3 186 symbol table 3 196 time domain view 3 189 Scan Disk 1 19 Screen elements 2 9 Screen copy 3 253 Seamless acquisition 3 145 SELECT MARKERS 3 213 RSA3408A User Manual Setting analysis range 3 30 Setup display 2 13 Shifting Q data OQPSK 3 47 Side keys 2 3 Side panel 2 6 Signal amplitude limit 1 12 Signal process
309. r in best fit curve polynomial AM AM AM PM AM AM distortion graph Refer to Maximum Coefficient on page 3 56 coefficient coefficient Red points Measurement points Yellow lines Measurement lines Blue line Reference line Pink line Best fit line Oblique lines Linear signal region Figure 3 47 AM AM measurement RSA3408A User Manual 3 57 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode AM PM Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays an AM PM distortion graph for measuring non linearity characteristics of a DUT device under test such as an RF amplifier Figure 3 48 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of recovered reference amplitude versus measured phase error and the table of AM PM coefficients extracted from curve fitting Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the AM PM measurement has the same controls as in the AM AM measurement except for the Linear Signal Region Mask Refer to page 3 56 Overview Power versus Time Subview Constellation SSS Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 1 6 ns Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets NOTE Constellation is selected for the subview by VIEW DEFINE a 6 be e Subview Content 16AM dj Modulation Parameters 94 Auto Carrier dBm Timing F 15 On Off Start 240 Lis Scale 24 Us 1 454 1 454
310. r is equipped with a LAN Ethernet interface as standard allowing you to save data in peripheral devices such as other PCs hard disks and MO via a network Refer to page 2 6 for connecting to LAN Installing Other Applications 1 20 The analyzer incorporates Windows XP as the operating system Some combina tions of internal measurement applications and external applications may cause deterioration in the basic performance or conflicts between these applications It is not recommended that you install other applications including Micro soft Word Excel and Outlook on the analyzer If you install an external application you do so at your own risk keeping in mind that it may lower the performance of the analyzer RSA3408A User Manual Calibration RSA3408A User Manual Perform these routines to optimize the analyzer performance Gain calibration m Center offset calibration m DC offset calibration m flatness calibration Display brightness adjustment Each item is explained in this section 1 21 Calibration Cal Menu Use the CAL key to calibrate the analyzer UTILITY HELP PRESET INPUT LOAD f ow CAL Calibrate All eS Calibrate Gain Calibrate Center Offset SYSTEM Calibrate DC Offset Calibrate IF Flatness Auto Calibration Yes No Service Figure 1 17 Calibration menu structure The Cal menu contains the following controls Calibrate
311. r versus Time dy 10 Frequency versus cB Time 100 dem 100 dm Start 64 ms Scale 6 4 ms Center 100 MHz Span 200 kHz 500 mv Q 100 mv 500 my Start 64 ms Scale 256 ms Measurement Off Transient IQ versus Time Main view 1 0 voltage vs Time waveform are displayed in yellow and green respectively Figure 3 63 IQ versus Time measurement RSA3408A User Manual 3 85 Time Analysis Time Mode Power versus Time Observes signal power change over time Figure 3 64 shows an example The Measurement main view displays power level versus time Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum Tektronix RSA 3408A 2 AM PAUSE JMEASURE qox SES a Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 64 rhs Cancel Back Span 200 kHz Input Att 20 dB IQ versus Time MONONEN cs Power versus Time 49 10 Frequency versus Time 100 Bm 100 Timing dBm jet AU PC CAN Vu Start 64 ms Scale 6 4 ms Center 100 MHz Span 200 kHz dBm 10 dB 100 dem Start 64 ms Scale 2 56 ms Measurement Off Transient Power versus Time Main view Power versus Time Figure 3 64 Power variance measurement 3 86 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Frequency versus Time Observes signal frequency change over time Figure 3 65 shows an example Measurement The main view displays the frequency d
312. re displayed on screen by default To display one view perform the following steps l Press the VIEW DEFINE key on the front panel VIEW VIEW SELECT key VIEW DEFINE key SCALE LINES MARKERS 2 Select a view to make the single display by pressing the SELECT key in the VIEW area The selected view is surrounded by a white box 3 Press the Show Views side key to select Single Figure 3 33 shows the one view display Marker 3 2 ms Marker 99 9 MHz 11 146 dBm 97 776 dBm 0 dBmH dBm 10 10 dB dB Marker 3 2 ms j v 39 6179437 117 kHz 160k Hz 100 100 dem L dBm m enter Marker 3 2 ms k 39 6179437 117 kHz Single 32k s 32k Hz Hz idiv 160k Hz The selected view is surrounded by a white box i Start 3 2 ms Scale 320 jus div One view display Figure 3 33 One view display 3 36 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Analog Modulation Analysis Basic Procedure RSA3408A User Manual You can select the following measurement items with the MEASURE key when you select Analog Demod in the Demod menu AM Demod page 3 39 FM Demod page 3 40 PM Demod page 3 41 IO versus Time page 3 42 Pulse Spectrum page 3 43 Follow this procedure to perform analog modulation analysis 1 2 3 4 Press the MODE DEMOD key on the front panel Press the Analog Demod side key Select a measurement item Display the m
313. re indicated in yellow and green respectively Figure 3 37 IQ versus time measurement 3 42 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Pulse Spectrum Measurement RSA3408A User Manual Performs FFT for the analysis range specified in the overview On specifying the analysis range refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 30 Figure 3 38 shows the pulse spectrum measurement The main view shows the pulse spectrum FFT for the analysis range The pulse spectrum measurement has no Meas Setup menu items Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 30 Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Input Att 20 dB 10 10 dBm dBm dy 10 110 110 Timing T dBm Start 32 ms Scale 3 2 ms Center 1 GHz Span 5 MHz sal w Center 1 GHz Span 5 MHz Main view Pulse spectrum FFT for the analysis range specified in the overview Figure 3 38 Pulse spectrum measurement 3 43 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Digital Modulation Analysis Option 21 Only 3 44 You can select the following measurement items using the MEASURE key when you select Digital Demod in the Demod menu Constellation EVM IO Frequency versus Time Power versus Time Symbol Table Eye Diagram AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF page 3 50 page 3 51 page 3 52 page 3 53 page 3 54 page 3 55 page 3 56 page 3 58 pag
314. reated after data acquisition is complete When logging data is acquired continuously a data block is added each time the data is acquired In data logging since the internal program adds data blocks while acquiring data when the program creates the file header the date and time for the last frame is not known The program therefore adds date and time data to the end of the file If you examine the file size and find the date and time at the end use them in place of DateTime in the file header Refer to DateTime on page 3 244 for the format of date and time 3 241 File Format 3 242 File Header The number of frames ValidFrames refer to page 3 244 is not known at the time the program creates the file header so the internal program temporarily writes ValidFrames 0 If the value of ValidFrames of the file header is 0 examine the file size and calculate the true value of ValidFrames In this case the correction data block the dummy header and the extended correction data block are always added The subsections below provide details on each block The following is an example of the file header Although Type is always written at the beginning the order of the other items is not fixed and some new items may be added 40416Type RSA3408AIOT FrameReverse Off FramePadding Before Band RF3 MemoryMode Zoom FFTPoints 1024 Bins 801 MaxInputLevel 0 LevelOffset 0 CenterFrequency 7 9G Frequency Offset 0 Span 5M BlockSi
315. ree dimensional view The horizontal and vertical axes indicate frequency and frame number respectively and the color axis represents amplitude Display the spectrogram using the following steps 1 Press the MODE S A key DISPLAY UTILITY VIEW S A key gt SIA SELECT DEFINE HELP PRESET DEMOD SCALE LINES INPUT LOAD MARKERS TIME A SELECT CAL SAVE 2 Press the S A with Spectrogram side key 3 Ifno waveform is displayed press the RUN STOP key to acquire data The spectrum and spectrogram are displayed concurrently see Figure 2 44 dem Spectrum gt 10 VEN arms Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Spectrogram gt Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Figure 2 44 Concurrent display of spectrum and spectrogram 2 50 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial 4 Display the spectrum and spectrogram side by side a Press the VIEW DEFINE key DISPLAY MODE VIEW SELECT DEFINE SCALE LINES MARKERS A ri FAT VIEW DEFINE key Modifies display format b Press the View Orientation side key to select Tall Tektronix RSA 3408A VIEW DEFINE Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Spectrogram Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Off On 0 Show Views dem 207 Single
316. reen copy is saved in the file the screen returns to the original waveform display 3 255 Screen Copy 3 256 RSA3408A User Manual Appendices EE E Appendix A Menu Tree This section shows the structure of the menus and submenus displayed by pressing the menu keys as illustrated in Figure A 1 The menu keys are divided into the following groups m MEASUREMENT m DISPLAY MODE Wm MARKERS m VIEW m UTILITY Some of the submenus are used for programming or servicing information about these submenus is in the RSA3408A Programmer Manual or Service Manual optional MEASUREMENT Ec DISPLAY N UTILITY MODE VIEW SELECT DEFINE PRESET lt 2 MARKER SETUP Figure A 1 Menu keys RSA3408A User Manual A 1 Appendix A Menu Tree Measurement Menu 1 of 3 S A Mode except Real Time S A FREQUENCY CHANNEL Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq Channel SPAN Channel Table Center Freq Step Same As C F Center Freq Step Same As Span AMPLITUDE Step Size Span Start Freq Stop Freq TIMING Ref Level Auto Level RF Atten Mixer PF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Vertical Scale Vertical Units Corrections A 2 None CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 RL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 FL
317. rement data from conventional swept spectrum analyzers see Figure 3 115 Moreover the Real Time S A mode has FFT overlap capability NOTE You can set the FFT and RBW parameters in the S A spectrum analysis mode In the Demod modulation analysis and Time time analysis modes the number of FFT points is always 1024 and the window is always Blackman Har ris 4B type However for the pulse measurements in the Time mode you can select Nyquist or Blackman Harris 4B refer to RBW FFT Menu on page 3 97 The Demod and Time modes have no RBW process The adjustable parameters for FFT are m FFT points m FFT window m FFT start point Real Time S A only The adjustable parameters for RBW are m Resolution bandwidth RBW m Filter shape m Roll off ratio for the Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter Frequency domain Time domain data data Measurement after A D conversion RBW and display Parameters Parameters e FFT points RBW FFT window Filter shape FFT start point Roll off ratio FFT points is normally set automatically with the RBW setting RBW is normally set automatically with the span setting Figure 3 115 FFT and RBW process RSA3408A User Manual 3 163 FFT and RBW RBW FFT Menu Figure 3 116 shows the RBW FFT menu structure RUN STOP Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram RBW FFT Auto Man FFT TRIG 5 RBW FFT Man RBW BEN FFT RBW Filter
318. represents a Max Min waveform by default You can change Trace 2 using the Trace Avg menu To change Trace 2 press the TRACE AVG key and set the following items Trace 2 Selects Trace 2 m Max Min Default Shows the maximum and minimum C N values at alternate frequency points its advantage is its resemblance to an analog display m Reference When loaded as Trace 2 displays the waveform as the reference which has been saved using Save Trace 1 m Off Displays no waveform 3 107 Time Analysis Time Mode Load Trace 2 Loads the waveform that was saved using Save Trace 1 for Trace 2 as the reference Save Trace 1 Saves Trace 1 waveform data as a reference waveform Refer to page 3 229 for file operations Hints for Taking Measurements m Widening the span expands carrier detection range but loses accuracy Narrowing the span increases measurement time The phase noise measurement is performed within one of the four frequency bands listed in Table 3 14 A measurement outside the band is not per formed Table 3 14 Phase noise measurement frequency band Measurement band Frequency range Note Baseband 0 Hz to 40 MHz Set a value of center frequency span 2 within the frequency range RF1 40 MHz to 3 5 GHz RF 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz Set a center frequency within the frequency range RF3 5 GHz to 8 GHz m Table 3 15 and 3 16 show the bin width and the number of waveform points for C N versus Offset f
319. requency measurement Table 3 15 Bin width for each decade Decade Bin width 10 Hz to 100 Hz 0 195 Hz 100 Hz to 1 kHz 1 953 Hz 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1 953 Hz 10 kHz to 100 kHz 15 625 Hz 100 kHz to 1 MHz 156 25 Hz 1 MHz to 10 MHz 1 5625 kHz 10 MHz to 100 MHz 12 5 kHz 3 108 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Spurious Measurement RSA3408A User Manual Table 3 16 The number of waveform points Waveform The number of points Point placement Averaged waveform 100 per decade Linear on the logarithmic frequency axis Max Min waveform 460 per decade Linear on the linear frequency axis Error messages M Message No Carrier In this case lower Carrier Threshold Level in the Meas Setup menu m Message Out of Span In this case decrease Carrier Bandwidth in the Meas Setup menu or match the carrier frequency with the center frequency Spurious measurements are made in the same way as in the S A mode refer to pages 3 16 However for the spurious measurements in the signal source analysis there is a filter function to extract symmetrical spurious signals only Meas Setup Menu The next items are identical to those in the spurious measure ment in the S A mode Refer to pages 3 16 Carrier Threshold Level Signal Threshold in the S A mode Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Scroll Table The following items are added for the signal source analysis Symmetrical Filter Selects and desele
320. rier Enter the carrier offset from the center frequency When the modulation type is OQPSK you can shift Q data by half a symbol relative to I data by pressing VIEW DEFINE Data Half Symbol Shift The Data Half Symbol Shift side key has the following selections Shifts data by half a symbol in the positive direction on the time axis 0 Does not shift data default m Shifts data by half a symbol in the negative direction on the time axis This function is available in the following views 3 47 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode m Constellation m EVM m Eye diagram versus Time Process Flow for determine the necessary settings in digital modulation analysis you must Digitally Modulated know the digitally modulated signal process in the analyzer Figure 3 39 Signals outlines the process Digitally modulated signal process mechanism Digital data Input data Measurement Demodulating Modulating Reference filter mechanism mechanism filter Analysis information Measurement data Reference data Compare Display Display m Constellation EVM m Symbol table m AM AM m Eye diagram AM PM CCDF PDF Figure 3 39 Process flow for digitally modulated signals 3 48 The input signal goes through the measurement filter after being converted into digital sign
321. rker follow these steps Press the MAKER SETUP key on the front panel 2 Press the Makers side key to select Single Only Marker 1 is enabled Note that the Marker X Position menu item is already selected 3 Rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the numeric keypad to move the marker to the measurement location The marker readout is displayed in the top left portion of the screen see Figure 3 150 Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Span 15 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Ath 0 8 Trace2 Off vlarker 99 999 MHz 21 85 dBm 44 86 dBm Hz Marker readout dem Marker 1 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 15 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 999 Figure 3 150 Measurement with a single marker RSA3408A User Manual MARKER SETUP Cancel Back Select Marker L Marker X esee Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor Off Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X 15 525 Go to page 2 of 2 Marker X Position Changes the marker horizontal position using the general purpose knob or the numeric keypad Markers Enables one two or no markers Single is selected enabling marker 1 only 3 215 Marker Operation and Peak Search Measuring with the measure differences in amplitudes or fr
322. rm measurements using simple key operations Here you will measure channel power and carrier frequency as examples Measuring Channel Power 1 Press the MEASURE key on the front panel MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL STOP SPAN TRIG RBW AMPLITUDE FFT TRACE TIMING AVG LL MEAS Selects a measurement item Measurement items are displayed in the menu on the right side of the screen RSA3408A User Manual 2 53 Tutorial 2 Press the Channel Power side key A band power marker indicating measurement range is displayed on the spectrum waveform The measurement result is displayed below the waveform see Figure 2 47 Tektronix RSA 3408A MEASURE Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Channel Power lt Select Channel Power here 7 P a Band power marker C N OBW 10 dB Carrier Frequency EBW 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Spurious Measurement gt Channel Power 9 81 dBm results Density 45 83 dBm Hz Channel Bandwidth 4kHz Measurement Off Spectrum Analyzer Channel Power Figure 2 47 Channel power measurement 2 54 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Changing a Measurement Change a measurement parameter Parameter Press the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel 2 The Channel Bandwidth menu item is selected Using th
323. rns to the single marker mode 2 44 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Searching for the Peak RSA3408A User Manual Measure the frequency interval between the maximum intensity spectrum and a peak to its left by using the delta marker and peak search functions together 1 Press the PEAK key on the front panel Marker 1 moves to the maximum intensity spectrum DEMOD SCALE LINES MARKERS TIME A SELECT LL lt q PEAK gt MARKER v MARKER gt SETUP PEAK key Positions the marker at the maximum peak 2 Press the Markers side key to select Delta The fixed marker appears at the active marker position 3 Press the Select Marker side key to select 2 making Marker 2 active a Press the marker right key P gt to move the marker to the next signal peak to the right Try it several times b Press the marker left key lt Q to move the marker to the next signal peak to the left Try it several times c Using the marker left or right key move the marker to the peak that you want to measure 2 45 Tutorial The difference between the two marker positions is shown in the upper left part of the screen see Figure 2 41 Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 3 14 28 37 PAUSE MARKER SETUP Frequency 100 MHz Peak value at the selected marker Ecco Gn Span 20 kHz BON Select Marker Input tt 15 dB Trace 2 79 99 997 gt 52
324. rogram to the left the marker on the spectrum moves to the left Marker 799 99390625 MHz 27 135 dBm dem Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz 3 Markeri 79999390625 Mu Markers interlock Os 0 frame Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz Figure 3 154 Interlocked markers 3 219 Marker Operation and Peak Search Peak Search The peak search function searches for the peak on the waveform and moves the marker to the peak position Use the PEAK and marker left right up down gt A keys on the front panel for peak search et Using the Peak Search peak search keys have the following functions see Figure 3 155 keys y PEAK Positions the marker to the highest peak signal Moves the marker lower in frequency to the next signal Moves the marker higher in frequency to the next signal A Moves the marker higher in amplitude to the next signal v Moves the marker lower in amplitude to the next signal Till All PEAK lt gt Positions the marker to the highest Moves the marker lower in frequency to Moves the marker higher in frequency to peak signal the next signal the next signal s A the marker higher in amplitude to Moves the marker lower in amplitude to the next signal the next signal Figure 3 155 Functions of the peak search keys 3 220 RSA3408A User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Setting the Minimum Jump of the Marker RS
325. rs of a power value and a mask value are written in order with a tab between the power and the mask see Figure 3 173 The number of lines is indicated by XNum in the file header Power1 tab Mask 1 Power2 tab Mask 2 Power3 tab Mask 3 Number indicated by XNum PowerN tab MaskN Figure 3 173 Data block Part of the data block might look like this 100 875531204 0 111 253515034 0 101 342080442 0 96 7588947616 0 98 5946571418 0 For example the first line indicates that the power is 100 875531204 dBm and the mask value is 0 Mask Value The mask value represents whether to display the data Q Indicates that the data is displayed m 1 Indicates that the data is not displayed RSA3408A User Manual 3 251 File Format 3 252 RSA3408A User Manual Screen Copy Print Menu RSA3408A User Manual This section explains how to send a screen copy to a printer or a file Use a printer that complies with USB specifications For files data in the bitmap format BMP are created The following topics are described in this section m Print Menu Printing a Screen Copy m Creating a File The Print menu contains the following controls UTILITY HELP PRESET INPUT LOAD Print now CAL SAVE Save screen to file d MOORE Background color Black White Printer SYSTEM PRINT Figure 3 174 Print menu structure Print now Starts printing a copy of
326. s Figure 2 53 Figure 2 54 Figure 2 55 Figure 2 56 Frame and block Changing the acquisition length Single view display Scale settings Figure 3 1 S A menu structure Figure 3 2 S A measurement screen Figure 3 3 Flex grid style Figure 3 4 Channel power measurement band power markers Figure 3 5 Channel power measurement Figure 3 6 ACPR measurement band power markers Figure 3 7 Example of ACPR measurement Figure 3 8 C N measurement band power markers Figure 3 9 Example of C N measurement Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 OBW measurement band power marker Example of OBW measurement Carrier frequency measurement EBW measurement band power markers EBW measurement Setting up spurious signal measurement Example of spurious signal measurement Spectrum and spectrogram concurrent display View orientation Single display Difference between normal and real time modes Real time mode Zoom function Zoom domain settings using the Timing menu Zoomed area settings using the
327. s at the marker position see Figure 3 29 Rotate the general purpose knob to move the marker to the measurement end point Press the MARKER key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The green line resizes to the specified range 9 675 dB 0 dBm 10 dB 100 dBm Timing 17 J The analysis range specified with the marker and the reference cursor Figure 3 29 Specifying the range with the marker and the reference cursor 3 32 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Specifying Analysis Range Using a Mouse You can use a USB mouse in place of the Analysis Length and the Analysis Offset side keys to set the analysis range Perform the following steps in place of steps 4 and 5 on page 3 30 For connecting the mouse refer to page 2 7 1 Click on the overview to select it 2 Move the mouse pointer to the measurement start point and then left click to put the marker on it See Figure 3 30 3 Right click to display the reference cursor 4 Move the mouse pointer to the measurement end point and then left click to put the marker on it 5 Press the MARKER key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The green line resizes to the specified range Overview 1 R 20 38125 ms 9 675 dB dem lali Setthe start point 10 Left click to put the marker and dB right cli
328. s degree default or radian for the angular unit m Digital IQ Output Option 05 Only Turns on or off the digital IO output from the rear panel connectors 2 25 Functional Overview Displaying Versions and You can see the system versions and installed options For information on Installed Options options for the analyzer refer to Appendix Options and Accessories l Press the SYSTEM key on the front panel 2 Press the Versions and Installed Options side key The screen appears as shown in Figure 2 24 Tektronix RSA 3408A Fi 2 5 1 Versions and Inst Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 100 kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal A Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Scroll Scroll RSA3408A Real time Spectrum Analyzer Scroll the option list when there are Copyright C Tektronix Japan Ltd All rights reserved Option Key many options Serial Number DNSOO14 Main System 0 50 000 Trident installer version J Sub System 0 2 System version Option Key Change Option Key Qption Version Description Option Key Change Option Allow you to use option if available 256 Mbyte Data Memory with Extended Trigger Present Key To check on the availability of option 03 1Q Input Functon Present contact your local Tektronix office 05 Digital IQ Output Present Installed options 06 Removable Hard Disk Drive Not Present 21 0 50 000 General Purpose Modulation Analysis Present 23 2
329. s is based on the following standards ISO IEC 18000 4 Information technology Radio frequency identification for item management Part 4 Parameters for air interface communications at 2 45 GHz Mode 1 ISO IEC 18000 6 Information technology Radio frequency identification for item management Part 6 Parameters for air interface communications at 860 MHz to 960 MHz Type A Type B EPCglobal EPC Radio Frequency Identity Protocols Class 1 Generation 2 UHF RFID Protocol for Communications at 860 MHz 960 MHz Ver sion 1 0 9 ISO IEC 18000 6 Type C ISO IEC 14443 2 Identification cards Contactless integrated circuit s cards Proximity cards Part 2 Radio frequency power and signal interface C1G1 EPCglobal Gen1 Class1 Auto ID Center technical report 860 MHz 960 MHz Class I Radio Frequency Identification Tag Radio Frequency amp Logical Communication Interface Specification Recommended Standard Version 1 0 0 C0G1 EPCglobal Gen1 Class0 Auto ID Center Draft protocol specifica tion for a 900 MHz Class 0 Radio Frequency Identification Tag NOTE This instrument does not support ISO IEC 18000 4 Mode 2 RSA3408A User Manual 3 61 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Measurement Items Table 3 8 shows the measurement items in the RFID analysis Select the items using the MEASURE key Table 3 8 Measurement items for RFID analysis Measure menu Carrier Spurious ACPR Power On Down RF Envelope Conste
330. s measured see Figure 3 13 Range 100 to 1 dB default 30 dB Emission bandwidth Measurement Level Figure 3 13 EBW measurement band power markers 3 14 RSA3408A User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 14 shows an example of the EBW measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Span 12 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off 0 L dBm 10 dB 100 dBm Center 100 MHz Span 12 kHz Emission BandWidth 1 27199 kHz Level 30 dB Spectrum Analyzer Emission Bandwidth Measurement Level dB 30 Figure 3 14 EBW measurement Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spurious Signal Measurement The spurious signal measurement detects up to 20 spurious signals and calculates the frequency difference and the amplitude ratio relative to the normal signal by setting the level conditions NOTE For detecting stationary spurious signals waveform averaging is effective for reducing noise Refer to page 3 173 for averaging Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the spurious signal measurement contains the following controls Signal Threshold Sets the threshold for detecting the standard signal see Figure 3 15 A signal whose amplitude is larger than this threshold is regarded as a standard signal Range 100 to 30 dBm Ig
331. s normally limited internally You can eliminate the limit using the On setting Refer to Limit on the FFT Points on page 3 167 for detail NOTE It is recommended to keep Extended Res Off as its default condition When RBW FFT is set to FFT FFT Points Selects FFT sample point numbers per frame when RBW FFT is set to FFT Range 64 to 65536 in increments of 2 Higher numbers provide higher resolution and lower numbers provide faster measurements FFT Window Selects the FFT window window function when RBW FFT is set to FFT For the window type refer to Table 3 23 on page 3 170 The default is Blackman Harris 4B Extended Res Same as when RBW FFT is set to Man When RBW FFT is set to FFT the waveform without RBW processing is displayed on screen see Figure 3 117 Frequency domain Time domain data data Measurement gt When RBWIFFT is setto FFT 10 display Figure 3 117 Process flow when RBW FFT FFT RSA3408A User Manual 3 165 FFT and RBW Overlapped FFT Real Time S A Mode 3 166 The Real Time S A mode has FFT overlap capability that computes FFT while overlapping 1024 point FFT frames by a specified number of samples The RBW FFT menu contains the following controls NOTE In the Real Time S A mode the FFT points is always 1024 and FFT processed data does not go through RBW process see Figure 3 117 on page 3 165 FFT Start Point Sets the start point of the 1024 point
332. s the mixer level and the RF attenuation level automatically m RF Att Sets the RF attenuation level with RF Att described below m Mixer Sets the mixer level using the Mixer Level setting NOTE RF Atten Mixer is set to Auto by default In this setting the mixer level is fixed to 15 dBm RF Att Changes the RF attenuation level when RF Att is selected in RF Atten Mixer above Range 0 to 55 dB in 5 dB steps default 15 dB Reducing the attenuation may increase the signal level compared to the noise floor because the noise is generated after the RF attenuator Mixer Level Selects the input level of the primary mixer when Mixer is selected in RF Atten Mixer Range 25 to 0 dBm in 5 dB steps default 15 dBm Select the level according to measurement type The default value is 15 dBm Use the default value in most cases This level can be increased up to 0 dBm when a high dynamic range is required for measurements such as the ACPR Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ratio measurement NOTE As the mixer level increases the distortion also increases RSA3408A User Manual 3 129 Setting Amplitude Basic Setting Procedure 3 130 Vertical Scale S A mode except Real Time only Sets the vertical scale per division The setting range depends on Vertical Units described below as shown in Table 3 19 Table 3 19 Vertical scale setting range Vertical units Scale setting dBm dBuV 1to 10 V 223 6n
333. scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value dem 10 dB 100 dem Center 800 MHz Span 15 MHz f Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Figure 3 128 Setting the scale in spectrum view RSA3408A User Manual Setting Views Spectrogram View Setting View Scale Menu RSA3408A User Manual The spectrogram view shows time varying spectrum three dimensionally It indicates frequency along the horizontal axis frame number along the vertical axis and power level by using color This view is used in the S A with Spectro gram and Real Time S A modes or the Demod and Time modes as the overview content NOTE When you select S A with Spectrogram in the S A mode you cannot set the scale of spectrogram The Scale menu for the spectrogram view contains the following controls see Figure 3 129 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the color axis automatically to fit the spectrogram to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Size Sets the range of the vertical axis Range 87 to 89088 frames Vertical Start Sets the start frame number for the vertical axis Color Scale Sets the scale value subtracting the minimum power value from the maximum power value of the color axis The level is represented in 100 steps 100 colors from the minimum value blue to
334. ss AMPLITUDE Corrections to set the correction parameters Menu The correction menu has the following controls Amplitude Offset Sets the amplitude offset The amplitude of an entire waveform decreases by the offset value NOTE The following Corrections menu items are available in the S A spectrum analysis mode except Real Time S A Frequency Offset Sets the frequency offset The effective correction range of the amplitude correction table shifts by the offset value Amplitude Table Enables or disables amplitude correction Select On to enable the correction Edit Table Creates a correction table Input pairs of frequency and amplitude correction value m Select Point To Edit Selects a row to be edited m Frequency Enters the frequency of a correction point Amplitude Enters an amplitude correction value for the specified frequency m Delete Point Deletes the selected row m Add New Point Adds a row with the values in the previous row copied as initial values m Done Editing Table Confirms the input and adds a new row m Clear Table Deletes the correction data from the memory Interpolation Selects the horizontal and the vertical scale for interpolating correction data Freq Interpolation Selects the horizontal scale for interpolating correction data Linear or Logarithmic m Ampl Interpolation Selects the vertical scale for interpolating correction data Linear or dB Load Table Reads
335. ssage disappears Message Too long pulse Indicates that the number of data samples of a pulse width exceeds about 260 000 In this case change the span Message Too long repetition interval Indicates that the number of data samples of a pulse repetition interval exceeds about 260 000 In this case change the span RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode RBW FFT Menu The RBW FFT menu for the pulse measurements contains the following controls FFT Window Selects an FFT window for the channel power OBW and EBW measurements from these two m Nyquist default m Blackman Harris 4B Rolloff Ratio Sets the roll off ratio for the Nyquist window Range 0 0001 to 1 default 0 2 For details on FFT and RBW refer to page 3 163 View Define Menu View Define menu for the pulse measurements contains the following controls Show Views Selects a single view or multi view display m Single Displays only the view selected by the VIEW SELECT key on the front panel m Multi Default Displays the overview subview and main view Overview Content Selects a view displayed in the overview m Waveform Power versus Time Spectrogram Refer to page 3 183 for information about setting views Select Measurement Selects a measurement item to display in the subview from the items selected in Displayed Measurement Select Pulse Selects a pulse to measure when you select A Single Pulse in View
336. t Offset Frequency to Rj Stop Offset Frequency is within the range from Minimum Offset Frequency to Maximum Offset Frequency 3 105 Time Analysis Time Mode Max Pj Threshold Sets the threshold level to determine periodic jitter by using the C N value averaged by the Median filter the yellow trace in the lower view as the reference A signal whose C N value dBc Hz is larger than the threshold is regarded as a periodic jitter The maximum periodic jitter in the analysis range is shown in the measurement results see Figure 3 75 Setting range 1 to 50 dB default 10 dB Power Carrier Bandwidth Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum Offset Offset Offset Offset Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Upper view gt E gt C N Sideband C N Sideband Lower Upper Frequency C N measurement range displayed in the lower view CIN A Rj Start Offset Rj Stop Offset Frequency Random jitter Frequency measurement range lt Lower view m gt Offset frequency Periodic jitter Current trace Averaged trace displayed in green by the Median filter displayed in yellow Max Pj Threshold Figure 3 74 Phase noise measurement parameters 3 106 RSA3408A User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Spectrum C N versus Offset frequency Measurement results Carrier frequency Channel power Integrated phase noise Random
337. t can be set from 1 bps to 51 2 Mbps bit rate or from 1 ns to 1 s Tari NOTE The standard types of COGI and 1 1 disable the constellation measurement Tari is the reference time interval for a data 0 in Interrogator to Tag signaling defined in ISO IEC 18000 6 Part A specification an abbreviation for Type A Reference Interval The period of the NRZ L decoding format 2 4 and 8 periods indicate the number of subcarrier cycles per symbol NOTE This instrument does not support one period NRZ L The M values M 2 4 and 8 of the Miller decoding format indicate the number of subcarrier cycles per symbol Refer to the ISO IEC and EPCglobal documents listed in Compatible Standards on page 3 61 for details on the encoding decod ing formats except the modified Miller code illustrated in Figure 3 55 3 70 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RSA3408A User Manual Figure 3 55 Modified Miller code Link Selects whether to measure Interrogator to Tag signaling or Tag to Interrogator signaling Interrogator Detects the interrogator preamble from a measurement signal and decodes the signal with the interrogator decoding format m Detects the tag preamble from a measurement signal and decodes the signal with the tag decoding format Modulation Type Selects the modulation type Refer to Table 3 9 Decoding Format Selects the decoding format Refer to Table 3 9 Auto Bit
338. t value Tektronix RSA 3408A H 3 MEAS SETUP Frequency 2 GHz RBW 50 kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Counter Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Resolution Hz 0 dBm 10 dB 100 dBm Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz Carrier frequency gt Frequency 1 999 999 957 GHz Spectrum Analyzer Carrier Frequency Counter Resolution Hz RSA3408A User Manual Carrier frequency is accurately measured using the counter function NOTE You must set the frequency and the span to display only the spectrum with the carrier you want to measure Measurement error will occur if other frequency components are displayed together Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the Carrier Frequency measurement contains the following control Counter Resolution Sets the counter resolution The measurement result is displayed on the bottom of the view with this resolution Range 1 mHz to 1 MHz in a tenfold sequence default 1 Hz Figure 3 12 shows an example of the carrier frequency measurement Figure 3 12 Carrier frequency measurement Spectrum Analysis S A Mode EBW Measurement The frequency bandwidth between the maximum peak of the spectrum and the specified dB value is measured in EBW Emission Bandwidth Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the EBW measurement contains the following control Measurement Level Specifies how far down from the peak level the bandwidth i
339. tandard as shown in Table 3 9 Table 3 9 Standard settings Standard type 18000 4 1 18000 6 A 18000 6 B 18000 6 C 14443 2 A Modulation type Decoding format Bit rate Tari Interrogator to Tag ASK Manchester NRZ 30 kbps Tag to Interrogator FMO NRZ Interrogator to Tag PIE lt 4 ype A 20 us Tari kbps Tag to Interrogator to Interrogator FMO FMO NRZ NRZ 33 kbps a T to Tag IEEE NRZ 10 kbps Tag to Interrogator to Interrogator NRZ Interrogator to Tag DSB ASK PIE Type C 6 25 us Tari Sob neh Tag to Interrogator FMO 26 7 kbps Interrogator to Tag Tag to Interrogator Miller M 2 M 4 M 8 NRZ Modified Miller NRZ 105 9375 kbps Subcarrier OOK Manchester NRZ 105 9375 kbps Subcarrier BPSK NRZ L PTT periods 211 875 kbps NRZ L NRZ L 2 periods periods 423 75 kbps RSA3408A User Manual 3 69 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Table 3 9 Standard settings Cont Tag to Interrogator Subcarrier BPSK 105 9375 kbps 211 875 kbps 42375 Kbps F 13 56MHz ASK JManheser NRZ ___ 72 C1G1 Interrogator to Tag ASK Manual ASK Manchester 40 kbps DSB ASK Miller SSB ASK Miller M 2 M 4 M 8 PR ASK Modified Miller OOK PIE Type A 20 us Tari PIE Type C 6 25 us Abbrev DSB Double sideband SSB Single sideband PR Phase reversal OOK On Off key PIE Pulse interval encoding PWM Pulse Width Modulation 1 Default values are shown I
340. ter Presets PDC Modulation Type l d4PI QPSK Modulation Parameters Auto Carrier On Off Carrier Frequency Hz 45 07337 16383305 NOTE Origin offset is also called IQ feedthrough You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing SYSTEM Instrument Setup Angular Units 3 51 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode IQ Frequency versus Time Observes I Q signal voltage change over time When the modulation type Measurement MEAS SETUP Modulation Type is FSK GFSK or P25 C4FM it displays frequency change over time Figure 3 42 shows an example The main view shows I O voltage versus time graph where I and are indicated in yellow and green respectively or shows frequency deviation versus time graph for the FSK GFSK or P25 CAFM modulation For the P25 CAFM modulation the main view also shows the modulation fidelity measurement results and the waveforms with the red dots indicating the symbol points For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 45 For setting views refer to page 3 183 Main view 1 0 voltage versus Time are indicated in yellow and green respectively Main view Frequency deviation versus Time FSK and GFSK modulation only Main view Measurement results and Frequency deviation versus Time P25 modulation only n Modulation fidelity measurement results from the top RMS error magnitude normalized
341. th to acquire one block Suppose that one block contains N frames the acquisition length is calculated with this equation One block acquisition length 2 N x One frame acquisition length Where N 1 to 16000 standard or 64000 Option 02 One frame acquisition length is determined by span internally and shown with Spectrum Length in the setup display area see Figure 3 21 For the details refer to Specifications in the RSA3408A Technical Reference Waveform data is acquired and displayed on the basis of blocks For details about the time parameters refer to page 3 141 Tektronix RSA 3408A 03 01 24 14 05 23 TIMING Frequency 800 MHz Frame Length 6 4 ms Cancel Back Span 100 kHz Acquisition E Input Att 20 dB Length s Acquisition Length Spectrum Length indicates the 128m Sets the time length to acquire 0 time length to acquire one frame Spectrum Offset one block dem frame Spectrum Offset 10 Specifies the number of the dB frame to measure and display _______ in the spectrum view 100 dBm M PONI fel Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz Marker 800 MHz 32 832 dBm 62 6496 48 frame 27 _ _ frame Represents one Hock 20 rames ints example The black line appears between two blocks black and white reversed in this figure The marker indicates the frame specified with Spectrum Offset 0 Center
342. the Frequency Channel menu see Figure 2 19 below W Center Freq Step Same As C F Useful for quickly locating harmonics of a signal seen at the center frequency Center Freq Step Same As Span Useful for quickly analyzing a larger frequency area without overlapping span windows Center Freq Step lt Sets the center frequency step size to the Same As C F same value as the center frequency Center Freq Step Same As Span lt Sets the center frequency step size to the same value as the span Figure 2 19 Changing the step size to the predetermined values 2 22 RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Measurement Basics Selecting the When you start a measurement first select the measurement mode Measurement Mode MODE Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram m Spectrum analysis Real Time S A I Real Time S A with Zoom Standard A Modulation analysis DEMOD Analog Demod m Digital Demod Option 21 Time analysis Standard TIME RN Transient CCDF Pulse Measurements Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Figure 2 20 Selecting the measurement mode For details on each mode refer to the section shown in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Measurement modes Spectrum analysis S A Spectrum Analysis SeA Modulation analysis DEMOD Modulation Analysis Boned ede Time analysis TIME Time characteristics analysis Time Analysis i Time Mode CCDF CCDF a
343. the amplitude and frequency lines The spectrogram uses the time and frequency lines The display lines are placed at regular intervals from the reference line Frequency display lines blue Frequency reference line red 2t4 1 dem 75y45 dBm Hz7 Amplitude reference line red XR Amplitude display lines blue Lines readout Center 0 Hz Span 30 MHz Marker 3 56 MHz 26 414 dBm 1 15 ms 46 frame Time display lines blue m 100 Time reference line red gt frame Center 0 Hz Span 30 MHz Frequency reference line red Frequency display lines blue Figure 3 146 Multi display lines Real Time S A mode RSA3408A User Manual 3 207 Display Line 3 208 Lines Menu The Lines menu for the Real Time S A mode has different controls between the spectrum and spectrogram view The settings are shown in the lines readout at the upper right of the view see Figure 3 146 DISPLAY MODE VIEW SJA SELECT DEFINE DEMOD SCALE LINES MARKERS TIME SELECT Spectrum view Amplitude Line Off On Amplitude Line Offset Amplitude Line Interval Frequency Line Off On Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval View Lines Readout Off On Spectrogram view Time Line Off On Time
344. the measurement result Range 100 to 100 dB default 0 dB Channel Bandwidth Sets the channel bandwidth for the maximum EIRP measurement Range 0 to Span default 0 Hz Figure 3 52 shows an example of the carrier measurement RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Overview Zoom Subview Power vs Time Ilo Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 4 Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Input Att 15 dB Analyze NOTE The overview and subview ALR SLIBETS n Marker 32 8015625 ms i 89 919 dB 14 519 dBm contents can be selected using the EN a View Define menu 87 dBm Resolution Hz frame 11 dBm Power Ratio Unit for OBW oe dB dia Power Ratio for dii OBW dB frame dBm 20 Center 1 Span 117 SS ae T a enter z pan 500 kHz TE 1 Scale 3 2 ms Amplitude Offset Measurement results gt Carrier Frequency 1 000 077 818 GHz 45 15 d dB from the top Occupied Band Width 11 D OBW 172 968 Hz dBm Carrier frequency EBW 149 064 Hz Channel OBW Maximum EIRP 30 dBm Bandwidth Hz EBW T SM Maximum EIRP dB 111 dem Center 1 000081 GHz Span 105 kHz RFID 18000 4 6 Carrier Main view Spectrum Figure 3 52 Carrier measurement Changing the View The view contents can be changed in the next item by pressing the VIEW DEFINE key Show Views Select whether to display a single view or multiple vie
345. ting a Measurement 2 58 Item Overview ig The data in the range indicated by Main view 20 Observe an AM signal change in time series as an example 1 Press the AM Demod side key 2 Press the MEAS SETUP key on the front panel to set the measurement parameter 3 Press the RUN STOP key to acquire the signal see Figure 2 51 Three views are displayed on the screen in the Demod mode m Overview Displays all data of the specified block in the time domain The measurement range indicated by the green underline is specified in this view m Main view Displays the measurement result and waveform of the range specified in the overview they may be displayed in separate views In this case level changes of I and signals are displayed as the yellow and green traces respectively in the main view m Subview Displays spectrum as an auxiliary view by default You can specify the range in the overview to create the spectrum for the subview Tektronix RSA 3408A MEASURE Acquisition Length 64 ms Subview Frequency 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Input Att 15 dB Cancel Back AM Demod 0 D ae DRIN emn c5 the pink underline is FFT processed ES and displayed in the subview 100 dem 100 dBm Start 64 ms Scale 6 5 Center 100 MHz The data in the range indicated by the green underline is analyzed and displayed in the main view 100 96 RR
346. tion dp Parameters 105 Auto Carrier dem 105 om Start 20 ms Scale 2 ms Center 1 5 GHz Span 5 Mz eer a c EVM 0 28 96 RMS Marker db eum ms Coe mon 0 62 Peak sym 241 560312685051 MagErr 02 RMS 560 3126851251 0 56 96 Peak sym 241 Phase Err 0 27 deg RMS Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a constellation diagram Figure 3 40 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the constellation diagram When the modulation type MEAS SETUP Modulation Type is P25 C4FM the modulation fidelity is displayed as the measurement result NOTE In the constellation view I and Q signals are normalized to prevent the scale from changing when signal attenuation changes For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 45 For setting views refer to page 3 183 Tektronix RSA 3408A PAUSE J MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum 1 69 deg Peak sym 431 Rho 0 9999 Length 536 symbols Freq Err 560 313 Hz Origin Offset 62 7 dB Scale 102 837 m Unit dd a4 Digital Demod Constellation P25 C4FM modulation only Modulation Fidelity Marker 2 2323097099 s Modulation fidelity measurement results from the top RMS error magnitude normalized by the deviation Carrier frequency offset Frequency deviation Symbol length 3 50 1994 068 RMS
347. to 22m uV 223 6 m to 22 k W 100 p to 100 u 1 12 5 sequence with the general purpose knob Arbitrary value with the numeric keypad Vertical Units Selects the unit of amplitude scale dBm dBuV V uV or W Corrections Sets amplitude correction Refer to page 3 132 for details of amplitude correction To set amplitude follow these steps 1 Press the AMPLITUDE key on the front panel 2 Setthe reference level using the Ref Level side key 3 To best display the waveform automatically press the Auto Level side key 4 To set the attenuation level or the mixer level manually use the RF Atten Mixer side key to select RF Att or Mixer When you select RF Att Select the attenuation level with the RF Att side key When you select Mixer Select the first mixer input level using the Mixer Level side key 5 S A mode except Real Time only Use the Vertical Scale side key to set the vertical scale per division Use the Vertical Units side key to select the unit 6 apply amplitude correction press the Corrections side key to set the parameters Refer to Amplitude Correction on page 3 132 for details RSA3408A User Manual Setting Amplitude Over Voltage Input A RSA3408A User Manual Set the reference level Ref Level according to the input signal level The default setting is 0 dBm If the signal level gets too high or the reference level is set too low over voltage input may occur If an over volt
348. u 3 of 3 Time Mode neris Show Views Single Multi Overview Content Spectrogram Waveform LINES Signal Source Analysis Option 21 only Subview Content Spectrum Noisogram C N vs Offset Freq Random Jitter vs Time Integrated Phase Noise vs Time C N vs Time The content depends on the measurement item Pulse Measurements Select Measurement Pulse Width Peak Power On Off Ratio Pulse Ripple Select Pulse Repetition Interval Duty Cycle Pulse Pulse Phase View Results For Channel Power OBW EBW Frequency Deviation Displayed Measurement __ need Time Range A Single Pulse All Pulses uidelines L on off Pulse Width Results Off Peak Power Results Off Menu Off On Off Ratio Results On Pulse Ripple Results On Off Pulse Repetition Interval Results On Off Duty Cycle Results Pulse Pulse Phase Results Off Channel Power Results On Off OBW Results On Off EBW Results On Off Freq Deviation Results Off Max Adaptive A 12 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Utility Menu SYSTEM PRESET MACRO SETUP View Front Panel Button H
349. ual gt Save To File Menu Where XXX State for a state file IQData for an IQ data file Trace for a trace file Corr for a correction file Bitmap for a bitmap file Appendix A Menu Tree A 14 RSA3408A User Manual es re ET Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping This section shows the symbol mapping for each digital modulation technique GFSK BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right EICHREREREXERES EIEIEREREIEXERES EDDODEBOD Figure B 1 Symbol mapping GFSK BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM and 64QAM RSA3408A User Manual B 1 Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping 256QAM Left Right SC DODODODDDODODODDODOOODE ZERCRERERERCHERERERERERERERERET DEDDDBBDODODDODOOE DOODDODDDDODDODOOODE A6 5 72 76 7 SESERENEREXEXEXEICHERERERESES DODDODDOOUODODOODOODOHE DIHBBOpOpDOODODBAUDE Figure B 2 Symbol mapping 256QAM B 2 RSA3408A User Manual Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping Table B 1 4 shift DQPSK Rotation angle degree Table B 2 GMSK Rotation direction Left Right RSA3408A User Manual B 3 Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping B 4 RSA3408A User Manual ee ee eee Appendix C Digital IQ Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05
350. ue maximum minimum 2 of the vertical axis Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value Vertical axis magnitude or phase error An example of magnitude error below 100 A 100 Vertical 10 Vertical 20 1 Scale Scale 8 Sat iis ns eae 94515 psf Start 1 080825 ms Sca 88 75 ps a Horizontal Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Figure 3 133 Setting the scale in EVM view RSA3408A User Manual 3 193 Setting Views Measurement Content Selects one of the following formats for view see Figure 3 134 m EVM Displays changes of EVM Error Vector Magnitude in time series m Mag Error Displays changes of magnitude error in time series m Phase Error Displays changes of phase error in time series 100 100 180 dea ee M M M 10 72 FRE METRI RUE 45 deg 0 100 270 LP S 96 deq Start 1 11875 ms Scale 90 5625 p Start 1 080625 ms Scale 85 75 us Start 1 07875 ms Scale 85 75 Lis EVM display Magnitude error display Phase error display Figure 3 134 EVM magnitude and phase error displays You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing SYSTEM Instrument Setup Angular Units 3 194 RSA3408A User Manual Setting
351. uency 1 GHz RBW 16kHz Cancel Back Span 4 MHz Main Channel Input Att 15 Bandwidth Hz Main Adjacent channel Bandwidth Qu channel selected with Scroll Table 0 z Adjacent Channel dim Bandwidth Hz 500k Chan Spacing Hz 500k 10 M t dB Ies Eres Filter Shape Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 100 p dem i Center 1 GHz Span 4 MHz Scroll Table Main Channel Power 7 8 dBm il 2 3 4 5 6 Offset Frequency 500 k Hz 1 5 M Hz 2 M Hz 2 5 M He 3 M Hz 3 5 M Hz 4 M Hes ACPR Upper dB 385 406 ae bee ACPR Lower dB 38 43 44 11 47 99 RFID 18000 4 Scroll Table Figure 3 54 ACPR measurements RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Power On Down Measures the rise fall time settling time overshoot and undershoot of the Measurement transmission power pulse NOTE In the analysis range there must be at least one pulse rise or fall If there is not the analysis is not performed Meas Setup Menu The following menu items are common to the power on down RF envelope constellation eye diagram and symbol table measurements Analyze Perform measurements for acquired data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings Standard Type Sets the parameters according to the s
352. uency and span to display the waveform around 100 MHz 1 Press the FREQUENCY CHANNEL key on the front panel FREQUENCY CHANNEL key RSA3408A User Manual MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY RUN CHANNEL STOP SPAN TRIG RBW AMPLITUDE FFT 2 35 Tutorial The FREQUENCY CHANNEL menu shown in Figure 2 31 is displayed on the right side of the screen Notice that the Frequency menu item is available for entering the numeric value for center frequency A Center Freq E Indicates that the general purpose knob Hz M is available XXX Numeric value input field Figure 2 31 Menu items for numeric value input You can change the value using the general purpose knob or enter the value using the numeric value entry keypad shown in Figure 2 32 2 Enter the new center frequency at 100 MHz Because the interval between 1 5 GHz current setting and 100 MHz is wide it is more convenient to use the keypad here Press 1 0 0 MHz in order on the keypad The GHz MHz kHz and Hz keys also function as enter keys When you press any of these keys the numeric value you enter will be set immediately If you enter incorrect values clear them using the BKSP back space key and then enter the correct digit ABC DEF S UNLOCK 7 8 9 GHz BKSP Clears the character preceding the cursor GHI JKL MNO ms
353. um Bm qm 119 dm Start 9 993125 ms Scale 1 ms Center 2 4453 GHz Span 36 MHz Main view Frequency vs Time gt Measurement result gt Frequency Settling Time 710 586 us Frequency settling time 3 118 NOTE In the frequency versus time measurement the analysis range is approxi mately 500 frames 512 000 points maximum For example it is about 40 ms for the span of 10 MHz Figure 3 82 shows an example of the frequency versus time measurement The subview displays only spectrum The frequency settling time is indicated on the bottom of the screen The value from trigger is also indicated when the trigger occurs during or before the frequency settling time in the analysis range Marker 4 490195312 ms 728 1099381845 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 6 MHz Start 5 870117 ms Scale 288 085938 pus from Trigger 724 238 us Smoothing display with factor of 5 Signal Source Analysis Frequency vs Time Figure 3 82 Frequency versus Time measurement RSA3408A User Manual a fa T Setting Frequency and Span This section describes frequency and span which are fundamental settings for observing the spectrum These items are set using the general purpose knob and the numeric input keypad You can also use the marker peak search function to set frequency RSA3408A User Manual 3 119 Setting Frequency and Span Frequency a
354. us measurement The main view is the same as the spurious measurement refer to page 3 109 except that this main view is real time 3 115 Time Analysis Time Mode Tektronix RSA 3408A 2005 08 15 14 51 13 MEAS SETUP M M J Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 100 ps Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Carrier Threshold Input Att 10 dB Level dBm Marker 5 165039062 ms Marker IMHz 30 Overview Power versus Time _ 10 037 dBm 124 498 dBc Hz 8 t Ignore Region dBm Hz 10 3M db Spurious Subview C N vs Offset frequency 108 Threshold dBc Use VIEW DEFINE Subview Content Firing 70 to select the display Start 9 992617 ms Start iMHz Excursion Marker 100 0006162205 MHz d 10 097 dBm 3 MN IIN onl SEE EAI Semen Spurious measurement i I T i uin 10 Ill IET QU AAA TII ba On Off dm TIBULUM 100 ERU dem Hz Measurement table gt 8 Scroll Table Up to 20 spurious signals delta Hz 5 35M 5 35M j M 15 95M 12 2M displayed Ratio dBc 66 65 6938 6931 7167 6961 7474 6975 Go to page 2 of 2 Signal Source Analysis RealTime Spurious Figure 3 80 Real t
355. ut not in the first block m After Adds dummy frames after valid frames but not in the last block Before After Valid frame Valid frame Dummy frame Dummy frame Valid frame Valid frame Dummy frame Dummy frame Valid frame Valid frame Figure 3 169 Adding dummy frames Band Shows the frequency band that was set when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data MemoryMode Shows the memory mode that was set when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data RSA3408A User Manual 3 243 File Format 3 244 FFTPoints Shows the FFT point setting that was set when the analyzer acquired the data This item is always 1024 in the RSA3408A analyzer Bins Shows the number of bins The same value is also entered in bins of each frame header of the data block refer to Frame Header on page 3 245 MaxInputLevel Shows the reference level setting in dBm when the analyzer acquired the data LevelOffset Shows the level offset setting in dB when the analyzer acquired the data CenterFrequency Shows the center frequency setting in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data Frequency Offset Shows the frequency offset setting in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data Span Shows the span setting in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data BlockSize Shows the block size setting when the analyzer acquired t
356. utorial Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 08 14 24 48 PAUSE SETUP Frequency 100 MHz Readout of the selected marker Span 20 kHz TRADE Select Marker Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 i lt Select Marker Ker 99 998 MHz 1 2 j CD Selects the active marker U Marker X ES dBm Hz Delta marker measurement value Marker 1 Marker 2 Markers lt Markeri Markers eff Single Detta Delta is selected here to erre d show Marker 1 and 2 to Marker X 10 dB Reference Cursor Marker 2 Off Selected Marker Step Size Marker X 20 de Bm Got 2 Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz of 2 Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 998 Figure 2 40 Measurement with the delta marker 5 Press the Select Marker side key top to select 2 making Marker 2 active You can also select the marker using the MARKERS SELECT key on the front panel The MARKERS SELECT key and the Select Marker side key have the same function 6 The Marker X Position menu item is selected Using the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad move the marker to the desired measure ment point see Figure 2 40 The difference between the two marker positions Marker 1 Marker 2 is indicated in the upper left part of the screen 7 Press the Markers side key to select Single The analyzer retu
357. veform is displayed on the screen The average count is shown in the upper right part of the screen see Figure 2 42 When the waveform is acquired in the free run mode the averaging is done with exponential RMS root mean square This method continues the average with an exponential weighting applied to old values using the number of averages 64 in this example as the weighting factor Tektronix RSA 3408A TRACE AVG Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Select Trace Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Trace 1 dBm Average count On Freeze Off Trace 1 Type Average Number Of E Averages E 10 db Reset Average Display Detection Max Load Trace 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Save Trace Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Number Of Averages 64 Figure 2 42 Averaging a waveform Trace 1 Type Selects the type of processing for the selected trace 5 Press the Reset Average side key to restart averaging 2 48 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial Comparison Display You can display two different types of traces concurrently on the screen In this procedure you will display the currently acquired waveform and an averaged waveform for comparison l Press the TRACE AVG key on the front panel 2 Make sure that 1 Trace 1 is selected in the Select Trace menu item 3 Press the Trace T
358. versus time measurement Power variance measurement Symbol table analysis Eye diagram analysis Setting Linear Signal Region AM AM measurement AM PM measurement CCDF measurement PDF measurement RFID waveform and measurement items Carrier measurement Spurious measurement ACPR measurements Modified Miller code Transmission power on down measurement Power on down measurements RF envelope measurement main view RF envelope measurement parameters Figure 3 60 Constellation eye diagram and symbol table main view Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Definition of the modulation depth and index Time menu structure IQ versus Time measurement Power variance measurement Frequency measurement CCDF calculation process CCDF single view CCDF multi view 3 35 3 36 3 39 3 40 3 41 3 42 3 43 3 48 3 50 3 51 3 52 3 53 3 54 3 55 3 56 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 62 3 65 3 66 3 68 3 71 3 72 3 74 3 76 3 77 3 79 3 81 3 83 3 85 3 86 3 87 3 88 3 91 3 92 RSA3408A User Manual Table of Contents RSA3408A User Manual
359. viii PDF xviii Map interface 2 1 Marker menu 3 212 operation 3 211 MARKER SETUP 3 214 Max Hold description 3 177 Meas Setup menu digital modulation analysis 3 45 FM Demod measurement 3 39 3 40 PM Demod measurement 3 41 pulse measurement 3 100 Measurement mode 2 23 Measurements ACPR 3 7 AM demod 3 39 AM AM 3 56 AM PM 3 58 analog modulation analysis 3 37 C N 3 9 carrier frequency 3 13 CCDF 3 59 3 88 channel power 3 5 constellation 3 50 digital modulation analysis Option 21 only 3 44 EBW 3 14 EVM 3 51 eye diagram 3 55 FM demod 3 40 frequency versus time 3 87 versus time 3 42 3 85 1Q frequency versus time 3 52 modulation analysis Demod mode 3 27 OBW 3 11 PDF 3 60 PM demod 3 41 power versus time 3 53 3 86 pulse 3 93 pulse spectrum 3 43 real time analysis 3 20 spectrum analysis S A mode 3 1 spurious signal 3 16 symbol table 3 54 time analysis Time mode 3 83 Menu 3 Index Amplitude 3 127 amplitude correction 3 133 Average 3 174 basic operation 2 18 FFT 3 164 Frequency 3 120 front panel keys 2 3 Help 3 223 Input 3 227 Lines 3 204 Lines Real Time S A 3 208 Load 3 230 Markers 3 212 Print 3 253 RBW 3 164 Save 3 230 Span 3 120 System 2 25 Timing 3 141 Trace 3 174 tree A 1 Trigger 3 148 View 3 184 Min Hold description 3 177 Minimum jump setting
360. ws m Single Only displays the view selected using the VIEW SELECT key m Multi Displays the overview sub view and main view Overview Content Selects the overview information Spectrogram m Waveform Power versus Time waveform Zoom Spectrogram with the zoom function Selects Waveform or Zoom while selecting the analysis range Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 24 for setting the analysis area on the spectrogram with the zoom function RSA3408A User Manual 3 65 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Spurious Measurement Tekironix RSA 3408A 2005 09 05 17 31 41 FREE RUN MEAS SETUP be Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 100kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Nerma Video filter indicator Signal Threshold Input Att 5 dB Trace 2 Off displayed when _ Marker 1 5 GHz 0 20 15 79 dBm 65 79 dBm Hz T _ i Hn I He T 500k The spurious detection range Fal Spurious is displayed in blue I ni Threshold dBc _ 70 10 TUTTI Excursion de i i dB Spurious marker 2 o 3 Scroll Table Measurement table Up to 20 spurious signals displayed Subview Content Selects the subview information Spectrum m Power versus Time m Frequency versus Time Zoomed Spectrum Spectrum of a zoomed area in the Zoom display Setting the View Scale Refer to page 3 183 for information on setting the scale for each v
361. ws XP You can switch to a Windows XP desktop screen or execute a Windows XP application program To display the Windows desktop screen follow these steps 1 Connect a USB mouse and keyboard to the analyzer For the USB connectors on the side panel see Figure 2 3 on page 2 6 2 Usea mouse to move the pointer to the bottom of screen see Figure 2 25 The task bar appears 3 Locate the pointer on the RSA3408A icon in the task bar and right click A menu appears 4 Select Close from the menu The analyzer system program terminates and the Windows XP desktop screen appears Switching from Windows Desktop to the Analyzer View To switch from the Windows desktop screen to the analyzer view display from the task bar select Start Program RTSA The analyzer program starts When you use a mouse to move the pointer to the bottom of screen a task bar appears see Figure 2 25 The task bar contains Start and the analyzer applica tion icons Follow the Windows XP operating procedure and access Windows applications using the Start menu The screen displays the date and time managed by the Windows XP operating system You can use the Windows time setting program to set the date and time RSA3408A User Manual Functional Overview Tektronix RSA 3408A 1 14 2005 10 30 01 AM qQCOla Frequency 1 5 GH
362. x ax aix ax ax The values of are shown in the main view see Figure 3 47 on page 3 57 RSA3408A User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Display Reference Line Determines whether the reference line is visible The reference line represents an ideal AM AM trend line Display Best Fit Line Determines whether the best fit line is visible Linear Signal Region Mask Determines whether the linear signal region is visible Scroll Table Scrolls the coefficient table when it has many rows Overview Power versus Time Subview Constellation Frequency 1 5 GHz Cancel Back Span 1MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets Off Y 5 6 Modulation NOTE Constellation is selected dBm 975 for the subview by VIEW DEFINE 160 Subview Content Subview Conte E Modulation Parameters 94 Auto Carrier dem 975 Timing m e Start 240 jus Scale 24 us Frequency Error 1 dB compression point 1dB Compression amp 5 12 Bm Hz 1 3617304508 Coefficient table t Index AM AM Coeff AM PM Coeff Sa Aan Maximum 4 517 000 3 295e 003 Coefficients 4 128e 001 4 172e 003 8 1 221e 001 1 839 003 3 177e 002 3 510e 004 Scroll Table 2 819e 003 3 690e 005 1 261e 004 2 130e 006 Gola page o amp 981e D08 i 5 00dB 11 dBm of 2 Orde
363. xcursion dB B oc Scroll Table 10 dB Measurement result Ratio dB 75 19 75 44 5 6 75 78 774 7795 Spectrum Analyzer Spurious Search Signal Threshold dBm 20 Figure 3 16 Example of spurious signal measurement Detected spurious signals are assigned markers numbered in descending order by amplitude The frequency difference deltaF and the amplitude ratio Ratio in relation to the standard signal are shown in the table in the lower part of the screen RSA3408A User Manual 3 17 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spectrogram Display You can display the spectrum of an input signal concurrently with the spectro gram Follow these steps to display the spectrogram l Press the S A key on the front panel 2 Press the S A with Spectrogram side key The spectrum and spectrogram are displayed on the same screen as shown in Figure 3 17 Tektronix RSA 3408A 03 0 55 23 S A es SS RM MR pp Frequency 800 MHz RBW 100 Hz Cancel Back Span 10 kHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Input Att 20 cB Trace 2 Off Spectrum Analyzer ar S A with Spectrogram Spectrum 45 RealTime S A 100 Standard dBm Center 800 MHz Span 10 kHz 87 Spectrogram 3 18 0 dem 100 dem 0 Center 800 MHz Span 10 kHz with Spectrogram Measurement Off Figure 3 17 Spectrum and spectrogram concurrent display RS
364. ype side key and select Normal to define Trace 1 as the currently acquired waveform 4 Press the Select Trace side key to select 2 Trace 2 5 Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select Average to define Trace 2 as the averaged waveform 6 Press the RUN STOP key on the front panel to acquire a waveform The currently acquired waveform Trace 1 in yellow is displayed with the averaged waveform Trace 2 in green See the display in Figure 2 43 Tektronix RSA 3408A 0 32 0 TRACE AVG IE O Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Select Trace Input Att 15 cB Trace 2 Average 20 20 Select Trace EN Selects the trace to be operated Trace 1 Yellow currently acquired waveform Trace 2 Trace 2 Green averaged waveform On Freeze Off Trace 2 Type Average Number Of Averages 20 dE Reset Average Display Detection Max Load Trace 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Save Trace Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 2 43 Comparison display with averaged waveform 7 Press the Trace 2 Type side key again and select Off to remove Trace 2 RSA3408A User Manual 2 49 Tutorial Displaying a Spectrogram The spectrogram view is a useful tool to observe spectrum changes in time series in a th
365. z Span 10 MHz Input Att 20 dB RBW 50 kHz Cancel Back Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off Select File e Trace TRC 57KB File 03 08 20 12 50 TraceB TRC 57KB TRC File 03 08 20 12 50 ie TRC 57KB TRC File 03 08 20 12 50 Documents Figure 3 166 Load from File menu RSA3408A User Manual Select File Selects a file using the knob Load File Now Loads the data from the specified file lt Folder Shows the selected directory CAMy Documents here NOTE In the Real Time S A the Demod and the Time modes when you abort data acquisition before it is completed such as in a trigger armed state the last data block is empty Therefore when you save all the blocks to a file and then load the file the waveform does not appear at first If you have acquired multiple blocks select an old block to display the waveform 3 237 File Operations Entering a File Name When you select the file or the directory from the list the file name or the directory name is displayed in the upper part of the screen Use the keypad on the front panel to input a file name see Figure 3 167 to 9 and keys are used to enter alphabetic characters numbers punctuation and special characters indicated above each key For example the 8 key inputs A B and C as well as 8 Each time you press the key the selected character moves through the list gt
366. z RBW 100 kHz Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off 0 dem _ When you move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the screen the task bar appears Span 36 MHz Task bar RSA icon Figure 2 25 Displaying the Windows XP accessory menu RSA3408A User Manual 2 29 Functional Overview 2 30 RSA3408A User Manual Tutorial This section provides some basic procedures such as applying power displaying the results of measurements and shutting off the analyzer This section uses default settings in most examples Preparations Connecting devices and applying the power Displaying spectrum Using markers and peak search Using averaging and comparison displays Displaying spectrogram Spectrum analysis Modulation analysis Turning off the power NOTE You must complete the installation procedures starting on page 1 9 before performing any of the following steps RSA3408A User Manual 2 31 Tutorial Preparations This tutorial uses a digitally modulated signal The following equipment is used as a signal source Analog signal generator example HP8657B m One 50 Q coaxial cable Connecting the Signal 1 Connect the output of the signal generator to the RF INPUT connector on the Generator analyzer front panel using a coaxial cable see Figure 2 26 GOG IC CI go OI SS EEIN VOC Sew Q
367. ze 40 ValidFrames 40 FramePeriod 160u UnitPeriod 160u FrameLength 160u DateTime 2005 01 10 13 21 16 GainOffset 82 33269 10626668 MultiFrames 1 MultiAddr 0 IOffsetz 0 0475921630859375 QOffset 0 12628173828125 The first character 4 indicates that the number of bytes of the file header is expressed with four characters after the second character In the preceding example Number of bytes of the file header 1 4 0416 421 The number of bytes is therefore 421 Data starts from the 422 4 byte Descriptions of the file header items follow RSA3408A User Manual File Format Type Shows the type of data In the RSA3408A analyzer only this type is used m RSA3408AIQT The data block contains I and Q values in the time domain It is upward compatible with the IOT file of the WCA300 series FrameReverse Shows the frame order This item is always Off in the RSA3408A analyzer The following parameters are provided W Off Frames are stored in the order of acquisition The last frame in the data block is the latest acquired frame On Frames are stored in the reverse order of acquisition The first frame in the data block is the latest acquired frame FramePadding The analyzer adds dummy frames when acquired frames do not fill BlockSize block size Figure 3 169 shows the dummy frames The FramePadding parameter is always set to Before in the RSA3408A analyzer Before Adds dummy frames before valid frames b

RSA3408A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents